Home

GE Fanuc Series 90 Micro PLC Manual

1. ourPuT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER ourPur 240VAG cow o2 cow 5 06 pA il Es gt 45653 Tc UEL pL DL UL SS SESE TST SSS SS TAL AL AL SSS XJ E AY PA A B B B D 5 xj D AAI Yo Ex TE TE S DL TEL IET SSS AIR RIA 1 Im 1 x 1 L 24 VDC OUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT oO PWR Y n Series 90 Micro 9 10 1 02 1814 15 16 oOooooaodao no ns de dj gt ee oooaodooaodao Sa oe PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER A Lk OUTPUT Q 01 ve 02 03 04 05 come 06 coms _ 07 COM 09 COMM Figure 2 4 Removable Terminal Strips Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June
2. SSSSSNS 28 Point DC In Relay Out AC Power Micro PLC IC693UDR005 Figure 3 12 CE Mark Requirements for Cable Connection to Serial Port 2 power supply 4 VDC L N GND 01 VC 02 03 04 05 0 2 06 COM3 07 COM4 100 240 VAC High speed counter inputs should be powerd separetly from discrete inputs The switching devices should be solid state to avoid bounce which could cause unintended counts or strobes This example is connected for positive logic The inputs can be wired for negative logic be reversing the 24 VDC external power supply connections 28 Point DC In Relay Out AC Power Micro PLC IC693UDR005 Figure 3 13 CE Mark Requirements for Power Supply to High Speed Counter Inputs Chapter 3 Installation 3 23 Chapter 4 Field Wiring This chapter contains power and I O specifications and wiring information for the Series 90 Micro PLC Positive and Negative Logic Definitions GFK 1065F The IEC definitions for positive logic and negative logic as applied to the Series 90 Micro PLC circuits are defined as follows Input Points Positive Logic Characteristics e Equivalent to IEC sink input points e Sink current from the input device to the user common or negative power bus e The
3. 8 13 Privilege Level Change 8 14 OEM Protection ee ce ode tase 8 14 System for the Series 90 Micro PLC eese 8 15 I O Scam Sequence ne erdt reete E e edo 8 15 Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points 8 15 Software Filters eet ee eR RET RR e I 8 16 Discrete Input enne nennen nennen entere enne 8 16 Discrete Input Filtering 1 8 16 Limitations of Discrete Input Filtering 8 16 Analog Potentiometer Input 8 17 Input Settings oe ene eue ec eee 8 17 Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering 2 2 0 8 17 DIETA TORIA TEA DZ e rre rere need tetti ee 8 18 Flash Memory ere te Dh a erra ieu edes 8 18 Chapter 9 Powerup Diagnostics nn npe eee dod e 9 2 Faults and Fault Handlimngs ie tine ete et eere e eniti 9 3 Fault Handling gau Se eee Aba t teet tete 9 3 Classes of eb i eter er 9 3 System Response to eene nennen 9 4 Fault Summary References ie eee dedi RH 9 6 Fault Reference Definitions siorr e e a eene nennen enne 9 6 Fault R
4. FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW a44694 ze K GE Fanuc IC690ACC900A CABLE ADAPTER MADE IN USA 1 N p e Figure E 1 Front and Rear View of Converter Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Installation Installation of the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter consists of connecting two cables Select the proper cables for your installation Prewired cables see below are available from GE Fanuc or if cables of different lengths are required by your application you can build your own cables Specifications for building these cables are provided on page E 8 You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable length of 10 feet or less since the necessary power connections of 5VDC and signal ground are derived from the PLC s backplane bus through the cable that connects to the PLC 1 Select one of the three RS 232 compatible cables 10 feet in length that will connect the programmer s or other serial device RS 232 serial port to the RS 232 port on the converter The catalog numbers of these cables IC690CBL701 use with Workmaster industrial computer or IBM PC XT or compatible personal computer IC690CBL702 use with IBM PC AT or compatible personal computer and IC690CBL705 use with Workmaster industrial computer or IBM PS 2 or compatible personal computer 2 standard 6 foot cable
5. 6 16 Prel ad Sttobe lO Be He ah RN Ep 6 16 Count Mode gt cR OE 6 16 Strobe Ed pet ss dederas dete dpi ee p 6 17 Counter Time Base 3 WERE NIRE tt Eee eeu 6 17 Count ceni erre pete DI ee arida 6 17 Output Preset Points iet rre regeret et eee ipa reet 6 18 Preload Value ete ern t Pte er eto gs ditte ite est eo fee PS 6 19 COMPELS UTA OM yo Pm 6 20 90 ein 6 24 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Contents Scanner and Counter Type 6 24 Counter specific 6 25 A Counter uoo ree E E 6 25 Type B Co nt r ise pde IO e uec ino 6 26 Hand Held nennen nennen nennen nnne 6 27 Configuration Screens Common to A4 and B1 3A4 Configurations 6 27 4 Counter Specific Screens ee 6 28 Type B Counter Specific Screens 6 31 ge eere e e 6 34 Command Block lee et eee 6 34 oni ree ee Deae aoe TER
6. 1 Count Emahl BISABHLEB fet Enahle DISABLED Fi cstrobe TRELOGP Pun Dui al DIXSSLED Count Edge FOS si DISABLED Strate Edge Count Sig Hi Limit Lo Limit Pid On Preset More Config Data Existis fur l age Ppp for Presiows Page 92 REPLACE To proceed to the screen for the next counter press the PGDN key GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 25 6 26 Type B Counter In the following screen the B1 3 A4 counter configuration is selected In the 3 4 configuration counters 1 3 form a single type B counter ONE NNNEN ON CENSO ON gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IC693DR5 10 MICRO 26PT DCINARLY UT AC PS HIGH SPEED COUNTERS Ctr Types Failure Mde NORMAL s Counters 1 3 form one TYPE B counter counter 4 is TYPE A se VIEW ONLY PARAMETERS 710497 Length 700497 Length ZAIO001 Length vAgoo2 Length E 20123 Length i 55 Config Bade Exists Pos Next Page Pap Pos Page gt gt 1 REPLACERCAPS The following screen presents the configuration parameters for the type B counter On DC output Micro PLCs Pulse and PWM outputs are not available when the type B counter is configured Refer to Table 6 6 for parameter definitions For details o
7. 151 asinos Jamod y jou syun jenuejod punoj5 11 pue 6 suid aad wnf e Aq si 214 eui 1e qu 10 1 19026991 Pu 19946901 5199 5014 02 06 seueg 104 uondeoxe eui jeus q 0 6 eui 01 uid pue 6 jeduin e Bunoeuuoo sjonpold 214 06 seues uo epeu si siu 59 eui jo pue eui spun uo juo pojoeuuoo eq 0 jeu is qu 18 3A419991 Y 10 eouejsisaJ 0 x 5014 1940 0 eui uoissiusueJ Buoje s1ojoeuuoo jo 59041 19110 0 12euuoo 0 sdujs jeuruiie esn 0 JOU SI 4 2714 uo aq 10 2euuoo ejqeo suonoeuuoo iesseoeu Aue 511 pieoq y uo 0 06 Ajddns samod 06 06 59195 40 99UU0D NOILVLS LSV1 NOILVLS SAV1S YALYSANOO YALSVW 0 19119AU0 J MojJeq se uoiusej srep e ejqeo y Aq eq 10 1 51 Y uo suoijoejje1 sejqeo 227 5 ueu M 92105 mp uod uod eer Su 262 59 aye aye w 91 0 92 uid Gz o 0 941 o9 00 0 00
8. BLKMV WORD Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 CONST 0 0064 CONST IN2 0000 CONST IN3 0000 CONST IN4 0000 CONST IN5 0000 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 0000 BLKMV WORD GFK 1065F Status Word for Custom Protocol COMM_REQs A value of will be returned in the COMM_REQ status word upon successful completion of a CUSTOM protocol command Any other value returned in the COMM_REQ status word is an error code where the low byte is a major error code and the high byte is a minor error code Table 5 9 Status Codes for Custom Protocol 1 01H Successful Completion this is the expected completion value in the COMM_REQ status word 12 OCH Local CSTM_PROT error Port configuration command 65520 FFFOH An error occurred while processing a local command The minor error code identifies the specific error 2 02H COMM REQ command is not supported 13 0DH Remote CSTM_PROT error Put String command 4401 1131H An error occurred while processing a remote command The minor error code identifies the specific error 2 02H String length exceeds end of reference memory type 3 03H COMM data block length is too small String data is missing or incomplete 48 30H Serial output timeout The serial port was unable to transmit the string Could be due to missing CTS signal when the serial port is configured
9. eap 8 4 Deviations from the Standard Program 5 44440440 1 00000018 8 5 Constant Sweep Time Mode sse 8 5 PLC Sweep When in STOP 2 24 4 4204 1 1 0000 00000000000 8 5 Software Structure e e s ote UC e e ee 8 6 Prostrani eret vrbe neben tu 8 6 Data Structure ne 8 6 Powerup and Power Down 5 8 8 Powerup Sequences isc Sai e eee 8 8 GFK 1065F Contents Contents Power Down Conditions 0 ccecceceecceesseceececeeceeeaeceeaceceeceeceaeeeeaaeceeaeeceeeeeaeeneaaecenees 8 8 Power Cy d T 8 0 Clocks and Times o IU oe RU e 8 11 Elapsed Time lock s cet eet trt Sebel 8 11 Time of Day Clock 23 and 28 Point Micro PLCS eere 8 11 Watchdog Timers iie etre Hbc EH ire Hie o be ee nde 8 11 Constant Sweep PR OR ORE T QR aaa 8 11 Timer Function Blocks aet e dete 8 12 Tired Contacts e ederet ee eerte ene 8 12 System SECULILY TEES 8 13 ede e aed ee ERN Ee eae 8 13 Password be e 8 13 Privilege
10. Series 90 Micro PLC Figure 3 7 Logicmaster 90 Micro Programmer Connection through WSI IBM PC Compatible Computer This configuration uses a standard RS 422 or RS 232 serial communications port on the IBM PC compatible computer An RS 422 RS 232 miniconverter IC690ACC901 is required Examples of cable connections for this type of interface are shown in Figure 3 8 Refer to Appendix E Converters for a complete description of the miniconverter 3 10 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F IBM PC XT a45446 Workmaster Series 90 Micro PLC E IC690CBL701 10 Feet RS485 RS232 3 Meters Converter IC690ACC901 IBM PC AT 245447 Series 90 5 Micro PLO 585 7 I ERE IC690CBL702 10 Feet RS485 RS232 3 Meters Converter IC690ACC901 IBM PS 2 45448 Workmaster Series 90 5 Micro PLC b I ils IC690CBL705 10 Feet RS485 RS 232 3 Meters Converter IC690ACC901 IBM Compatible 45449 With RS 422 Interface Series 90 Micro PLC See 15 pin connector assignment Figure 3 8 Examples of Serial Connection from Series 90 Micro PLC to Computer Chapter 3 Installation 3 11 3 12 Multidrop Serial Data Configuration to Series 90 PLCs Note Any installation that includes PLCs over 50 feet 15 2 meters apart must include optical isolation The Series 90 Micro PLC supports a maximum of eight devices on a single serial link p
11. 5 9 Setting the Time of Day Clock 23 and 28 Point 5 9 Configuration and Programming Using Logicmaster 90 Software s 5 10 Configuring Serial Ports uU e idee ee De Rem 5 12 Logicmaster 90 Configuration of Serial Port 2 essere 5 13 Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMM Function eee 5 15 Command Block ase ded pietre ii ie ced etes peer he de etos 5 15 Example bs e ets 5 18 Programmer Attach Feature 14 Point Micro 5 20 Configuring AS CH Output ERE ESSE ieni aieeaii 5 21 Autodial Command 5 21 Put String Command 5 23 Status Word for Custom Protocol COMM 5 25 Configuring Expansion Units 23 and 28 Point Micro PLCSs sess 5 26 Logicmaster Screens for Configuring Expansion Units eese 5 27 Series 90 Micro 14 Point Expansion 5 28 14 Point Generic Expansion Unit nennen nenne 5 28 Generic Expansion Unit eit pente edere 5 29 Link Interface Expansion Unit eese 5 30 HHP Screens for Configuring Expansion Units eee 5 31 Configuring Ge
12. Series 90 30 PLC collects the temperature and speed data Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Woodworking Industry Conveyor Chain Lubricator The Need A control system was needed to automatically lubricate the chains of a conveyor system to decrease wear on the chains The Solution A 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it is costeffective and easily adjusted The analog potentiometers of the Series 90 Micro PLC allow the operator to vary the time delay between lubrications and the amount of oil applied to the chain without programming equipment The Benefits Material replacement costs were reduced because using the Series 90 Micro PLC system doubled the chain life Also the operation is much quieter The Series 90 Micro PLC This provided the best value for small applications Features include e Cost effective e Economical starter pack e PID functionality e Builtin potentiometers to set timer counter presets e Compatibility with Series 9030 PLC programming e 28ypoint model has two communication ports e Pulse width modulation on DC output models e Pulse catch outputs on DC output models GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories 25 GFK 1065F 2 24 VDC inputs specifications 4 7 24 VDC power requirement IC693UDRO002 2 19 A AC inputs described 2 7 specifications 4 17 AC outputs described 2 8 specifications 4 18 Accumulator offset adjustment value 6 3
13. T0002 _ REQ 20101 FT CONST SYSID 0001 CONST 5 00000002 Figure 5 1 CONST IN3 0000 CONST IN4 0000 CONST 5 0000 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 4241 BLKMV WORD CONST Q4 5 R0122 0000 5 0000 IN2 CONST IN3 0000 CONST IN4 0000 CONST 5 0000 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 Ladder Logic Example for Serial Port Configuration Chapter 5 Configuration 5 19 Programmer Attach Feature 14 Point Micro PLCs This feature of the RTU Slave protocol allows you to connect a PLC programmer to the port while RTU Slave is active When the Micro PLC detects a programmer attachment requires appropriately configured PLC ID for multidrop connections the RTU Slave protocol is removed from the port and SNP Slave is installed as the currently active protocol on the port The programmer connection must have the same serial configuration i e baud rate parity stop bits etc as the currently active RTU Slave protocol for it to be recognized This also means that autobaud will not be supported for initiating a programmer connection Once the programmer connection has been enabled normal programmer communications can take place through the port Upon a loss of the programmer connection the most recently established port protocol will be installed as the activ
14. 09 Q0 aye w eeu Gv M 00 146 991 o9 00 0 0 8 8 00 0 5 262 584 0 0 0 0 3 r 19152 UyJO M o 00 2 0 0 2 00622 06921 y n suonoeuuoo exe zer Su eov Sulc c Sd sued papjalys zez Su quajeanba Jo 10279006991 lon idrop Connect 90 PLC Mult les Workmaster Seri 10 D igure F D 15 Appendix D Serial Port and Cables GFK 1065F W31SAS SIHL dO NOIIVU3dO 803 NOILV10SI YO STVILN31Od NOWWOO 3AVH LSNW 39un0OS u3MOd INYS FHL OL Q3193NNOO LON SLINA 31dILINW 1VILN310d LE ONY 6 N33M138 Y AG Q31N3 31d4WI SI 214 FHL LY GH NOILVNIWH3I FHL 11114046991 ANY 167049076921 Su38aWnN 901V1VO 01d 07 06 531835 HOF NOl1d30X3 ONIMOT104 JHL HII M 113HS Q NId S JHL 3GISNI OF 6 M138 V ONILOANNOD AG S10ndOud O1d 06 531935 FHL NO 3QYN SI NOILVNIWH3I SIHL SANIT 3HL 30 FHL LY SLIND NO AINO Q3193NNOO 38 OL 033N 1 915 QU VLVG 3A139384 FHL 39NVISIS3H NOILVNIWH3I 31343 6014 H3H10 OL Nid 91 Nid 91 INIT NOISSINSNVHL 1 40 JHL SHOLO3NNOO 40 S3dAL H3HLO OL 91915 1VNIWH3 ISN 00 Ol LON SI Od SHL NO 1 38 OL HOLO3NNOO 318VO 00 HL 3GISNI SNOILO3NNOO AHVSS3O3N OL SI OSIY
15. RD B lt 13 5 90 B0 Micro 0 joes tl Fg PLC 00 bg 1 9 RT o 0 RTS T I 15 00 serial 00 7 6 gt o Porti 0 lt RTS lt gt 8 CTS B 09 0 CTS B E e 14 RTS B F 09 0 4 11 bg 0 0 7 0V gt 0 0 0 0 SHLD 1 SHLD zip ez 15 pin 15 pin Tonle oe vem Male Female x x X x X X 2 L ze 3 L5 o 10 RD A 9 11 ES 90 12 SD A 90 Series When wiring RS 422 485 multidrop cables 13 SD B 90 90 20 reflections on the transmission line can 9 RT L 100 or 90 30 be reduced by configuring the cable in 15 CTS A E 2o PLC a daisy chain fashion as shown below e 6 RIS A E 00 Master Slave 1 CTS B Bor e 14 RTS B gt 9 4 09 e 47 0 SHLD E dle 15 pin 15 pin Sla Cc Ecce Male Female X X x X x X X X PIN Necessary connections should be made inside e 7 the cable connector to be mounted on the 9 PLC Do not use terminal strips or other types e 21 Series 90 of connectors along the length of the 11 CMM transmission line e 12 23 ron 22 24 Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD 7 signal nee
16. REPEATER 9 ol po 0 CONVERTER 50 00 00 BRICK 00 SEL o 0 0 00 00 00 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 01 00 00 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE Figure E 19 Cable E RS 232 Converter to CMM GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters E 23 Appendix 1065 Cable Data Sheets Cables used with Series 90 Micro PLCs are described in this and other documents This appendix provides a data sheet describing each of the Series 90 Micro PLC cable types so that all cable information can be found in one convenient location Each data sheet contains the following information e Cable name and function e Applicable catalog numbers e Hardware description of cable connector types cable type other relevant hardware e Wiring diagram of cable Information on the following cables is included in this appendix IC693CBL303 Hand Held Programmer F 2 IC690CBL701 PCM to Workmaster IBM F 4 IC690CBL702 PCM to IBM PC AT Pio em e e Pipe tete rita F 5 IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface board to Series 90 F 6 IC690CBL705 PCM to Workmaster IBM 5 2 0 F 7 Micro PLCs 2 Wire Cable Diagr ms dr paene F 8 F 1 IC693CBL303 Hand Hand Programmer Cable The Hand Held Programmer HHP cable provides the connections that allow the HHP and the PLC to communicate It can also be used to connect the RS 485 serial port on t
17. SERIES 90 SERIES 90 MICRO CMM ooooooocoocoeo oooooocoocoeo oooooocoocoeo ooooooocoocoeo 25 PIN FEMALE 15 PIN FEMALE UP TOA 00 00 MAXIMUM OF 09 SERIES 90 4000 o9 MICRO 1200 METERS 09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE TO OTHER MICROs MAXIMUM OF 8 CMMs ON A MULTIDROP TERMINATE THE RD SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE TERMINATE CONNECTION AT FIRST AND LAST DROPS FOR THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHMS RESISTOR ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 Figure F 7 CMM to Multi Drop Setup 2 Wire RS 422 RS 485 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs Series 90 Micro PLC Analog I O Through CALEX Signal Conditioners Application GFK 1065F Analog I O is useful in a broad range of applications for such things as pressure and level sensing positioning and temperature control The Series 90 Micro PLC can be used with CALEX signal conditioning units to provide a cost effective solution Analog channels can be added on a per channel basis which allows customers to tailor their system at an incremental cost CALEX signal conditioning units require only one discrete input for Analog inputs or one discrete output for Analog outputs with setup for use only required in the configuration of the PLC Currently available solutions 11 b
18. oboooogd res 16 tf 85 e oprerp oreste Elec poorer Y Y i f 2 99 4 15 15 Peer 76 FRONT VIEW 50 SIDE VIEW Dimensions inches Millimeters are in parenthesis as ee RGEC SO PCA ER iY Figure 3 3 Micro PLC Mounting Dimensions and Spacing Requirements 23 and 28 Point Chapter 3 Installation 3 3 Mounting a Unit on a DIN Rail The method of mounting a Micro PLC unit on a 35 mm DIN rail is shown below A small clip on the back of the unit holds it in place on the rail 45440 DIN DIN Rail Rail Tab Tab Ox Clip Nn Retracted X Position the upper edge of the unit over Pivot the unit downward for a unit being mounted the DIN rail so that the rail is behind the right side up until the unit is over the DIN rail tab as shown above Pull the clip down Press the clip firmly into place Removing a Unit From a DIN Rail To remove a unit from a DIN rail follow the procedure shown below 45441 DIN Rail DIN A Rail Tab Engaged 4 Clip 4 Clip Retracted Pull clip at the bottom of the unit down until it is Pivot the unit away from the disengaged from the DIN rail rail 3 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Grounding Procedures Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below These grounding procedures must be
19. Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F IC690CBL705 Workmaster PS 2 to RS 485 RS 232 Converter Cable This cable provides RTS 232 signal connections between the RS 485 RS 232 converter IC690ACC901 and a serial port on Workmaster an IBM Personal System 2 PS 2 or equivalent PC Table F 6 Cable Specifications IC690CBL705 Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature type 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 25 pin female D subminiature type AMP 205207 1 or equivalent Cable Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm2 Belden 9536 or equivalent a44033 WORKMASTER AND IBM PS 2 25 25 25 25 MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE Figure F 5 Converter to Workmaster Il or PS 2 Serial Cable GFK 1065F Appendix F Cable Data Sheets 7 2 Wire Cable Diagrams a50001 SERIES 90 SERIES 90 CMM PORT PORT 1 OR 2 eo Pht TERMINATE CONNECTION ON THE 15 FIN FEMALE MICRO PLC FEMALE JUMPER INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 Figure F 6 CMM to Micro with Flow Control None 2 Wire RS 422 RS 485 MAKE 2500002 CONNECTIONS SHIELDED INSIDE TWISTED NE d PAIRS
20. 11 eest itane 20 Sewage Wastewater Lift 21 Wastewater 20 er te 22 Water Plow Controls inated E welsh heli tees H 23 Wire Manufacturing Industry sees ener nennen nennen nennen nenne H 24 Quality Control in n oet reete DOR RO RUE ERES Ern H 24 Woodworking Industry re Ier eene tte te eto eee tibi eg die pee de H 25 Conveyor Chain Lubricator eese nennen nennen H 25 Contents xix Chapter Quick Start 1 This chapter provides an overview of the steps required to get your Micro PLC set up and running The Series 90 Micro PLC product line offers models with different capabilities and special features to meet the needs of a wide range of applications For this reason you will need to refer to other chapters in this manual for details pertaining to the specific Micro PLC that you have For summaries of Micro PLC features and specifications for each model refer to Chapter 2 No of I O Points Configuration Power Supply Catalog Numbers 14 8 DC inputs 6 relay outputs 100 to 240 VAC 1 69300 001 i 8 DC inputs 6 relay outputs 12 to 24 VDC IC693UDR002 8 AC inputs 6 AC outputs 100 to 240 VAC IC693UA A003 8 DC inputs 6 DC outputs 12 to 24 VDC IC693UDD104 13 DC inputs 1 DC out
21. GFK 1065F Index Index 9 Looking for more information 6 Artisan 2 Visit us on the web at http www artisan scientific com for more information QUALITY INSTRUMENTATION GUARANTEED Price Quotations Drivers Technical Specifications Manuals and Documentation Artisan Scientific is Your Source for Quality New Certified Used Pre owned Equipment Tens of Thousands of In Stock Items Fast Shipping and Delivery Equipment Demos Hundreds of Manufacturers Supported Leasing Monthly Rentals Consignment Service Center Repairs InstraView Remote Inspection Experienced Engineers and Technicians on staff in our Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with our State of the art Full Service In House Service Center Facility Innovative InstraView website at http www instraview com We buy used equipment We also offer credit for Buy Backs and Trade Ins Sell your excess underutilized and idle used equipment Contact one of our Customer Service Representatives today Talk to a live person 888 88 SOURCE 888 887 6872 Contact us by email sales artisan scientific com Visit our website http www artisan scientific com
22. Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate field devices and the input circuits is supplied by an isolated 24 VDC supply Table 4 1 Specifications for 24 VDC Input Circuits Rated Input Voltage Input Voltage Range Input Current Input Resistance Input Threshold Voltage Input Threshold Current Response Time Isolation Voltage 24 volts DC 0 to 30 volts DC 7 5mA typical 2 8 Kohms 15V minimum 5V maximum 4 5mA maximum 1 5mA minimum 0 5 to 20ms user configurable as regular input 10015 as HSC input See Software Filters in Chapter 8 for details 500V AC RMS field side to logic side 500V RMS between groups if one group is powered by an external 24V power supply Positive connection shown reverse polarity of 24VDC power supply 5V a45686 connections for negative connection Terminal LED A 2 8k 0 Frequency V gt CPU Filter To other circuits yo Figure 4 1 Typical 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic Input Circuit Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 7 Potentiometer Analog Inputs All Models 4 8 Two potentiometers located on the front panel of the Micro PLC allow you to manually set input values that are stored in AI16 and 7 The top potentiometer controls AI16 and the bottom one controls 7 see Figure 2 3 Due to the nature of analog i
23. Micro SNP SNPX Slave SNP SNPX Master 4 Wire RTU 2 Wire RTU PLCs Slave Slave 14 point Port 1 not supported Port 1 Port 1 All releases Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 10 and later 23 point Ports 1 and 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 10 and later 28 point Ports 1 and 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Rel 2 01 and later Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 10 and later A so requires the following versions or later hardware IC693UDROOILP1 IC693UDRO02LP1 IC693UAA003JP1 IC693UDROOSJP1 IC693 UALOO6BP1 IC693UAA007HPI and IC693UDROIOBPI SNP SNPX The full set of SNP X Master commands as described in SNP X Commands in the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 is supported on Port 2 of the 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs RTU Slave This feature is implemented as specified in the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 RTU as implemented in the Micro PLC is a subset of the Modbus Remote Terminal Unit serial communications protocol Prior to Release 3 10 RTU protocol is only supported in the 4 wire implementation Support for 2 Wire RTU was added in Release 3 10 Table 2 5 lists the function codes supported by the Micro PLC GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 9 Table 2 5 RTU Function Codes Panton Code gt 5 For the 14 point unit an additional feature is implemented that automatically detects whethe
24. Model Typical Delta Delay at 24 VDC 16mA output 1 5Kohm load GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 41 Note In Logicmaster 90 when entering hexadecimal numbers in a reference table a leading A through F must be preceeded by a zero for example OFFFF To enter a two s complement number enter it as a negative integer int For additional information on editing values in reference tables see Reference Tables in the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Sample Calculation for PWM Output The formulas provided with Table 4 6 can be used to determine the value of AQ3 required at the fastest frequency to produce a minimum ON and OFF pulse width when the application is primarily concerned with varying the frequency For example an application might require a PWM output of 0 to 2 Khz with an input device that requires a minimum pulse width of 50 us With a fixed ON time the worst case OFF time occurs at 2 Khz Therefore the value of AQ3 that will guarantee at least a 50 us OFF pulse width is given by OFF time Period ON time 50 us OFF 500 us ON time ON time 450 us AQ3 450ps 90ps 9 84Mhz 8 1 443 5 42 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Pulse Output IC693UDD104 GFK 1065F You can select the frequency 10Hz to 2Khz of the pulse train by writing a value 32768 to 32767 to memory location e g AQ123 The number of pu
25. fogs te pets Cena pcr cnt 1 TWISTED INSIDE D CONNECTORS PAIRS SERIES 90 CMM PORT 10R2 RTS A CTS A 25 PIN FEMALE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK 150 OHMS 25 FEMALE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROPCABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 CMM SLAVE 3 CMM SLAVE 2 25 PIN ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY 7 MALE CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE CMM IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO TO OTHER DEVICES USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TERMINATE THE RD 87 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION LINE ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY ON THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR SUPPLIED ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 Figure E 17 Cable C RS 422 Twisted Pair GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e oooooooocooco J2 0
26. yess codecs Tcl Compati Dili ty ates 2 3 Functional Description neni onii Een e Cet E Eae 2 4 CPU s etr teme e uie nt estere 2 4 High Speed Counters IC693UDRO01 1 002 005 IC693UAL006 IC693UDRO10 2 6 eon RF RS 2 6 Type BCOUDIBE 4s eie o e ere d tae eee tete 2 6 DC Output IC693UDR005 010 UALO0OD6 esee een 2 6 PWM Output scotch Eo dee e ne ERU OUR CO HEU 2 6 Pulse Ouip t nite trei ph E DER CR eerte rro 2 7 ASCII Output IC693UDR005 010 UALO0O6 cessere 2 7 I O Board ert fleet pe he ete ote espe dus 2 7 Input Circuits tiii i the e ete te he ED eoe Ehe 2 7 DC Input Circuits I1C693UDR001 002 005 010 006 2 7 AC Input Circuits IC693UAA003 007 eese 2 7 Potentiometer Inputs Models eese 2 7 Outp t Circuits De Dm 2 8 Relay Output Circuits IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UEX011 UALO0O6 2 8 AC Output Circuits IC693UA A003 007 cssc 2 8 DC Output IC693UDR005 010 6930 1006 2 8 Analog O 1 6930 006 eene emere tenete nenne 2 8 Input Output C
27. 14 Point DC In Relay Out AC Power IC693UDR001 UEX011 Inputs Eight 24 VDC positive negative logic input circuits See page 4 7 Outputs Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits See page 4 10 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC output power supply See page 4 12 Field wiring diagram See page 4 22 AC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UDR001 UEX011 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Current 18 A maximum at 120 VAC 30 A maximum at 200 VAC 40 A maximum at 265 VAC Inrush Time 2 ms for 40A Input Current 0 12 A typical at 200 VAC 0 25 A typical at 100 VAC Input Power Supply Rating 35 VA GFK 1065F Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 3 14 Point DC In Relay Out DC Power IC693UDR002 14 Point DC In DC Out DC Power IC693UDD104 Inputs Eight 24 VDC positive negative logic input circuits See page 4 7 Outputs Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits See page 4 10 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC output power supply See page 4 12 Field wiring diagram See page 4 22 DC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UDR002 UDD104 Range 12 15 to 24 25 VDC Hold up 4 ms at 10 VDC __ Inrush Current 65 A maximum at 24 VDC 81 A maximum at 30 VDC Input Current 0 8 A typical at 12 VDC 0 4 A typical at 24 VDC Input Power Supply Rating 15W 20VA Note The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage approximately 4 VDC than at rated input voltage A minimum of 2 0 A is requir
28. June 1998 GFK 1065F eoinog OY V 1 roo ou ou on ooo moo fools mola _ 1482243 Note DC inputs can be connected as mu EN mE either positive or negative logic In the following figure through 18 are connected as positive 19 through 116 are connected as negative 0 s eufiis eqouis 10 sjunoo peeds pepuejuiun esneo Bulounog 0 215 pios eq pjnous indui y peeds se eje 81 j ueuM 7 1 loanowal 1 92JnOS JOMOd 9914nog J9MOd 99Jnog e5Jnog JOMOd oa Tear QNO WG OVA 0v2 001 lt 10 OV 10 OV 10 OV 10 OV 10 OV O lt Oca E zi aA EL Figure 4 14 28 Point DC In Relay Out Modules IC693UDR005 010 4 23 Chapter 4 Field Wiring GFK 1065F eoinog a O a O a O a o a 20 a a E 4 zi m 4 zi Cue vo oo Teo eo Teo o T Te T TL T T T meo on o froo for
29. type A operation 6 8 type operation 6 15 Addressing data Agency approvals 3 20 Alarm Processor software 9 3 Analog I O calibration configuration described 2 8 overview 7 2 specifications input output Analog potentiometer input filtering 8 17 overview 2 7 Appendices cable data sheets F 1 case histories H 1 converters E 1 fixed I O map locations B 3 instruction timing A 1 PLC software cross reference C 1 reference types B 1 sample application for PWM and Pulse outputs 6 1 serial port and cables D 1 Approvals standards and general specifications A Quad B counting ASCII output configuration overview Autobaud Averaging filter 8 17 Index Battery estimated lifetime Baud rate settings Bias resistor 5 39 for PWM and Pulse train outputs 4 12 5 35 BLKMV function HSC example 6 34 Serial Port 2 5 15 Bulletin board 9 9 Cable and connector specifications for serial port D 2 Cable connections Hand Held 3 8 serial communications multidrop 3 12 work station interface 3 10 Cable diagrams for isolated repeater converter E 20 multidrop connections PLC to PLC multidrop point to point connection programmer to PLC multidrop serial connection 0 7 Cables connecting programming devices 3 9 EST expansion port pinouts Hand Held P
30. 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 96 0 96 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oe 810128UU02 episul 00622 06921 eye 5 zez su 80997 cov Su ecv Su cec Su 10 80218 20692 222 54 29 5 M 10 e Sd ith Converter lon Wi Figure D 8 Multidrop Configurat Appendix D Serial Port and Cables GFK 1065F a45649 Workmaster or Workmaster Il Shielded Make connections Series Wsl inside D connectors 90 PLC Pin airs 00 2800 UJ 2 2 SHIELD 37 IELD 5 Connector Connector IMPORTANT DO NOT use terminal strips or other types of connectors along the length of the transmission Series line when wiring a multidrop serial data configuration Maximum length of 4 000 feet 1 200 meters Connector NOTE When wiring RS 422 485 multidrop cables reflections on the transmission line can be reduced by configuring the cable in a daisy chain fashion as shown below Series Workmaster gt 00 25 2 Itis also recommended that any necessary 4 connections be made inside the cable 8 7 connector to be
31. 16 4076921 siequnu 5014 06 88195 104 uondeoxe y uir ljeus q uid G eui 01 pue 6 uid 1 e Aq sjonpold 214 06 59 95 ay uo epeu si siu seul y jo spue eui uo si GY VLVG 3AI3O3U 99 10 92018151591 x D 13 je 58214194001 uld g 100 S eui 01551 5 ay Jo ay Huoje jo 590 419 10 01129102 0 0 50115 1 jo esn 94179014 eui uo eq 0 10128UU09 9 082 eui 00 epeu Aue 291 si 00 uo 00 pu 07 06 59195 00 jddns uo uod 00 06 06 591195 00 101989uu02 06 591195 00 00 15 1527 uoles Aes 19156 00 5 0 0 S uolysey 1 e ejqeo y Aq equeo 00 19 UOISSIWSUBJ BY uo sejqeo 227 5 uay M 1 o AS 59 5 1527 uod uod 2027 58 060 5 uld g uld gy uld z uld gz uld z uld Gz uod 22 5 06 591195 0 00 0 M 0 00 0 M 0 M
32. 40 A maximum at 265 VAC Input Current 14 point Micro PLCs 0 12 A typical at 200 VAC 0 25 A typical at 100 VAC 28 point DC In Relay Out 0 26 A typical at 100 VAC Micro PLCs 0 12 A typical at 200 VAC 28 point AC In AC Out 0 16 A typical at 100 VAC Micro PLCs 0 09 A typical at 200 VAC Input Power Supply Rating UDROO1 35 VA 003 20 007 25 UDR005 40 VA UEX011 35 VA AC Power Requirements IC693UAL006 Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Currents 35 A maximum at 200 VAC 46 A maximum at 265 VAC Input Current 0 35 A typical at 100 VAC 0 22 A typical at 200 VAC Isolation 1500VAC rms field side to logic both power supply input and 24 VDC power supply output Input Power Supply Rating 50 VA Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 2 13 DC Power Requirements DC Power Requirements IC693UDR002 010 Range 14 point Micro PLC 12 15 to 24 25 VDC 12 15 to 24 10 VAC 28 point Micro PLCs 24 20 25 VDC 24 1596 10 VAC Hold up 14 point Micro PLCs 4 ms at 10 VDC 10 ms at 12 VDC 28 point Micro PLCs 2ms at 9 5 VDC Inrush Current 14 point Micro PLC 65 A maximum at 24 VDC 81 A maximum at 30 VDC 28 point Micro PLC 65 A maximum at 24 VDC 81 A maximum at 30 VDC Inrush Time 14 point Micro PLC 10 ms for 81 A 28 point Micro PLC 10 ms for 81 A Input Current 14 point Micro PLC 0 4 A typical at 24 VDC 0 8 A typical at 12 VDC 28 point Micro PLC 1 4 A typical at 24 VDC Not
33. 5 RS 422 RS 485 Interface Cables Maximum cable length 1000 feet 300m Cable Type 6 feet 2m Cable type Belden 9508 AWG 24 0 22 mm 30 feet 10m Cable type Belden 9309 AWG 22 0 36 mm gt 30 feet up to 1000 feet 300m Same cable as for 30 feet Connector Type 15 pin D type Male Subminiature both ends RS 232 Interface Cable Maximum cable length 50 feet 15m Connector Type 25 pin D type Female Subminiature converter end 9 pin 15 pin or 25 pin depending on type of connector on your serial device D type Female Subminiature programming device end Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire Since it is sometimes difficult to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs the Belden 9309 has an extra pair you might end up with a cable with extra pairs For distances over 10 feet the 5 volt DC logic power source must be provided externally by connecting an external power supply to the 5V and SG OV connections at the converter end of the cable The 5V pin at the PLC connector end of the cable must not be connected to the cable The 5V and SG connections from the external power supply must be isolated from its own power line ground connection Ensure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection Seri
34. 60 60000 0001 and 1 T 1000 Because the rotation is at the same speed as in example 1 the CTB reading now equals 521 and RPM aly 1000 521 1000 CTB reading is now RPM with 1 RPM resolution 6 40 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Application Example Input Capture GFK 1065F The HSC strobe inputs can act as pulse catch inputs for inputs 2 4 6 and 8 by using the Strobe Status bits as a latch To use this feature 1 Configure the Micro PLC to use the HSC function with Strobe input 2 Enable A type counter s Any or all of the counters can be enabled The corresponding Strobe Status bit will be latched if there is a pulse of at least 100 psec in width The Reset Strobe bits can be used as clear functions for the latched status bits Example To capture pulses on input I2 enable Counter and configure strobe for the Pld strobe parameter see Configuration in this chapter You can also configure POS positive or NEG negative for the Strobe Edge parameter The Strobe Status bit 1498 will be latched if there is a 100 microsecond or longer pulse on 12 To clear this bit the logic program should write a 1 followed by a 0 to the corresponding output to the HSC Q498 For other inputs see Status Bits I on page 6 5 Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 41 Chapter 1065 Analog I O The 23 point Micro PLC IC693UAL006 features
35. Discrete Memory Reference Definitions Discrete reference input point The state of the input as detected during the last input scan 0 Discrete reference output point The state of the output as last set by the application program User internal Internal coil used for boolean logic when the result of a rung is only required to be used later in the program as conditional logic Temporary Internal coil similar to M reference except that it is non retentive System discretes Include system bits used internally by the CPU fault bits S SA SB SC for holding system fault data and reserved bits for future system expansion 8 6 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Notes for Discrete Memory Definitions Temporary T references are not saved across a power failure that is they are non retentive M and Q memories are retentive unless used with a normal coil which is non retentive Retentive memory is backed up by a super cap 14 point or lithium battery 23 point and 28 point For performance specifications for the super cap and battery see Specifications in Chapter 2 e User internals are useful when the coil in a rung is only required to be used later in the logic solution as conditional logic and not outside the PLC The following example shows 9610012 and 9610016 being used to set user internal 0005 similar to the use of a control relay in electromechanical l
36. E 18 system aaa Replacing fuses AC outputs AC In AC Out models only 3 13 Reset preload bits HSC 6 6 Reset strobe bits HSC 6 6 Resistor bias 4 12 5 35 Response 4 13 Revisions to this manual RFI standards iii RPM indicator sample HSC application 6 40 RS 232 pin assignments 5 point to point connections 0 7 RS 422 interface D 1 point to point connections 0 11 serial ports Micro PLC described 2 9 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter cable description E 4 features functions installation procedures 3 jumper configuration user options 7 location in system E 2 logic diagram E 6 RS 232 interface pin assignments E 5 RS 422 RS 485 interface pin assignments E 5 specifications RS 485 RS 422 to RS 232 converter overview D 6 RTU configuring 5 12 defined function codes 2 10 Run mode transition to 5 35 Sample applications high speed counter 6 40 G 3 Micro PLC H 1 PWM output G 4 Scan input 8 3 output 8 4 Scan sequence 8 15 Index 7 Index Index 8 Security OEM protection 8 14 system 8 13 Self test LED blink error codes defined normal powerup sequence Serial Port 2 CE Mark requirements for connections COMM REQ function block format Serial port and cables cable and connector s pecifications D 2 IBM AT serial port D 6 multidrop connections RS 232 point to point connections D 7 RS 232 RS 485 converter D
37. Fuses 4 13 for output circuit protection 4 11 replacing AC In AC Out models only 3 13 sizes 3 15 G Gains and Offsets default 7 9 GE Fanuc bulletin board 9 9 General wiring procedures field wiring 4 21 Generic expansion unit configuration 5 29 Generic output See ASCII output Getting started 1 2 Gradual power down 8 8 Grounding 3 5 H Hand Held Programmer analog I O configuration 7 7 configuration screens high speed counter configuration 6 27 memory 5 4 useful functions Hand Held Programmer abbreviations 1 3 4 counter configuration 6 23 complete listing C 2 Type A counter 6 21 Hardware requirements for installation 3 1 Index 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 Hazardous location note Hex numbers in reference tables 5 37 High limit HSC configuring for A counters configuring for B 6 32 High speed counters Q data from CPU 6 6 analog input data 1 6 4 COMM_REQ description 6 38 CPU interface 6 3 data automatically sent by 6 4 data automatically sent to 6 6 output bits Q 6 6 overview 2 6 sample application 6 40 G 3 status bits 1 status codes AL 6 5 type A operation 6 8 type B operation 6 14 High speed counters inputs described 2 7 logic connections 4 9 terminal assignments High speed counters outputs described 2 8 terminal assignments 6 2 High speed DC output I O
38. GFK 0402 A list of execution times for each programming function can be found in Appendix A Output Scan During the output scan Micro PLC outputs are scanned from lowest to highest reference address Outputs are updated using data from the Q for discrete outputs memories The output scan is completed when all output data has been sent to all Micro PLC outputs If the CPU is in STOP mode and the I OScan Stop parameter is configured to NO the output scan will be skipped and outputs will be cleared If the CPU is in STOP mode with I O scan enabled I OScan Stop configured to YES the scan is executed and the outputs will be updated using data from the Q memories Programmer Service This part of the sweep is dedicated to communicating with the programmer If there is a programmer attached the CPU executes the Programmer Communications Window Figure 8 2 Support is provided for the HHP and for other programmers that can connect to the serial port and use the Series Ninety Protocol SNP protocol The CPU performs one operation for the programmer each sweep that is it honors one service request or responds to one key press If the programmer makes a request that requires more than 6 milliseconds to process the request processing will be spread out over several sweeps so that no sweep is impacted by more than 6 milliseconds Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Not attached Hand Held Attached Pro
39. HHP compatible is available to connect the RS 422 RS 485 port on the converter to the RS 485 port on the PLC The catalog number of this cable is IC693CBL303 Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered down e Connect the 25 pin male connector on the 10 foot cable to the 25 pin female connector on the converter e Connect the female connector 9 pin or 25 pin on the opposite end of this cable to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming or other serial device If you build your own cable use a connector that is compatible with your serial device e Note that both ends of the 6 foot RS 422 RS 485 compatible cable are the same a 15 pin male connector is attached at both ends Connect one end of this cable to the 15 pin female connector on the RS 422 RS 485 connector on the converter Connect the other end of this cable to the 15 pin female connector which interfaces to the RS 485 compatible serial port on the Series 90 Micro Series 90 30 or Series 90 70 PLC For the Series 90 30 PLCS this connector is accessed by opening the hinged door on the power supply The serial port connector for the Series 90 70 PLC is on the CPU module and is accessed by opening the hinged door on the module On Micro PLCs the serial port is located behind a hinged door on the front of the unit On 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs which have two serial ports be sure to use Port 1 to connect the processor GFK
40. Modem TT Modem turnaround time 10ms unit This is the time required for the modem to start data transmission after receiving the transmit request Idle Time Time in seconds the CPU waits to receive the next message from the programming device before it assumes that the programming device has failed and proceeds to its base state Communication with the programmer is terminated and will have to be reestablished Sweep Mode Normal sweep runs until it is complete NORMAL Constant sweep runs for time specified in Sweep Tmr CNST SWP Sweep Tmr Constant sweep time in milliseconds Editable when NORMAL mode N A N A sweep mode is CNST SWP non editable otherwise CNST SWP mode 5 200 100 f configured to disable powerup diagnostics the 28 point DC In Relay Out DC Power unit IC693UDRO10 will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24VDC The 24VDC power source for the UDRO10 unit must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and maintain a 24VDC voltage level see power supply specifications for inrush requirements in Chapter 2 Disabling powerup diagnostics has the following effects The I O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not work No expansion units can be used If expansion units are connected while powerup diagnostics are disabled faults will be logged in the I O tables All HHP key sequences will be ignored wh
41. The 28point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it is cost effective and is a member of the Series 90 family The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as the Series 9030 PLC This allows the customer to buy only one software package to program applications for the shrink machine and other larger machines The Benefits The flexibility of the Series 90 Micro PLC allows the parameters to be changed at a control panel without any programming modifications Shrink Wrapper The Series 90 Micro PLC uses input from various sensors to determine the position of product and parameters from the control panel to sequence the wrapping of the products GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 13 Videocassette Packaging The Need An inexpensive control system was needed to replace relays and hardwired counters The system must be able to read an encoder and sequence the machine s operation based on input counts The system must control the conveyor stacker unstacker shrink wrap station and interfaces to the label applicator control using digital I O The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it offers builtin high speed counters a builtin 24VDC power supply and cost effectiveness The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC proved to be easy to use cost effective and easy to install with less wiring Hundreds of dollars in wiring and device savings were realized per machine Videocassette
42. There is one password for each of levels 2 through 4 in the PLC and each password may be unique however the same password can be used for more than one level Passwords can only be entered or changed using the Logicmaster 90 Micro programmer or the HHP Passwords are one to four ASCII characters in length The HHP only allows the ASCII characters 0 to 9 and A to F The privileges granted at each level are a combination of that level plus all lower levels The levels and their privileges are Level 1 Any data except passwords may be read This includes all data memories I Q AQ R etc fault tables and all program block types data value and constant No values may be changed in the PLC This is the default level for a system with passwords at all levels Level 2 This level allows level privileges plus write access to the data memories I R etc Level 3 This level allows levels 1 and 2 privileges plus write access to the application program in STOP mode only Level 4 This is the default level in a system with no passwords assigned This level the highest allows the privileges of levels 1 through 3 plus read and write access to all memories and the ability to display set or delete passwords for levels 1 through 3 in both RUN and STOP modes configuration data can be written only in STOP mode Chapter 8 System Operation 8 13 8 14 Privilege Level Change Requests To enter or change passwords the pro
43. To set counter 3 output to turn on at 5000 1388H counts load Command Code 030B LS data word 1388 and off at 12000 2 counts load Command Code 0315 LS data word 2EEO Load Preload Command Code 1FH Used to change the count value that will be loaded into the counter Accumulator when the Preload input is activated Example To make counter 2 start at 2500 09C4H counts at its preload signal load Command word 021F LS data word 09C4 6 36 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 6 9 Data Commands Type B Counter Load Accumulator Load ON Preset n Load OFF Preset n Load Preload Note n Counter 1 or 4 only counter 1 is B type The bytes in the command word are always treated as independent bytes counter ID byte and a command code byte Note Command words can be entered in decimal format For example Load Counter 1 Accumulator 01 01 hex or 1025 decimal Load Counter 1 Hi Limit 01 02 hex or 1026 decimal Load Counter 1 Lo Limit 01 03 hex or 1027 decimal Command Code 01H Used to set any value within counter limits directly into the Accumulator If a count is received at the same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value the count will be lost This happens because the CPU must read the Accumulator increment it and write back to it during which time received counts are ignored Example To set Counter 1 to 2211H load COMM REQ comma
44. When the Logicmaster 90 Micro programmer is connected through the serial connection the programmer could detect a disconnect If the PLC addresses the programmer and receives no response the PLC detects a disconnect and then drops the programmer privilege level to the default privilege level level 4 The PLC detects a disconnect of the HHP using a dedicated hardware signal When the HHP is disconnected the PLC reverts to privilege level 4 Upon connection of the PLC Logicmaster 90 requests the protection status of each privilege level from the PLC Logicmaster 90 then requests the PLC to move to the highest unprotected level thereby giving the programmer access to the highest unprotected level without its having to request any particular level When the HHP is connected to the PLC the PLC reverts to the highest unprotected level OEM Protection The OEM protection feature provides a higher level of security than password protection and is used by an original equipment manufacturer to further restrict access to program logic and configuration parameters When OEM protection is enabled locked the user has no access to the logic program and read only access to the configuration The OEM protection state is retentive across a power cycle Refer to the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 and to the Logicmaster 90 on line HELP screens for details on the use of this feature Series 90 Micro
45. or equal to Search greater srgt 117 to 120 3 02 than Search greater srge 121 to 124 3 02 than or equal to 3 02 all all all a a all all Array move mova 130 to 134 all all Conversion BCD to integer a a al EE a a 1 Control no operation ww _ a a Nested Jump jump 03 2 01 all all nested master mcr 04 2 01 control relay Target number for label 07 2 01 all all jump nested endmcr mcr 08 2 01 all all Master Control not supported NA all Relay non nested End Master not supported NA 2 01 all all Control Relay non nested service Request em 9 am A comment is displayed by the HHP as a noop instruction You cannot directly program a noop instruction with the HHP or with Logicmaster 90 software Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table C 3 Ranges and Sizes of User References 23 and 28 23 and 28 14 Point Point 14 Point Point Micro Reference Type Micro Micro Series 90 20 Micro Series 90 20 User program logic Not applicable 3K words 6K words 1K words Discrete inputs 10001 10001 10006 8 bits 16 bits 10008 Discrete inputs 10009 10009 10017 504 bits 504 bits 32 bits internal 10512 10512 10048 Discrete outputs 00001 00001 00012 12 bits 0006 Discrete outputs internal 00013 4 bits w LED indicators 00016 Discrete outputs 00007 00007 00017 506 bits 506 bits 32 bits internal 00512
46. string OO wa s jme mma 777 ewe ono C o fonon Nome often commanding T0004 4 BLKMV BLKMV BLKMV WORD WORD WORD CONST IN1 Q R0201 CONST IN1 Q R0108 CONST IN Q 0009 0001 0D38 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 0000 0012 0000 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 0008 5441 0000 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 0000 5444 0000 CONST 5 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 0000 3332 0000 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 0000 3534 0000 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 1130 3736 0000 4 Figure 5 2 Sample Autodial Command Block Tone dials the number 234 5678 Note After the Put String command block has been sent an Autodial command block must be sent to hang up the phone connection In the example above you would replace the string DT in word 11 with the string HO 48H 4FH 5 22 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Put String Command Block Table 5 8 lists a sample COMM_REQ command block that sends the data string hello world using the Put String command 04401 The ladder logic rung that creates this command block is shown in Figure 5 3 A maximum transmit timeout of 30 seconds is specified The string data begins at Word 10 This command is similar to the Autodial command except
47. then press the ENT key to accept the change The following screen will appear R0 05 AI S ChiMode current 4 Press the gt key to access the following channel range screen R0 05 AI S ChlRange 4 20mA 5 Press the key to select the 0 20mA range then press the ENT key to accept the change R0 05 AI S ChlRange 0 20mA 6 Press the key to access the following channel 2 mode screen R0 05 AI S Ch2Mode voltage 7 Press the key to select channel 2 current mode then press the ENT key to accept changes R0 05 AI S Ch2Mode current 8 Press the key to access the following channel 2 range screen RO 05 AI S Ch2Range 4 20mA Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 7 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 Press the key to select 0 20mA range and then press the ENT key to accept the change RO 05 AI S Ch2Range 0 20mA Press the key to go to configuration for the analog output channel which appears as follows RO 06 S AQ1 AQ012 Press the key to go to the channel 1 mode screen 20 06 S ChlMode voltage Press the key to select channel 1 current mode then press the ENT key to accept the change 20 06 S ChlMode current Press the key to access the following channel 1 range screen RO 06 AQ S ChlRange 4 20mA Press the key to select the 0 20mA range and then press the ENT key to accept the change RO 06 AQ S C
48. which must be configured by a COMM REQ function in ladder logic For definitions of general parameters see page 5 2 Note To support RTU Slave protocol on Port 1 of the 14 point Micro PLC a programmer attach feature is supported This feature allows connection of the programmer while the port is configured as RTU For a description of this feature see Programmer Attach Feature on page 5 20 COMM REGs directed to Port 1 of the 14 point Micro PLC will not be processed while the HHP is attached Any COMM REQ sent to Port 1 of the 14 point Micro PLC when the HHP is attached will be queued and processed when the HHP is removed On 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs Port 2 is provided for general purpose communications using SNP SNPX and RTU slave protocols Port 2 can also be configured as an SNP SNPX master This port can be used to monitor the Micro PLC s status while programmer functions are being performed on the primary serial port Port 1 Also when no programmer is connected through Port 1 Logicmaster 90 can monitor program execution and read and write data through Port 2 Port 2 does not have autobaud capability Port 1 does On release 3 0 and later 28 point Micro PLCs a separate SNP ID for Port 2 can be configured using Logicmaster 90 software release 8 01 or later On earlier releases Port 2 shares the SNP ID with Port 1 and the SNP ID can only be changed through Port 1 Port 2 configuration can be changed through the Logicm
49. 0 4 000 counts 0 32 000 0125 o Current Mode 0 20 0004 A 0 4 000 counts 0 3200 0 Current Mode 4000 20 000u 800 4 000 0 32 000 o Calibration Procedure To perform the calibration procedures you will need a precision analog meter 1mV voltage accuracy and current accuracy Calibration of Input Channels For each channel the procedure consists of the following steps 1 Apply a reference voltage or current at a low range to the input The reference signal must be measured precisely by a precision analog meter Record the value 2 For the channel being calibrated read the register and record the low value 3 Applya reference voltage or current at a high range to the input Precisely measure the reference signal and record the value 4 For the channel being calibrated read the AI register and record the high value 5 Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using a SVCREQ instruction See Storing Calibration Constants The Micro PLC firmware will automatically calculate the calibration gain and offset using the following formulas Meter tig Meter Gain s bY x DefaultGain PAL ig ow AL iien x Gain Offset Metern 7 10 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Calibration of Output Channels For each channel the procedure consists of the following steps 1 Write a low
50. 0 0 0 0 o0 ISOLATED 00 o0 REPEATER 00 1 e o0 CONVERTER 00 cof BRICK 00 MM SLAVE 2 0 0 CMM SLAVE 3 CMMS 05 USED AS 00 0 0 CONVERTER 00 1 00 09 q 0 0 A vie pe Se 25 PIN ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY FEMALE CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE CMM IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED X X X USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE X TRANSMISSION LINE J2 SW ON e 16 RD 0 0 0 0 17 RD B 09 00 15 90 4 F 0 0 0 0 14 SD gt 0 0 ISOLATED 0 0 TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY e 11 RTS A 0 REPEATER 0 ON THE CMM INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 4 10 RTS gt 0 0 CONVERTER 0 120 OHM RESISTOR ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER 8 F Jog BRICK lo INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR SUPPLIED 0 0 0 0 x ON THE CMM311 ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS 422 RS 485 9 00 B 150 OHMS 00 18 TERM Jo 00 gt 0 0 7 25 PIN 25 PIN v FEMALE TO OTHER DEVICES MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP TERMINATE THE RD 8 SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE Figure E 18 Cable D RS 422 Twisted Pair Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F a45239 Ji SW CTS J2 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 T 00 SERIES 90 Ool ISOLATED 9 00
51. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SERIES 90 CMM 25 PIN FEMALE SW ISOLATED CONVERTER BRICK USED ASA CONVERTER 25 PIN FEMALE SW ON ISOLATED REPEATER CONVERTER BRICK USED AS A REPEATER 25 PIN FEMALE 44931 cooooococooooco oco Jj ooooooooceo E 21 E 22 SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS a44932 TWISTED INSIDE D CONNECTORS J2 SW ON Jit PIN PAIRS Y EN DU 50 o 50 4 16 ae NUNT T o 00 SD B 17 r1 Phi 00 0 00 1 apa 15 T ISOLATED e 1 O po O T 05 0 0 00 REPEATER 00 2 ED hey T 0 CONVERTER 00 PORT 0 2 00 00 1500 8 N 9 m o oo lt TERM 23 fa o Gnd 7 0 0 0 9 M E 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE FEMALE X X WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROPCABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY lt a e SW CTS J2 CHAIN FASHION ASSHOWN BELOW 4 a MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 0 0 0 0 0
52. 00 QuVOS NO 00 0317001 04 06 531035 00 AlddNS NO 9 0917001 06 06 531035 zzv su 00 Nid St 91d 00 NOILVIS 1591 NOILVLS 3AV1S H31H3ANO2 0 90 0138 N MOHS SY NOIHSV4 ASIVO V 00 3LH3ANOO NI 318V2 JHL 38 NVO INIT NOISSIWSNVHL 531995 00 NO SNOLLO3143H 3790 S8P 22 58 ONIHIM N3HM 00 39unos ALON 0 AS u3MOd NOILVLS 1991 1808 1804 07 94 06054 d1VW34 31VWN34 31VW34 SH Nid St Nid S NI d Sc NId 6 10 co 1804 229 5 6 nd9 el 1 21 262 59 01 06 ii 531835 01 31811vd WOO 1V W8l 2 NOILVIS Nid 3AY1S SHOLO3NNOO d 3018 00622 06921 SNOILO3NNOO 3 VN U31U3ANOO SUIVd 030131 8 262 58 TT 2 9 5 2 7 5 5 1 HO 2018006921 lon 90 PLC Multidrop Connect les Figure D 11 IBM AT Ser GFK 1065F Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 D 16 W31SAS SIHL dO NOILYYJdO 3408 NOILVIOSI GNNOYD STVILN3LOd NOWWOD 3AVH LSNW 329840105 IWYS JHL OL Q3193NNOO LON SLINN AIdILINW 21 11 3104 LL Nid 6 Nid
53. 00512 00048 Discrete globals 0001 26G0001 61280 1280 bits 1280 bits G1280 Discrete internal coils 0001 0001 1024 1024 bits 1024 bits M1024 Discrete temporary coils 0001 T0001 T0256 256 bits 256 bits T0256 System status references 50001 S0001 50032 32 bits 32 bits S0032 5 0001 5 0001 SA0032 32 bits 32 bits 5 0032 SBO0001 5 0001 5 0032 32 bits 32 bits 580032 System register 926SC0001 96SC0001 5 0032 32 bits 32 bits references 8 0032 0001 ROOO1 80256 256 words 2K words 256 words 0256 Analog and High Speed 10001 A10001 AI0001 128 words 128 words 16 words Counter inputs 10128 10128 10016 Analog outputs 00001 00001 00001 128 words 128 words 16 words 00128 00128 26 AQ0016 System registers 5 0001 SROO01 SROO16 16 words 16 words 5 0016 For viewing only cannot be referenced in a user logic program GFK 1065F Appendix PLC Software Cross Reference C 7 Appendix Serial Port and Cables D This appendix describes the serial port converter and cables used to connect Series 90 PLCs for Series 90 Protocol SNP Sample cable diagrams are provided for some of the many point to point and multidrop system configurations that are possible for Series 90 PLCs 5 422 Interface D 1 e Cabl
54. 22 Device identifier bytes 7 and 8 0000 The device identifier for SNP Slave ports is packed into words with the least significant character in the least significant byte of the word For example if the first two characters are and the start address 18 would contain the hex value 4241 The COMM_REQ function executed in Rung 6 has four inputs T0002 is used to enable the COMM function The IN input points to the starting address of the command block which is RO101 The SYS ID will always be 1 The last input TASK points to Port 2 hexadecimal 0002 or integer 2 Note The TASK input on the COMM function determines which serial port is addressed 2 0002H Port 2 All 28 point Micro PLC releases including release 3 0 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F lt lt RUNG 4 gt gt 8 0001 570002 11 Ty lt lt RUNG 5 gt gt T0002 BLKMV BLKMV BLKMV WORD WORD WORD CONST IN1 Q 4 R0101 CONST IN1 0 580108 CONST 0 580115 0010 0001 0000 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 0000 0000 0000 CONST IN3 0008 CONST IN4 0077 CONST 5 0000 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt CONST IN3 0006 CONST IN4 0001 CONST IN5 0001 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 0001 GFK 1065F
55. 30 Preload Value This parameter specifies the value that will be loaded RO 04 HSC into the Accumulator when the associated PRELOAD PRELD x 0 input on the terminal strip is asserted It is also the value loaded to the Accumulator on a STOP to RUN transition Note The PWM Out and PULSE OUT outputs are not available when the B1 3 A4 counter configuration is selected GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 33 COMM_REQ Function In addition to the Q discrete output data that is sent every sweep to the HSC commands can be sent by the CPU using the COMM_REQ function block to change some of the operating parameters of the counters These commands are all 6 bytes in length The PLC ladder program sends Data Commands using the COMM_REQ Communication Request function The COMM_REQ requires that all its command data be placed in the correct order in a command block in the CPU memory before it is executed It should then be executed by a one shot coil to prevent sending the data to the HSC multiple times The COMM_REQ function is effective only on counters that are enabled Command Block The format for Data Commands is as follows MSB LSB command word where n counter 1 4 cc subcommand code data word LSW dd data type data word MSW 4 Always 0000 The command block used to send Data Commands is composed of 13 words arranged as shown in Table 6 7 all values in hexadecimal unless otherw
56. 422 Isolated Repeater RS 232 Converter Connection Appendix E Converters SWITCH IN CENTER POSITION FOR SERIES 90 70 PLCs CATALOG NUMBERS 1C697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771 THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11 TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA RD SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15 PIN D SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION System Configurations E 18 The following figures show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater Converter to convert signals expand the number of drops and obtain greater distance Any system configuration can be reduced to a minimum number of cables each covering a part of the overall system configuration The following examples of system configurations refer to these cables as Cables A through E which are described in Cable Diagrams on page E 20 Downstream and Upstream Contention In this section simple multidrop configurations are those where a single Isolated Repeater Converter is used Complex multidrop configurations contain one or more multidrop sections where an Isolated Repeater Converter is included as one of the drops In both simple and complex multidrop configurations the transmitters directed downstream from the master can be on at all times There will be no contention for the
57. Address Table B 6 Reserved Analog Outputs Address 000001 Controls the number of input samples for analog potentiometer input filtering AQoon09 000012 Analog output channel 000123 Frequency of Q1 pulse train 0 to 2Khz AQODI2S 000126 AQOOIZ7 000124 Number of pulses to send to 1 output 0 to 65535 GFK 1065F Appendix B Reference Types 5 Appendix GFK 1065F PLC Software Cross Reference Information in this appendix is arranged to provide a convenient means of comparing the capabilities of the Series 90 Micro PLC and the Series 90 20 PLC Table C 1 lists the Logicmaster 90 software versions that are compatible with Series 90 Micro and Series 90 20 PLCs The function name and its HHP abbreviation and function number are listed in Table C 2 This table also indicates which models of the Series 90 Micro and Series 90 20 PLCs support each function A comparison of ranges and sizes of user references is provided in Table C 3 C 1 Table C 1 Programmer Compatibility CPU Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Software Revision 28 point Micro release 2 01 and 2 02 6 01 or later Table C 2 Programming Function Matrix re er eee HHP Logicmaster HHP Function 90 30 20 Micro Series 90 20 CPU Function Instruction Number Software Micro CPU IC692CPU211 212 Contacts Normally Open NA all Contact Normally Closed NA Contact
58. Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent 9 pin AMP 207908 1 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm2 Belden 9536 or equivalent a42832 9 PIN 9 PIN 25 MALE FEMALE FEMALE Figure F 3 Converter to Workmaster or PC AT Serial Cable GFK 1065F Appendix F Cable Data Sheets 5 647 1704 Workstation Interface to SNP Port Cable The serial Workmaster Interface cable has a 15 pin D connector on one end and a 37 pin D connector on the other end This cable connects the CPU s serial port to the Workstation Interface board installed in the programming computer through an isolated shielded twisted pair Table F 5 Cable Specifications 647 1704 Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors CPU Side 15 pin male D subminiature type with M3 screws and AMP hood 207908 4 or equivalent Programmer Side 37 pin male D subminiature type with 4 40 screws and AMP hood 1 207908 0 or equivalent Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 Kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips Cable Type 24 AWG 21 mm2 30V computer grade Extra flexible construction recommended for short lengths a43114 WORKSTATION INTERFACE WS9A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37 FEET MALE 1 ETERS D TYPE MAXIMUM CONNECTOR Figure F 4 Series 90 PLC to Workmaster Il Serial Cable
59. Data transmission rate in bits per second 300 600 1200 19200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Flow Control not applicable NONE NONE Determines whether parity is added to words ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits Number of stop bits used in transmission Most serial 1 1 devices use one stop bit slower devices use two 2 Timeout Specifies the set of timeout values to be used by LONG MEDIUM LONG protocol SHORT NONE TurnA Delay Turnaround delay time 0 255 DN SNP ID Identifier that distinguishes this device from others user provided none the same network GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 13 Table 5 3 Configuration Parameters for Serial Port 2 Continued Port 2 Mode is RTU Baud Rate Data transmission rate in bits per second 300 600 1200 19200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Specifies the method of flow control to use NONE HARDWARE NONE Determines whether parity is added to words ODD Identifier that distinguishes this device from others on the same network Data Bits Baud Rate Data transmission rate in bits per second 600 4800 9600 19200 Flow Control Specifies the method of flow control to use NONE HARDWARE SOFTWARE Parity Determines whether parity is added to words 1 Stop Bits Number of stop bits used in transmission Most serial 1 1 devices use one stop bit slower devices use two 2 TurnA Delay Turnaround delay time 0 255 EE Timeout Specifies the set of timeout values to be used by LONG MEDIUM LONG
60. GALNSWATdWI SI 214 FHL 08 NOILVNINH31 FHL 717704976921 ANY 16 040 6921 SHAGWNN 901V1VO 8214 02 06 631 35 NOlLd30X3 01104 FHL HLIM 113HS Q Nid St FHL AGISNI 01 6 Nid N33M138 YAAWAL Y ONILO3NNOO 19 O1d 06 531935 FHL NO 3QVN SI NOILVNINYAL SIHL SANIT 3HL 40 3HL LV SLINM NO AINO 03123 09 38 OL 1 915 3A139384 JHL 3ONVISIS3H NOILVNIWH3L x x 39unos 1 3 38 LSNW NOILO3NNOO dOUGILINW SH3LIW 1334 01 QNOA38 3280105 H3MOd SHALAW 1334 01 NOILO3NNOO 1 104 01 1 104 3280105 83 04 1804 1804 0207 54 06 5 31VW33 31VN 31VN 3ivN34 31vW34 Nid 91 Nid S4 Nid S4 91 4 2 NI d 92 00 lt o 05 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 v 0 0 o9 9 M 09 0 0 0 31vW34 31VN 1 00 8 09 99 NId 6 NId 6 0 5 O S 0 0 0 0 0 00 6 09 05 lt 91d 06 00 00 00 lt 1808 31935 00 lt 2 0 0 2862 58 0 0 0 00 lt 09 05 0 0 00 05 lt 3191LVdWO9 00 lt o 00 lt 07 6 2 0 0 lt SulVd 00622 06921 SuiVvd 3013 5 083013 5 03181 M1 U31H3ANOO 60 5 1097 60798 09 5 060 5 HO 2021990699 AT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs Figure D 5 IBM D 9 Appendix D Serial Port and Cables GFK 106
61. General Wiring Procedures in Chapter 4 The Micro PLC can be mounted on a wall or panel using screws or on a 35 mm DIN rail The Micro PLC must be mounted on a vertical surface Do not mount it on a horizontal surface See Figures 3 1 through 3 3 for recommended mounting orientation and spacing requirements 245442 Proper Mounting Improper Mounting 7 Figure 3 1 Recommended Mounting Orientations for the Micro PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F a45436 4 5 4 Typical SIS M is FRONT VIEW 50 Dimensions in inches Millimeters are in parenthesis E 245418 Detail Of Disengaged Clip atone ral M TI Vets a an a UE 959250 Minimum Allowance For Cooling sth h 8 58 pla 51 99 pl 1 99 35 15 50 218 50 50 9 t 1 00 3 5 8 26 a AB 25 210 4 000000000 66 16 a 4 5 4 1 3 24 i 82 3 a Typical 2 93
62. HSC output will always remain 0 Set by the CPU to clear an error after it has been acknowledged It clears errors for all counters Clears the HSC s corresponding Strobe input status bit For example Reset Strobe bit 1 is used to reset the HSC s Strobe status bit 1 If the corresponding Strobe input status changes to 1 the program logic should set this bit to 1 and then back to 0 on the next I O scan Clears the HSC s corresponding Preload input status bit For example reset Preload bit 1 is used to reset the HSC s Preload status bit 1 If the corresponding Preload input status changes to 1 the program logic should set this bit to 1 and then back to 0 on the next I O scan In addition to the Q discrete output data that is sent every sweep to the HSC commands can be sent by the CPU using the COMM REQ function in the ladder diagram to change some of the operating parameters of the counters For a description of how to use the COMM REQ function see page 6 34 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Output Failure Mode This parameter applies to all counters no matter what their configuration When the Micro PLC transitions from RUN to STOP mode for any reason the HSC outputs respond according to the setting of this parameter NORMAL default setting inputs will continue to be processed and the outputs will continue to operate under control of the counters If Normal is selected the transition
63. I O configuration View Only Parameters cannot be modified CNN NENEN ONE ON CUN ONERE CNN ORE oO gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog MICRO 23PT ANALOG DCIMADUT HIGH SPEED COUNTERS Types 4 Failure Mde NORMAL Al Counters are TYPE VIEW ONLY PARAMETERS 10497 Length i 700497 Length ZAIO001 Length vAgoo2 Length E 0123 Length i 55 Config Exists Pos Next Page Pap Pos Peseisgs Page gt gt 1 C NLMSONREL3 REPLACERCAPS 6 24 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Counter specific Configuration Examples of configuration screens for a type A counter and a type B counter are provided in this section For details on how these parameters control operation of A type counters refer to page 6 9 for B type counters refer to page 6 16 Type A Counter Type A counters 1 4 are all configured in the same way with the exception of Counter 1 in models that have Pulse and PWM output 1 69300 005 010 IC693UAL006 The following screen presents the parameters for a type A Counter in a Micro PLC that has Pulse and PWM output Configuration for counters in other relay output Micro PLCs is the same except for these two outputs __ SEN TES SM SOFTE CORE EUH Catalog RIE MUCH ZAFT nc P3
64. In the RUN mode the outputs are controlled by the ladder logic program Power Supply Board The power supply converts the AC or DC input source power to voltages required for internal circuitry Power requirements are listed in Tables 2 12 and 2 13 On DC input Micro PLCs the power supply board also provides an isolated 24VDC supply to power input circuits and user devices Refer to page 2 16 for maximum current loads for each model These outputs do not have fuse protection The user should provide external fuses to protect the outputs On 23 point Micro PLCs IC693UAL006 the power supply board provides internal 1S VDC power for the analog output current loop and a 15 supply for the analog input and output voltage circuits GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 13 Configuration and Programming The Micro PLC can be configured and programmed using any of the following methods e Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software on one of the following types of computers O Workmaster II or a CIMSTAR I industrial computer IBM PS 2 Personal System 29 with 2 Mbyte RAM and an Intel 386 or higher processor O MS DOS compatible Personal Computer with 2 Mbyte RAM and an Intel 386 or higher processor e Logicmaster 90 Micro software with any of the above computers e Series 90 30 90 20 Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 Configuration and programming can be accomplished off line from the PLC using the Logicmas
65. N33M138 v A8 Q31N3 N314WI SI 214 3HL LY NOILYNIWY 3L FHL 12419946921 ANY 16 049 6921 SHJANNN 901V1VO 8014 02 06 531935 NOlLd30X3 ONIMOT104 JHL HII M 113HS Q 4 51 JHL 3GISNI 01 6 Nid N33 138 didi V ONILO3NNOO SLONGOUd 214 06 531935 FHL NO 3QVN SI NOILVNINYAL SIHL SANIT JHL 40 QN3 LY SLINM NO AINO 03193NNO9 38 OL IYN IS V1VO 3A130934 FHL YO4 SONVLSISSY NOILWNINYAL 31VWN33 5214 H3HLO OL S4 S4 mama ANIT NOISSINSNVHI JHL 30 HL9N313HL SHOLO3NNOO HO 3dAL H3HLO OL SdIHLS 1 1 ISN Q3QN3AWOO3H LON SI LI 214 3HL NO GALNNOW 38 OL HOLOANNOO 318 9 AHL AGISNI SNOLLO3NNOO AHVSS3O3N OL SI LI OSIY Qquvosg JHL NO Q31V201 07 06 531938 Alddf NO Q31V9201 06 06 531938 HOLO3NNOO Nid St gt io 4 lt lt gt 1808 2 u u 2209 54 d NOILVLS 1591 NOILVLS 3AV1S Qu NMOHS SV NOIHSY4 V 06 06 as AO U31U3ANOO NI 318V2 A8 38 NVO INIT NOISSIWSNVHLL as FHL NO SNOIL23143H 31970 dOUGILINW 98 22 5 ONIHI M N3HM 39unos 3LON AG 1 1 229 584 262 0 333 3ivW3d 4 IIN NId 61 4 5
66. Preload Strobe 3 Preload Strobe for B counter Count 4 Count 4 A counter Preload Strobe 4 Preload Strobe 4 19 113 23 point Not used Not used 19 116 28 point Not used Not used COUNTER 1 TYPE B COUNTERS 1 3 Q2 COUNTER 2 Not used Q3 COUNTER 3 Not used Q4 COUNTER 4 TYPE A COUNTER 4 05 06 Not used Not used Q7 Q9 23 point units Not used Not used 012 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F High Speed Counter CPU Interface During each I O scan the HSC automatically sends 15 words of Register Data Values and 16 status bits 1 to the CPU and the CPU sends 16 bits Q of output data to the HSC function blocks in the user program be used to send additional data commands to the HSC See page 6 34 Registers Counts per Timebase Register The Counts per Timebase register indicates the number of counts in a given time interval The Counts per Timebase data is a 16 bit signed number The sign indicates up counts or down counts The timebase value is specified in milliseconds and ranges from 10 to 65535 increments of 10 milliseconds Preload Register This register is used if the counter s Preload Strobe parameter is set to Preload Preload and Strobe cannot be active at the same time This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or the HHP It cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ When a preload input occurs
67. Preload Value 16 bit Count Accumulator 1 l l PRELOAD STROBE O 16 bit Counts per Time Base 16 bit STROBE Strobe Register 16 bit 1 l On Off Presets 1 Figure 6 1 Type A Counter Block Diagram Output 6 8 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F A Operating Parameters How the HSC function operates depends on how its operating parameters are configured For example the figure below illustrates the case where the counter has been configured to count on the low to high transition of the A PULSE input The COUNT signal represents an internal signal that indicates where counting occurs with respect to the pulse input A PULSE input Accumulator Nt 2 Value N 1 N The following paragraphs describe how the operating parameters affect the operation of an A type counter For details on configuring the parameters refer to Configuration on page 6 20 Counter Enable Disable When disabled the HSC is inactive and the output associated with the counter is available to the user program When enabled the HSC is active and its output is dependent on the Output Enable parameter This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM REQ Counter Output Enable Disable When disabled the HSC output is avail
68. Q R0108 0000 CONS IN2 0008 CONST IN3 006 CONST IN4 0301 CONST IN5 1234 CONST IN6 0001 CONST IN7 5 0001 Figure 6 3 Ladder Logic Example for Setting a High Speed Counter Parameter 6 39 Application Examples RPM Indicator An RPM indicator is a typical application for a type A HSC Feature used Counts Timebase Register The HSC can be used as a position motion indicator when connected to a feedback device such as an encoder that is coupled to a rotary motion RPM indication can be obtained directly from the counter s Counts Timebase register CTB or derived from it by a simple calculation RPM is calculated by CTB PPRXT where CTB counts timebase reading from the counter PPR pulses revolution produced by the feedback device T timebase expressed in minutes Note that if the pulses revolution is some integer power of 10 then setting the timebase for 6 60 600 6000 or 60 000 will yield a direct reading of RPM in the CTB register with an assumed decimal placement Example 1 If feedback produces 1000 pulses revolution CTB reading 5210 and the timebase is configured for 600ms then T 600ms 60000ms min 01 and 1 T 100 RPM 3210 x 100 521 1000 CTB reading is RPM with 1 RPM resolution Example 2 Assume the same conditions as example 1 except the timebase is now set to 60ms which gives T
69. Rung 5 contains the Block Move Word function and is used to load the commands which are listed in Tables 6 8 6 9 In this example RO101 through 0114 are used for the COMM_REQ command block Any registers can be used except for R1617 through R1814 which are reserved The COMM_REQ function executed in Rung 6 has four inputs and one output 0002 is used to enable the COMM REQ function IIN Points to the starting address of the command block which is 0101 SYSID Indicates which rack and slot to send the message to physical location of HSC module The SYSID is always 0004 for the HSCs in the Series 90 Micro PLC TASK This parameter is ignored during HSC communications and should be set to zero This output is energized if an error is detected during processing of the COMM_REQ 6 38 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F lt lt RUNG 4 gt gt 10001 tlh lt lt RUNG 5 gt gt T0002 BLKMV WORD CONS IN1 0 5 80101 0004 CONS IN2 0000 CONST IN3 0000 CONST IN4 0000 CONST IN5 0000 CONST 6 0000 CONST IN7 lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt T0002 _ REQ 80101 FT CONST SYSID 0004 CONST 00000 Chapter 6 High Speed Counters BLKMV WORD CONS 1 1
70. Status HSC 4 Output Status HSC1 Output Status HSC2 Output Status HSC3 Output Status HSC4 Module Ready always 1 Not used always 0 Counter error status Strobe Preload Status The HSC sets these bits when a strobe or preload occurs The CPU must clear the bit using the corresponding Reset Strobe Reset Preload output Module Ready Always a 1 Error Set to indicate an error condition When this occurs the error code is returned in the HSC Status code word 1 When the error is acknowledged by the CPU it should be cleared by sending the Clear Error output GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 5 6 6 Data Automatically Sent to the HSC Q Once each I O scan the CPU sends 16 bits Q of data to the HSC The application program can use these Q references to send commands to the HSC The Q data format for the counter is shown below Espero sos Enable Output Clear Error Reset Strobe Reset Preload Enable Output HSC1 Enable Output HSC2 Enable Output HSC3 Enable Output HSC4 Not used unavailable Not used unavailable Clear Error all counters 555455455559 Reset Strobe bit for HSC1 Reset Strobe bit for HSC2 Reset Strobe bit for HSC3 Reset Strobe bit for HSC4 Reset Preload bit HSC1 Reset Preload bit HSC2 Reset Preload bit HSC3 Reset Preload bit HSC4 Bits 505 through 508 are used to enable or disable the module s outputs If an enable bit is 0 the corresponding
71. What will be read on an input is not solely based on the input filter setting It is also based on the scan time An input will always be seen if it is longer than both the scan time and the filter time 6 16 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering Input Settings Two potentiometers located on the front panel of the Micro PLC allow you to manually set input values that are stored in AI16 and 7 The top potentiometer controls 6 and the bottom one controls 7 Filter Control Reference Due to the nature of analog input the values seen in AI16 and 7 will have some fluctuation This variation could make these inputs unusable for some applications The Series 90 Micro PLC uses an averaging filter to stabilize these inputs The filter used on AI16 and AI17 samples the values on these inputs once per sweep When a predetermined number of samples has been read it averages them and stores the result in AI16 and 7 The value in memory reference controls the number of samples to be averaged calculated as follows Number of samples For example if 4 is placed in 0AQI 16 samples will be averaged to determine the values to place in AI16 and 7 If 5 is placed in 32 samples will be averaged You can place any value in AQ1 however only the lower 3 bits of are recognized giving a minimum value of 0 and a maximum
72. When the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode the configurations for HSC PWM and Pulse outputs are sent to the HSC from the CPU This has the net result of stopping the currently running counters reconfiguring all counters to the current CPU configurations and restarting them according to the new configuration When the Series 90 Micro PLC first powers up it has default values for all the HSC parameters To meet the requirements of most applications the HSCs will have to be configured before they can be used Configuration of the HSC can be accomplished in three ways e Using the configuration function in Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software package page 6 24 e Using the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer screens are shown beginning on page 6 27 e Sending data using the COMM REQ command in ladder logic programs see page 6 34 If configuration is to be done using a COMM the counters must first be enabled in the HHP or Logicmaster 90 software configuration Tables 6 4 through 6 6 list the configuration parameters for the HSC function and the abbreviations for those parameters as they are displayed on the Hand Held Programmer and in the Logicmaster 90 screens For details on how these parameters control operation of A type counters refer to page 6 9 for B type counters refer to page 6 16 Table 6 4 Parameters Common to A and B type Counter Configurations Logicmaster 90 HHP Parameter Abbreviation Scre
73. _ _ __ __ __ _ 50 Inactive key gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog EER MICRO 26PT ACINVACOUT AC PS NO MODULE IN THE EXPANSION UNIT EXPANSION UNIT 1 Expansion Module EMPTY UNIT 55 Config Bade Exists Pos Next Page Pap Pos gt gt 1 C NLMSONREL3 REPLACERCAPS GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 27 5 28 Series 90 Micro 14 Point Expansion Unit The expansion unit IC693UEX011 AC input power be connected to a Micro PLC base unit to provide additional I O points 8 DC inputs and 6 relay outputs The Micro expansion units have no configurable parameters pp REL LE LUE UI gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IC693DR5 10 MICRO 26PT DCINARLY UT AC PS 8 DC INPUT 6GRELAY OUTPUT AC OR DC POWER SUPPLY EXPANSION UNIT 1 Expansion Module VIEW ONLY PARAMETERS ZI Ref H 710017 1 Ref Size Bits 8 Ref 70017 Q Ref Size Bits 6 lt lt Config Exists for Next Page Pos gt gt 1 C NLMSONRELS Pre REPLACERCAPS 14 Point Generic Expansion Unit This screen allows you to configure a third party 14 point expansion unit 2__ _ _ _ __ _ IU _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IC693DR5 10 MICRO 26PT DCIN RLYOUT AC PS GENERI
74. a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps Power for the internal relay coils is provided by the 26 volt DC internal supply The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices Table 4 3 Specifications for Relay Output 2 Amp Circuits Operating Voltage Isolation Leakage Current Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating Maximum Resistive Load Rating Minimum Load Maximum Inrush On Response Time Off Response Time Contact Life Mechanical Electrical CPU CPU yo 5 to 30 VDC 5 to 250 VAC 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side 500 V RMS between groups 1 mA at 240 VAC maximum 2 amps at 24 VDC and 240 VAC 2 amps at 24 VDC and 240 VAC 10 mA 5 amps per half cycle 15 ms maximum 15 ms maximum also refer to Table 4 4 20 x 10 mechanical operations 200 000 electrical operations resistive load 2A a45689 Terminal Strip e Common To other circuits Figure 4 4 Typical Relay Output Circuit Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Output Circuit Protection These relay outputs do not have fuse protection It is recommended that each output point be externally fused maximum 2 amp to protect the output point contacts from damage When controlling inductive loads it is recommended that the user provide suppression circuits as show
75. about the SNP ID refer to Selecting SNP Connections and CPU Configuration in the LogicmasterSeries 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Users Manual GFK 0466 Communication through Port 2 may be lost host may time out while operations that involve writing to flash memory including storing the program are being performed through Port 1 Expansion Port 23 and 28 Point Models A 40 pin connector is provided on the right side of the Micro PLC for connection to an expansion unit using a short 3 CM ribbon cable provided with the Micro Expansion Unit this ribbon must be used substitutes are not compatible The Micro PLC can support up to four expansion units connected in series Table 2 6 Expansion Unit Compatibility Rel 3 00 and later Rel 3 00 and later GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 11 2 12 Terminal Strips The Micro PLC module has two non removable terminal strips The input connections are on the top terminal strip and the power supply and output connections are on the bottom terminal strip Refer to Chapter 4 for field wiring information and diagrams An optional removable terminal strip IC693ACC002 shown in Figure 2 4 is available for Micro PLCs They can be placed side by side on 28 point Micro PLCs The removable terminal strips can be used on the top or bottom of the Micro PLC and are inserted under the existing screw terminals a45652
76. also be configured for one shot counting in which the HSC counts to one past the limit and then stops In one shot mode the HSC can be reset by the program using a Communications Request COMM_REQ function to write a zero to the Accumulator The HSC can also be reset by the Preload input If the counter s Preload Strobe parameter is set to PRELOAD default the configured preload value will be loaded to the Accumulator when the Preload Strobe signal goes Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F active For example if PRELOAD is configured and the default Preload Value of 0 is used an input on 12 will reset the Accumulator for HSC 1 For wiring information refer to the diagrams in High Speed Counter Inputs and the wiring diagrams provided in General Wiring Procedures in Chapter 4 When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode the HSCs will continue to operate Also the HSCs will remain in run mode through a power cycle Therefore if an HSC is running when power is lost it will run when power is restored 3 How do I program the Micro PLC You can use a Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 or Logicmaster 90 software IC640HWP300 includes a 2 meter programming cable loaded into a DOS based personal computer The personal computer must have at least a 386 processor and at least 2 megabytes of RAM For a new user programming lesson refer to Appendix A of the Software User s Manual GFK 0
77. be tolerated by the PLC system but may be intolerable by the application or the process being controlled Operational failures can normally be tolerated Micro PLC faults have two attributes Fault Table Affected I O Fault Table PLC Fault Table Fault Action Fatal Diagnostic Informational Fatal faults are recorded in the appropriate table diagnostic variables if any are set and the system is halted Diagnostic faults are recorded in the appropriate table and any diagnostic variables are set Informational faults are only recorded in the appropriate table Fault actions are listed in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Fault Actions Fault Action Response by CPU Fatal Log fault in Fault Table Set fault references Go to STOP FAULT mode Diagnostic Log fault in Fault Table Set fault references Log fault in Fault Table Table 9 3 lists the fault groups their fault actions the Fault Tables affected and the mnemonic for system discrete S points that are affected Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 9 3 Fault Summary Fault Group Fault Action Fault Table Special Discretes System Mismatch PLC Fault Table sy_ Sy pres Program Checksum Failure PLC Fault Table pbsum sum I O Fault Table Full Diagnostic io full Corrupted User RAM PLC Fault Table Sy pres Password Access Failure PLC Fault Table bad pom PLC Software Failure PLC Fault Table sft cpu sft cpu PLC Store Failure P
78. between orders was reduced The Series 90 Micro PLC This provided the best value for small applications Features include e Economical starter pack e PID functionality e Builtin potentiometers to set timer counter presets e Compatibility with Series 9030 PLC programming e 28ypoint model has two communication ports e Pulse width modulation on DC output models e Pulse catch outputs on DC output models GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 19 H 20 Water and Wastewater Industry Flood Control Monitoring The Need A reliable and costeffective control system was needed to monitor and control the number of start and stop cycles elapsed time on off status and fault condition of flood control pumping stations The previous system used hardwired pilot lights which conveyed only basic information to the operator and were difficult to maintain The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was used with a compatible Operator Interface Unit OIU because of its proven reliability The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC s reliability and cost effectiveness are the most important benefits to this system All of the 80 to 90 pumping stations are unmanned so the high reliability of the Series 90 Micro PLC is a key benefit to the system Also through an operator interface unit the Series 90 Micro PLC is able to convey information much more effectively than the previous pilot lights This metering information can be used to help the maintenance
79. by the block is contained in user RAM word oriented memory and not in the discrete memory Disabled Time required to execute the function when power flows into the function or function block however it is in an inactive state for example when a timer is held in the reset state Notes 1 Times in microseconds are based on release 5 0 14 point Micro PLCs and release 6 0 28 point Micro PLCs of Logicmaster 90 software 2 Timers and counters are updated each time they are encountered in the logic timers by the amount of time consumed by the last sweep and counters by one count 3 For bit operation functions L the number of bits For bit position N the bit that is set For data move functions N the number of bits or words B the number of bits shifted more than 1 that is not counting the first bit W the number of words 4 For table functions increment is in units of length specified 5 Enabled time for single length units of type R 6AI and AQ 6 JUMPs LABELs COMMENTS and non nested MCRs are included in the Boolean timing spec 7 Boolean contact execution times are as follows 14 point Micro PLCs 1 8 ms K of logic for fast I 11 164 references 1 6 ms K of logic for fast WQ 01 064 references 2 2 ms K of logic for normal inputs 2 8 ms K of logic for normal outputs 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs 1 0 ms K of logic for fast 1 11 164 references 1 0 ms K of logic for fast WQ 01 064
80. chosen for cost and time effectiveness It offered added benefits and features such as flexibility over the mechanical system without increased cost It also provides system monitoring capability and allows error messages to be displayed Petroleum Industry Lease Acquisition Control Transfer The Need A control system was needed to replace an old and obsolete PLCrelay combination system The replaced system had constant problems with the relays and replacement parts could not be found for the obsolete PLC The system is used for lease acquisition control transfer the selling of oil through pipelines The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was used because the 28point model fit the application perfectly and the customer did not have to learn or purchase new programming software The customer already used a Series 9030 PLC in other systems and both PLCs use the same programming hardware and software The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC allows the flexibility of upgrading the system to a Series 9030 PLC without changing the programming language Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Packaging Industry Shrink Wrapping Machine The Need A system was needed to control the operation of a shrink wrapping machine The system receives inputs from sensors to determine the position of the product and then wraps the product The system must allow parameters to be easily changed for different products The Solution
81. communication line because only one device the master transmits downstream In simple multidrop configurations there will be no contention when transmitting upstream as long as devices tri state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when they have something to transmit This is the case for the Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 CMMs In complex multidrop configurations however special steps must be taken to switch the upstream transmitters of the Isolated Repeater Converter Switching Upstream Transmitters For the RS 422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of the Isolated Repeater Converter the RTS input at J1 must be true The state of the RS 422 drivers at the J1 port depends on the position of the switch on the unit When the switch is in the center position the J1 transmitters will always be turned on When the switch is in the CTS position toward the power cable then either the RS 232 or RS 422 CTS signal must be true to turn on the J1 drivers Note Note the position of the switch on the Isolated Repeater Converter in the following system configurations Simple Multidrop Configuration This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater Converter for signal conversion or for greater distance 844927 Series 90 PLC Series 90 PLC Figure E 13 Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater Converter RS 232 RS 422 Seres 90 PLC Cable A Cable B RS 422 Cable D Brick
82. discrete or register data types The ranges and sizes of reference types supported by the Micro PLC are listed in the following table 1 Table B 1 Range and Size of User References for Micro PLC User program logic Discrete inputs Discrete inputs internal Discrete outputs Discrete outputs internal Discrete global references Discrete internal coils Discrete temporary coils System status references System register references Analog and High Speed Counter inputs Analog outputs System registers For viewing only cannot be referenced in a user logic program Not applicable 2610001 2610008 910009 9610512 260001 0006 260007 00512 0001 G1280 0001 1024 0001 0256 S0001 50032 76S A0001 8 0032 5 0001 5 0032 5 0001 5 0032 0001 0256 26 AI0001 10128 00001 00128 SRO001 5 0016 References for Fault Reporting 3K words 8 bits 504 bits 6 bits 506 bits 1280 bits 1024 bits 256 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 256 words 128 words 128 words 16 words 6K words 16 bits 504 bits 12 bits 506 bits 1280 bits 1024 bits 256 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 2K words 128 words 128 words 16 words Reference Type Reference Range 23 and 28 Point The Series 90 Micro PLC monitors internal operations for either system or user problems called faults These faults are reported through the S references and t
83. does Put string 04401 1131H Specifies an ASCII string from 1 to 250 bytes in length to send from the serial port Autodial 04400 1130H It is the responsibility of the PLC application program to hang up the phone connection This is accomplished by reissuing the autodial command and sending the hangup command string Autodial Command Block The Autodial command automatically transmits an Escape sequence that follows the Hayes convention If you are using a modem that does not support the Hayes convention you may be able to use the Put String command to dial the modem Examples of commonly used command strings for Hayes compatible modems are listed below ATDP15035559999 lt CR gt 16 10H Pulse dial the number 1 503 555 9999 ATDT15035559999 lt CR gt 16 10H Tone dial the number 1 503 555 9999 ATDT9 15035559999 lt CR gt 18 10H Tone dial using outside line with pause ATHO lt CR gt 5 05H Hang up the phone ATZ CR 4 04H Restore modem configuration to internally saved values Table 5 7 lists a sample COMM REQ command block that dials the number 234 5678 using a Hayes compatible modem The ladder logic that creates this command block is shown in Figure 5 2 For a more detailed example of the use of COMM REQ functions and command blocks refer to Figure 5 1 GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 21 Table 5 7 Sample Command Block for CUSTOM Protocol Autodial Command 0009H CUSTOM data block length includes command
84. during the last completed timebase interval in the Counts Timebase register Up counts are positive and down counts are negative The range of the Counts Timebase register is Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F 32768 and 32767 counts The timebase value selected should not allow the Counts Timebase register to overflow at the maximum count frequency If it does the sign of the Counts Timebase will change from to or to Anytime you modify the counter configuration using the COMM_REQ function you will cause the counts timebase value to be reset except for changes to On Off Presets and Preload For example If Count Direction is changed for an A type counter the counts timebase value is reset Count Limits Each counter must be assigned upper and lower count limits Default values are 0 Lo Limit and 32767 Hi Limit All Accumulator preload values and output on off preset values must lie within these limits Both the Hi and Lo limits can be positive or both can be negative but the high limit is always greater than the low limit When setting the limits using the COMM_REQ function the Hi Limit must be greater than or equal to Lo Limit On Preset Off Preset Preload and current Accumulator value The Lo Limit must be less than or equal to Hi Limit On Preset Off Preset Preload and current Accumulator value The Logicmaster 90 configuration software and the HHP wil
85. except the SG cable connection 1 Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs the Belden 9309 has an extra pair you might end up with a cable with extra pairs 2 greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into the data and converter logic power circuits within the cable The cable should be as short as possible in noisy environments In extreme cases additional noise protection measures such as double shielded cables could be required The following wiring diagram is for the IC693CBL303 cable and for cables that may be built for connection to the IC690ACC900 converter Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F RS 232 RS 485 85 422 44750 Converter Twisted Shielded IC690ACC900 Pairs 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 o9 00 00 Series 0 0 0 90 PLC 00 00 00 o9 00 0 RS 422 0 0 0 Port 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09 00 0 0 0 0 25 pin 15 pin 15 pin Female Female Female RS 232 RS 485 Port Port Note Pins 9 and 10 are jumpered at both ends of cable to connect terminating resistors for the RD signal which is inside the PLC power supp
86. from RUN to STOP mode has no effect on counter outputs FRCOFF outputs will be forced off The counters will continue to operate but will not change the state of the outputs HOLD The HSCs retain the last state of the output points before the PLC stopped The counters will continue to operate but will not change the states of the outputs These responses remain in effect until the Micro PLC returns to the RUN mode GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 7 A Counter Operation Type A Counter Overview Each type A counter consists of one 16 bit Accumulator that can be programmed to count either up or down The counter accepts two inputs The Accumulator can also be changed by loading a new value from the CPU or by applying a Preset Input e Count input that increments or decrements a 16 bit Accumulator The count input can be configured to be positive current or negative current edge sensitive Preload Strobe input that either preloads a user defined value into the Accumulator or strobes the Accumulator into a register The Preload Strobe signal can be configured to be positive current or negative current edge sensitive The counter has one output with programmable on and off presets Details of the Type A counter are shown in Figure 6 1 The counter has an Accumulator register a Counts per Timebase register one Strobe register and one set of ON OFF Preset values Up or Down Counter 16 bit
87. front cover and replacing AC output fuses could damage the unit and will invalidate the warranty The plug in fuses are located on the I O circuit board Figure 3 9 which is located immediately behind the Micro PLC front cover To replace these fuses 1 Remove power from the unit and I O devices 2 Remove field wiring from the unit 3 Remove front cover from the unit Gently press inward one of the tabs located on the sides of the unit and pull the cover off SS OSS 4 15 INPUT Series 90 Micro 5 6 7 8 Press tab in PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 100 240 OUTPUT me Qo H comi Q2 4 4 Replace each blown fuse with the appropriate fuse type listed in Table 3 3 GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation 3 13 45443 RTO OO FUSE1 28 Point Micro PLC IC693UAA007 Figure 3 9 Locations of Fuses on AC In AC Out I O Board 3 14 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 245415 GFK 1065F The fuse on the power supply board which is located at the bottom of the unit is not replaceable and cannot be easily accessed This fuse is provided as a Safety precaution If it blows a fault in the power supply is indicated and the Micro PLC should be replaced Note The fuses
88. go to I reference screen R0 07 GENERIC S I0016 3 Press 4 9 ENT to configure discrete input data at 149 64 R0 07 GENERIC S 10016 10049 0064 4 Press gt to go to AI reference screen RO 07 GENERIC S 1015 5 Press 2 0 ENT to configure analog input data at AI20 34 80 07 GENERIC lt 5 AI015 A1020 034 GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 31 6 Press to go to Q reference screen 80 07 GENERIC lt 5 00008 7 Press 4 9 ENT to configure discrete output data at 0049 56 80 07 GENERIC lt 5 00008 00049 0056 8 Press to go to reference screen 80 07 GENERIC lt 5 0002 9 Press 1 3 ENT to configure analog input data at 13 14 RO 07 GENERIC lt S AQ002 AQ013 014 Configuring Standard Expansion Units 1 Press J to go to the next slot RO 08 lt S 2 Press READ ENT to configure the standard expansion unit RO 08 MIXED lt 5 18 06 010017 5 32 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuring I O Link Interface Expansion Units 1 Press to go to the next slot RO 09 lt S 2 Press READ ENT to configure the I O Link Interface expansion unit RO 09 I O Link lt S 32in 32o0ut bytes 3 Press to configure input data reference RO 09 32in S 4 Press R ENT to select R memory type RO 09 32in S R16 5 Press 1 ENT to select 1 16 for input reference RO 09 32in l
89. has been generated the 1494 bit will be set to 1 and Q494 will be cleared For sample pulse train frequency calculations refer to the table below Warning When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode PTO will continue to operate Also PTO will continue to operate over a power cycle Therefore if PTO is running when power is lost it will run when power is restored Table 5 14 Example Values for Pulse Output Frequency Contents of Frequency Register AQ 12301 Frequency Hz 409 Formulas 1 Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers Enter them as hex or as two s complement 9 84 MHz 2 40123 1 Frequency tolerance is 0 01 frequency 16 5 38 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuring of Outputs Q1 to Q5 IC693UDD104 Certain transistor outputs of model IC693UDD104 can be configured to be PWM Pulse Train or HSC outputs For simultaneous use of these functionalities there are some restrictions for possible combinations Table 5 15 Combinations with A4 Configuration 4 CountersType A Counter 1 at Q1 PWM Output Q1 Pulse Train Output Q1 Counter 2 at Q2 PWM Output Q2 Pulse Train Output Q3 Counter 3 at Q3 PWM Output Q3 Pulse Train Output Q5 Example for a permissible combination Counter at Q1 PWM Output Q2 Pulse Train Output Q5 PWM Output Q4 Example for a not permissible combination Counter 2 at Q2 Pulse Train Output Q3 Table 5 16 Comb
90. has gone through the preset point n when counting up and n when counting down On Off Preset 1 Preset 1 Off On Preset 1 Preset 1 gt Increasing Counts Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Note Q within the program changes the Accumulator in this case the waveform will change state at the preset point instead of at 1 past the preset figures below The exception to this is when the Preload input activates as You should be aware that the output does not change states at the same points when the Accumulator is increasing as it does when it is decreasing see the when a COMM_RE Hi Limit 200 On Preset 150 Off Preset 160 0 Lo Limit Example for B type counter Hi Limit Off Preset On Preset Lo Limit 200 150 149 Increasing Counts Hi Limit Off Preset On Preset Lo Limit 200 160 159 150 149 Decreasing Couns lt g __ Hi Limit Off Preset On Preset Lo Limit 200 160 159 150 149 Preload Value For each counter you can specify a starting count value that will be used when the Preload input is activated This value must be located between the Hi and Lo limits The Accumulator is initialized to the Preload value on a STOP to RUN transition The default value is 0 6 19 Chapter 6 High Speed Counters GFK 1065F 6 20 Configuration Note
91. how the Micro PLC handles system faults Appendix A Instruction Timing Tables showing the memory size and execution time required for each function Appendix B Reference Types Listing of user references and references for fault reporting Also contains tables listing memory locations that are reserved for I O functions Appendix C PLC Software Cross Reference A comparative listing of the instructions and function blocks supported by the Series 90 Micro PLC and the Series 90 20 PLC Appendix D Serial Port and Cables Description of the serial port converter and cables used to connect Series 90 PLCs for Series 90 Protocol SNP Appendix E Converters Detailed description of the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter for the Series 90 PLCs Describes the Miniconverter Kit for and the Isolated Repeater Converter with Series 90 PLCs Appendix F Cable Data Sheets Data sheets describing each of the Series 90 PLC cable types that are commonly used with the Micro PLC Appendix G Sample Application for PWM and Pulse Outputs An example of the use of analog through a signal conditioning unit Appendix H Case Histories Brief summaries of applications that use the Micro PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Preface Related Publications 1065 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Man
92. indicator is lighted the corresponding input LEDs should light If the RUN indicator is not lighted all output indicators should be dark in the STOP with I O Disabled mode After verifying that a valid power up sequence has occurred attach a programming device Hand Held Programmer or computer with Logicmaster 90 software to configure the Micro PLC and develop programs for the unit During a gradual power down when the input power supply voltage is below the minimum operating voltage the Micro PLC may power off and then power on again until the input voltage drops low enough to prevent power on again You should take precautions if this type of behavior cannot be tolerated in your application 3 6 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Fast Powerup Powerup diagnostics can be disabled using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software Unless your application requires unusually fast powerup it is recommended that you leave this feature enabled Disabling powerup diagnostics has the following effects The I O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not work No expansion units can be used If expansion units are connected while powerup diagnostics are disabled faults will be logged in the I O tables All HHP key sequences will be ignored when the Micro PLC is powering up Table 3 1 Powerup Times with Powerup Diagnostics Disabled 28 point units IC693UDRO10 100ms IC693UDR005 UAA007 300ms typical All 14
93. input circuits See page 4 7 Two analog inputs See page 4 15 Potentiometers See page 4 8 Outputs Nine normally open 2 amp relay circuits See page 4 12 One DC output Q1 See page 4 12 One analog output See page 4 16 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC output power supply See page 4 12 Field wiring diagram See page 4 23 AC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UAL006 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Current 35 A maximum at 200 VAC 46 A maximum at 265 VAC Inrush Time 2 ms for 40A Input Current 0 35 A typical at 100 VAC 0 22 A typical at 200 VAC Isolation 1500VAC rms field side to logic both power supply input and 24 VDC power supply output Input Power Supply Rating 50 VA Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 5 28 Point AC In AC Out AC Power IC693UAA007 Inputs 16 AC inputs See page 4 17 Outputs 12 AC outputs See page 4 18 Field wiring diagram See page 4 24 AC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UAA007 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Current 30 A maximum at 200 VAC 40 A maximum at 265 VAC Inrush Time 2 ms for 40A Input Current 0 16 A typical at 100 VAC 0 09 A typical at 200 VAC 28 Point DC DC amp Relay Out DC Power IC693UDR010 Inputs Sixteen 24 VDC positive negative logic input circuits See page 4 7 Outputs Eleven normally open 2 amp relay circuits See page 4 10 One DC output Q1 See
94. is the nickname for the isolated repeater converter Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Complex Multidrop Configuration This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater Converters for signal conversion greater distance and more drops RS 422 a44928 CABLE C SERIES 90 PLC SERIES 90 PLC HOST SERIES 90 PLC RS 422 CABLE D RS 232 CABLE A RS 422 CABLE B SERIES 90 PLC NICKNAME FOR THE ISOLATED VERTER Figure E 14 Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater Converter Rules for Using Repeater Converters in Complex Networks When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS 422 repeater converters bricks the following rules apply Rule 1 When using a brick as a repeater port J2 should always be directed toward the host device and Port J1 should always be directed away from the host device The switch located on the side of the brick should always be in the center position ON The only case in which Port J1 is directed toward the host is when the brick is used as a converter RS 232 at the slave The switch is in the right position CTS Rule 2 If a Series 90 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick set the configuration of the CMM serial port to NONE flow control with a 10ms Modem Turnaround Delay applies to CCM SNP and SNP X protocols only Rule 3 Do not place more than three bricks in a si
95. issues _ that changes count direction the counter will go immediately into the new mode You should be aware that the output does not change states at exactly the same points on an Up counter as it does on a Down counter The output takes the value of the On or Off preset after the Accumulator has gone through the preset point n for an up counter and n a down counter Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Example for A type counter Lo Limit 0 Hi Limit 200 On Preset 150 Off Preset 160 Count Direction Up Lo Limit On Preset On Off Preset Off Hi Limit 0 0 0 149 150 151 159 160 161 200 Count Direction Count Direction Down Lo Limit On On Preset 0 1 n Off Preset Hi Limit 1 m tt RT 0 149 150 151 159 160 161 200 46 Count Direction Preload Value When a preload input occurs the configured preload value is inserted into the Accumulator and a Preload flag is set to indicate this to the CPU The preload value can be configured to any value within the counter s selected range For each counter you can specify a starting count value that will be used when the Preload input is activated This value must be located between the Hi and Lo limits The Accumulator is initialized to the Preload value on a STOP to RUN transition The default value is 0 GFK 1065F Chapter
96. levels change req uests 8 14 defined 8 13 for Serial Port 2 Program structure 8 6 Program sweep deviations summary 8 1 sweep time contribution Programmer attach feature 5 20 Programmer grounding Programmer service portion of CPU sweep 8 4 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Programming examples 1 6 Programming the Micro PLC Hand Held Programmer Logicmaster 90 software Protocols communication release information Pulse catch inputs 6 41 Pulse output configuring 5 3845 43 described 2 7 selecting with HHP Pulse Output UDD104 5 43 Pulse width modulation See PWM PWM output configuring 5 36 configuring a UDD104 model 5 40 described 2 6 sample application sample calculation selecting with HHP Q Quick start 1 1 R Rack slot mapping 5 5 RAM memory battery backup for 8 7 Range count limits 6 18 Reference tables entering hexadecimal and two s complement 5 37 Reference types discrete 8 6 retentive 8 7 References fault reporting 9 7 IO reserved B 3 user defined B 1 range and size B 2 C 7 Relay outputs described 2 8 specifications 4 10 Removable terminal strips 2 12 Repeater converter isolated cable diagrams E 20 complex multidrop configuration 19 description of logic diagram pin assignments E 16 Index Index tules for using 19 simple multidrop configuration
97. load on either port can exceed the individual ratings listed above if the combined load does not exceed 255mA See Caution below Shelf life powered down Up to 7 years typical at 30 C Up to 5 years typical at 55 C Two differential 0 to 10 V 10 24V maximum 0 to 20 mA 20 5mA maximum 4 to 20 mA 20 5mA maximum 10 bits 1 LSB 10mV 9 bits 1 LSB 40 8 bits 1 LSB 40 to 10V 10 24V maximum 0 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum 4 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum 12 bits over 0 to 10V range 1 LSB 2 5mV 12 bits over 0 to 20mA range 1 LSB 5 11 bits over 4 to 20mA range 1 LSB 5 1 of full scale over full operating temperature range 0 C to 55 C If you are using loads greater than the individual current ratings for the 5VDC supply on pin 5 of Port 1 or Port 2 operator interface devices must be connected and disconnected with the power to the Micro PLC off This precaution is not necessary if the loads on both ports are less than their individual current ratings Chapter 2 Introduction 2 18 Table 2 12 AC Power Requirements AC Power Requirements IC693UDR001 1C693UAA003 007 IC693UDR005 IC693UEX011 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Inrush Time 2 ms for 40 A Inrush Current 14 point Micro PLCs and 18 A maximum at 120 VAC 14 point Micro Expansion Unit 30 A maximum at 200 VAC 40 A maximum at 265 VAC 28 point Micro PLCs 30 A maximum at 200 VAC
98. loaded into multiple PLCs e Start or stop the PLC from any mode of operation HHP Configuration Screens 1 The following screen Main Menu will be displayed on the HHP after the Series 90 Micro PLC has successfully completed its power up sequence 1 PROGRAM lt 5 2 DATA This screen allows you to select the mode of operation of the program The choices are PROGRAM DATA PROTECTION and CONFIGURATION Use the T and J cursor keys to scroll the menu selection display For information on using these modes refer to the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 2 Enter the configuration mode by pressing the 4 key then the ENT key from the Main Menu screen The first configuration screen will appear The 7 and J cursor keys allow you to move between power supply configuration CPU configuration Input configuration Output configuration and HSC configuration The lt and keys allow selection of parameters within each of the configurations RO 01 PLC lt 5 KEY CLK OFF This screen indicates that the CPU function is located in rack 0 and slot 01 RO1 01 For compatibility with Series 90 30 PLCs the different Micro PLC functions map to rack and slot locations in the software The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0 The following table shows the fixed slot assignments for the different functions of the Micro PLC 5 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 2 Slot Assignm
99. page 4 12 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC output power supply See page 4 12 Field wiring diagram See page 4 23 DC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UDR010 Range 24 20 25 VDC 24 1596 10 VAC Hold up 2 ms at 9 5 VDC Inrush Current 65 A maximum at 24 VDC 81 A maximum at 30 VDC Inrush Time 10 ms for 81 A Input Current 1 4 A typical at 24 VDC Input Power Supply Rating 20 W 40 VA Note The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage approximately 4 VDC than at rated input voltage A minimum of 2 0 A is required to start up the DC power supply Note If configured to disable powerup diagnostics the 28 point DC In Relay Out DC Power unit IC693UDR010 will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24VDC The 24VDC power source for the UDRO10 unit must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and maintain a 24VDC voltage level see power supply specifications for inrush requirements above Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Positive Negative Logic Inputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UDD00104 UAL006 UEX011 GFK 1065F The 24 volt DC positive negative logic input circuits are designed to have positive or negative logic characteristics Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table 1 For an overview of positive and negative logic see page 4 1
100. point units 350ms typical Error Detection And Correction If the Micro PLC fails the power up self test one of the conditions listed in Table 3 2 will be observed after applying power Table 3 2 Powerup Sequence Troubleshooting PWR indicator does not light 1 Check that the proper power source is provided and is on 2 With power supply off check wiring to the module unit to be sure it is connected correctly PWR indicator lighted but OK indicator is This indicates that the power source is good and that the not lighted CPU has detected an internal fault Refer to Powerup Diagnostics in Chapter 9 PWR indicator on but OK and RUN The Micro PLC features built in blink codes to assist in indicators are blinking troubleshooting For definitions refer to Powerup Diagnostics in Chapter 9 GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation 3 7 Connecting a Programming Device The Micro PLC can be programmed and configured using either the HHP or the Logicmaster 90 software included in IC640HWP300 Both of these methods are described in Chapter 5 An RS 422 compatible serial port is provided on the front of the Micro PLC for communication with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software or the HHP This port can also be used for general purpose communications using the Series 90 Protocols SNP and SNPX On 14 point Micro PLCs this port can also be used for RTU Slave communications A second RS 422 compatible port Serial Port 2 is
101. portions of PLC CTRx DISABLE reference memory and PLC input and output resources Only one set of the two screens is shown here All of the other counters are configured in the same manner except that the counter number is different Note that if is set to ENABLE screens 4 15 will appear or 19 30 for counter number 4 Screens 4 19 Count Output Enable This series of three screens is used to set the RO 04 HSC lt 8 counter output enable CTRx OUT ENABLE Screens 5 20 Count Direction This parameter has no effect on the operation of R0 04 HSC lt 5 Ap CTRx DIR UP the B type counter and is ignored Screens 6 21 Count Mode This parameter has no effect on the operation R0 04 HSC S of the B type counter and is ignored CTRx MODE CONT Screens 7 22 Counter Strobe Preload Selection RO 04 HSC lt S This series of screens is used to select CTRx PRELOAD PRELOAD or STROBE operation for the counters 20 04 HSC S STB EDGEx POS Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 31 6 32 Screens 8 23 Strobe Edge These screens configure the Preload Strobe input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal Screens 9 24 Count Edge Although this parameter can be configured for a type B counter screen 9 it is ignored RO 04 HSC lt S because every transition causes a count in A CTRx EDGE POS QUAD B counting Screens 10 25 Time Base Value These screens allow you to enter the
102. protocol SHORT NONE Port 2 Mode is DISABLED There are no parameters for this mode 5 14 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMM_REQ Function The PLC ladder program sends Data Commands using the COMM_REQ function The requires that all its command data be placed in the correct order in a command block in the CPU memory before it is executed The COMM_REQ should then be executed by a contact of a one shot coil to prevent sending the data multiple times Command Block A series of Block Move BLKMV commands should be used to move the words to create a command block in the Register tables refer to the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 for information on using the Block Move function For details on command blocks for configuring communications refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 The following tables list the command block values required for setting up a Serial Port for SNP RTU and Custom protocols All values are in hexadecimal unless otherwise indicated The BLKMV commands that are used to create the command block are described in the example on page 5 16 and shown in Figure 5 1 Note The Micro PLC ignores the WAIT flag for all COMM_REQs GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 15 Table 5 4 COMM_REQ Command Block for SNP Protocol WATTINOWATT Fag 010
103. provided on 28 point Micro PLCs This port can be used for general purpose communications using SNP SNPX and RTU Slave It is not possible to load and store programs and configuration through Port 2 because the privilege level is restricted to level 2 by the PLC firmware Communications through Port 2 may be lost host may time out while operations that involve writing to flash memory including storing the program are being performed through Port 1 For additional information on the functions of the serial ports refer to Serial Ports in Chapter 2 For serial port orientation and pinouts see Appendix D Connecting the Hand Held Programmer 3 8 The Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 is a compact programming device that connects to the Micro PLC 15 pin serial port through a 6 foot 1 83 meter cable that conforms to the RS 485 specification T 343052 SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE D CONTROLLER HAND HELD PROGRAMMER our sem LD oum ast onoma MODE D E F UPCTR AND oR atk RUN oe Aq T 7 8 9 R SLOT FOR J4 MEMORY INS 4 5 6 ware 4 GARD READ 1 2 3 lt HEX ENT 0 A oR SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR TO CPU SERIAL PORT Figure 3 5 Hand Hel
104. references 1 2 ms K of logic for normal inputs 1 6 ms K of logic for normal outputs GFK 1065F A 1 Table A 1 Instruction Timing i E EC Time p sec Size Enabled Disabled Coils Coils Relays See note 7 on page A 1 Relays Off Delay Timer A A On Delay Timer A A Elapsed Timer A A Counters Up Counter 11 67 2 34 3 66 4 33 9 NA NA Down Counter 11 67 2 34 4 67 2 34 3 NA NA Math Addition INT 13 48 26 2 1 4 1 0 NA NA Addition DINT 13 49 6 27 6 1 4 1 0 NA NA Subtraction INT 13 48 8 26 2 1 4 1 0 NA NA Subtraction DINT 13 49 6 27 6 1 4 1 0 NA NA Multiplication INT 13 54 4 30 1 1 4 1 0 NA NA Multiplication DINT 13 105 6 70 9 1 4 1 0 NA NA Division INT 13 60 8 36 0 1 4 1 0 NA NA Division DINT 13 103 2 58 3 1 4 1 0 NA NA Modulo Division INT 13 63 2 37 0 1 4 1 0 NA NA Modulo Division DINT 13 105 6 59 3 1 4 1 0 NA NA Square Root INT 64 49 4 1 4 1 0 Square Root DINT 138 4 88 6 1 4 1 0 Relational Equal INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Equal DINT 9 25 6 13 2 0 0 NA NA Not Equal INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Not Equal DINT 9 25 6 13 2 0 0 NA NA Greater Than INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Greater Than DINT 9 25 6 13 2 0 0 NA NA Greater Than Equal INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Greater Than Equal DINT 9 25 6 13 2 0 0 NA NA Less Than INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Less Than DINT 9 25 6 13 2 0 0 Less Than Equal INT 9 24 8 12 8 0 0 NA NA Less Than Equal DINT 9 2
105. stored in the CPU Cleared by storing an application program to the CPU and putting the PLC in RUN mode 5 0010 bad ram Set when the CPU detects corrupted RAM memory at power up Cleared when the CPU detects that RAM memory is valid at power up 5 0011 s Set when a password access violation occurs Cleared when a password is successfully used to gain a privilege level 5 0014 stor_er Set when an error occurs during a programmer store operation Cleared when a store operation is completed successfully 8 0009 Set when any fault occurs Cleared when both Fault Tables are cleared Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the PLC Fault Table Cleared when the PLC Fault Table is cleared 5 0012 sy_pres Set as long as there is at least one entry in the PLC Fault Table Cleared when the PLC Fault Table has no entries 5 0013 lo pres Set as long as there is at least one entry in the I O Fault Table Cleared when the I O Fault Table has no entries GFK 1065F Chapter 9 Diagnostics 9 7 Fault Results Two non configurable faults have results that you should be aware of PLC CPU Software Failure Whenever a PLC CPU Software Failure is logged the Micro PLC immediately goes into a special Error Sweep mode The only activity permitted when the PLC is in this mode is communications with the programmer The only method of clearing this condition is to reset the Micro PLC 1 cycle power e PLC Sequence Sto
106. that apply only to specific models are discussed later in this chapter See page 5 12 for configuration of Serial Port 2 and page 5 26 for configuration of expansion units Configuration of the High Speed Counters is discussed in Chapter 6 Configuration of Analog I O is discussed in Chapter 7 5 1 Table 5 1 Micro PLC Parameters Scan Stop Determines whether I O is to be scanned while the NO PLC is in STOP mode i YES i NO Pwr Up Mode Selects powerup mode LAST STOP LAST Cfg From Source of configuration when the PLC is powered up RAM RAM Logic source is always flash memory PROM flash memory Registers Selects source of register data when PLC is powered RAM RAM up PROM flash memory Passwords Determines whether the password feature is enabled or ENABLED ENABLED disabled If passwords are disabled the only way to DISABLED enable them is to clear the Micro PLC memory by power cycling the unit and pressing the appropriate HHP keys See page 5 8 Pwr Up Diag The DISABLED setting causes the Micro PLC to ENABLED ENABLED power up without running diagnostics Unless your DISABLED application requires fast power up it is recommended that you leave this setting ENABLED Baud Rate Data transmission rate in bits per second 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Determines whether parity is added to words Stop Bits Number of stop bits used in transmission Most serial devices use one stop bit slower devices use two
107. the ENT key to record the value Screens 11 26 39 52 High Limit These screens are used to specify the highest most positive value the count Accumulator RO 04 HSC S can reach The default is 32767 which is the HI LIM x 32767 maximum value the counters can handle As with the time base use the HHP numeric keys to change the value then press the ENT key to record it Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels the entry Screens 12 27 40 53 Low Limit These screens specify the lowest most R0 04 HSC S negative value for the Count Accumulator LO LIM x O Screens 13 28 41 54 ON Preset Value When the counter Accumulator exceeds this value depending also on the value of the OFF preset RO 04 HSC lt 8 the associated output is turned on depending on ON PST x 32767 the state either enabled or disabled of the output control flags in the Q data word For details see Output Preset Points on page 6 18 GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 29 Screens 14 29 42 55 OFF Preset Value When the counter Accumulator exceeds this value the associated output is turned off Screens 15 30 43 56 Preload Value This parameter specifies the value that will be loaded into the Accumulator when the associated PRELOAD input on the terminal strip is asserted It is also the value loaded to the Accumulator on a STOP to RUN transition The following two screens will be seen only for Micro PLCs that h
108. the configured preload value is inserted into the Accumulator and a Preload flag is set to indicate this to the CPU If the application program uses this flag it should clear the flag before the next preload occurs The appropriate edge either rising or falling depending on configuration on the Preload input always loads the Accumulator regardless of the state of the Preload flag In the Preload mode the Preload Strobe input is normally used to perform the reset function for each counter Therefore the Preload default value has been set to 0 zero However the Preload value can be configured to any value within the counter s selected range If a Preload input occurs the corresponding Preload Status bit is set See Status Bits I on page 6 5 The application program can monitor this bit and if necessary reset it using the Reset Preload output bit The application program can adjust the value in the Accumulator by sending the HSC a Communications Request COMM_REQ from the CPU see page 6 34 This adjustment can be any value between 128 and 127 The adjustment value is summed with the contents of the Accumulator Alternately the value in the Accumulator can be set in the Logicmaster 90 Configuration software duplicating the preload functionality Note If a count is received at the same time the CPU adjusts the Accumulator value the count will be lost This happens because the CPU must read the Accumulator add the specifi
109. timebase is set to 1 second 1000 msec by default The module stores the number of counts that occurred during the last completed timebase interval in the Counts Timebase register Up counts are positive and down counts are negative The range of the Counts Timebase register is 32768 and 32767 counts The timebase value selected should not allow the Counts Timebase register to overflow at the maximum count frequency If it does the sign of the Counts Timebase will change from to or to For a B type counter the counts per timebase value represents the relative shift over the sample time not the exact number of counts This value indicates a relative change in position For example if the counter starts at 10 counts up to 20 and then counts back to 15 the resulting counts per timebase is 5 Change Start direction 10 15 20 Change in position 5 Actual travel 24 Count Limits Each counter can be assigned upper and lower count limits All Accumulator preload values and output on off preset values must lie within these limits Both the Hi and Lo limits can be positive or both can be negative but the high limit is always greater than the low limit When setting the limits using the COMM function the Hi Limit must be greater than or equal to Lo Limit On Preset Off Preset Preload and current Accumulator value The Lo Limit must be less than or equal to Hi Limit On Preset Off Preset Preload and cu
110. to the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 4067 for information on using the SVCREQ function GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 9 Configuration and Programming Using Logicmaster 90 Software Using the configuration software which is part of the Logicmaster 90 software package you can e Specify a name for the system e Configure CPU parameters e Configure enable the HSCs see Chapter 6 e Archive or save the configuration in a file e Transfer configurations between the PLC and the programmer The programming software portion of the Logicmaster 90 Micro software package provides the following capabilities e Develop ladder diagram programs off line e Monitor and change reference values on line e Edit a program on line e Transfer programs and configurations between the PLC and programmer e Store programs automatically on disk e Annotate programs e Print programs with annotation and or cross references e Display help information e Use symbolic references e Cut and paste program fragments e Print programs and configurations to a printer or a file 5 10 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F The general Micro PLC parameters are shown in the following configuration screen Acceptable values including default values for these parameters are listed on page 5 2 To see additional configuration screens press PAGE DOWN The Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Us
111. to use hardware flow control 50 32h COMM REQ timeout The COMM REQ did not complete within a 20 second time limit 14 0EH Autodial Error Autodial command 4400 1130 An error occurred while attempting to send a command string to an attached external modem The minor error code identifies the specific error 2 02 The modem command string length exceeds end of reference memory type 3 03H COMM_REQ Data Block Length is too small Output command string data is missing or incomplete 4 04H Serial output timeout The serial port was unable to transmit the modem autodial output May be due to missing CTS signal when the serial port is configured to use hardware flow control 5 05H Response was not received from modem Check modem and cable 6 06H Modem responded with BUSY Modem is unable to complete the requested connection The remote modem is already in use retry the connection request at a later time 7 07H Modem responded with NO CARRIER Modem is unable to complete the requested connection Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line 8 08H Modem responded with NO DIALTONE Modem is unable to complete the requested connection Check the modem connections and the telephone line 9 09H Modem responded with ERROR Modem is unable to complete the requested command Check the modem command string and modem 10 Modem responded with RING indicating that the modem is being called b
112. typical at 55 C If you are using loads greater than the individual current ratings for the 5VDC supply on pin 5 of Port 1 or Port 2 operator interface devices must be connected and disconnected with the power to the Micro PLC off This precaution is not necessary if the loads on both ports are less than their individual current ratings Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 2 11 Physical and Functional Characteristics 23 Point Micro PLC IC693UAL006 1521 690 Module Dimensions Height 3 2 82mm Width 8 6 218mm Depth 3 0 76mm Typical Scan Rate 1 0 ms K of logic Boolean contacts Real Time Clock accuracy 10 C with internal 15 C rise 4 54 sec day 25 C with internal 15 C rise 5 22 sec day 55 C with internal 15 C rise 10 66 sec day GFK 1065F Maximum number of Discrete Physical I O Points 23 13 inputs 10 outputs Maximum number of slave devices per network 8 can be increased with a repeater 24 VDC Output Power Supply 200 mA maximum for input circuits and user devices 5 VDC on pin 5 of Serial Ports Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2 Serial Ports 1 amp 2 combined Lithium battery lifetime Analog inputs Input ranges Resolution 0 to 10 V range 0 to 20 mA range 4 to 20 mA range Accuracy Linearity Common mode voltage Filter response time Analog outputs Output ranges Resolution Accuracy 155mA maximum 100mA maximum 255mA maximum The
113. 0 Configuration Parameters for Expansion Units Expansion Module EMPTY UNIT EMPTY UNIT IC693UEX1 2 14PTGENERIC IC693UEX013 GENERICEXP IC693UEX1 2 and 14PTGENERIC 1 Ref Adr Discrete input reference not editable 10017 10017 1 Size Bits Discrete input size not editable ee IC693UEX013 CC 5 26 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 10 Configuration Parameters for Expansion Units Continued GENERICEXP Address Offset 0300 0200 0300 1 Ref Size Discrete input size 0 208 Bits SQ RETA Q Ref Size Discrete output size 0 208 Bits AI Ref Adr Analog input reference 10020 2 AI Ref Size Analog input size 0 208 Words AQ Ref Adr Analog input reference AQO13 1 Ref Size Analog input size Words Logicmaster Screens for Configuring Expansion Units The expansion unit configuration screens follow immediately after the high speed counter screens or the Serial Port 2 screen The default expansion unit selection is EMPTY UNIT The configuration parameters that you see will depend on the type of expansion module selected To configure an expansion unit use the key to move the cursor to EMPTY UNIT and press the TAB key to change the type of expansion module The parameters displayed depend on the expansion module selected _ _ _
114. 0 Data Sheet 23 Point Micro PLC GFK 1459 Data Sheet 14 Point Micro PLC DC In Out GFK 1553 Note 3 Selected modules may be derated GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation 3 21 CE Mark Installation Requirements The following requirements for surge electrostatic discharge ESD and fast transient burst FTB protection must be met for applications that require CE Mark listing The series 90 Micro PLC is considered to be open equipment and should therefore be installed in an enclosure IP54 This equipment is intended for use in typical industrial environments that utilize anti static materials such as concrete or wood flooring If the equipment is used in an environment that contains static material such as carpets personnel should discharge themselves by touching a safely grounded surface before accessing the equipment If the AC mains are used to provide power for I O these lines should be suppressed prior to distribution to the I O so that immunity levels for the I O are not exceeded Suppression for the AC I O power can be made using line rated MOVs that are connected line to line as well as line to ground A good high frequency ground connection must be made to the line to ground MOVs AC or DC power sources less than 50V are assumed to be derived locally from the AC mains The length of the wires between these power sources and the Series 90 Micro PLC should be less than a maximum of approximately 10 meters Installation mus
115. 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771 the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 On the CMM install jumper to connect internal 120 ohm resistor On the Isolated Repeater Converter install 150 ohm resistor supplied On the CMM311 only Port 2 can support RS 422 RS 485 Figure D 18 Cable B Brick to Slaves with Hardware Flow Control D 24 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 oocoocoooooooo a Series 90 CMM Port 1 or 2 Series 90 Micro PLC Serial Port 1 GFK 1065F 2 A master slave network can be made up of 23 28 point Micro PLCs as shown in Figure D 19 The Micro PLC firmware does not limit the number of levels in the network However the time required for communications between the top and bottom levels could limit the number of levels that can be used in your application The RS 422 protocol limits the number of slaves per master to eight More slaves can be added if a repeater is used In the example below each master device acts as a repeater To implement a network similar to the one below Port 2 on each of the master PLCs must be configured as an SNP Master For a sample ladder logic program that initiates SNP between a master and a slave device refer to SNP COMMREQ Programming Examples in Chapter 6 of the Series 90 PLC Serial Co
116. 1065F Appendix E Converters E 3 Cable Description E 4 The serial connection to the Series 90 70 PLC Figure E 2 is to the RS 422 RS 485 compatible serial port connector located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the hinged door through an available 6 foot 2 meter serial interface cable IC693CBL303 Wiring information and recommended cable and connectors are provided for those who want to build a cable having a different length The serial connection to the Series 90 30 PLC is to the RS 485 compatible serial port connector located behind the hinged door on the right front of the power supply through the same 6 foot serial interface cable IC693CBL303 or equivalent Figure 3 SERIES 90 70 a44695 PROGRAMMER CONVERTER Figure E 2 Typical Configuration with Series 90 70 PLC a44681 SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMER CONVERTER Figure E 3 Typical Configuration with Series 90 30 PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Pin Assignments Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS 232 interface and the RS 422 RS 485 interface are listed in the following tables Table E 1 RS 232 Interface for Converter Pin Signal Name Function Shield Cable shield Received Data 9 to 19 No connection DTR Data Terminal Ready Out Table E 2 RS 422 RS 485 Interface for Converter Pin Signal Name Function in Differential Request To Send Si
117. 16 0 NA 0 10 COMM_REQ 74 4 40 8 Times for 23 point Micro PLCs the same as those for 28 point Micro PLCs GFK 1065F Appendix A Instruction Timing A 3 Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Execution Time p sec Enabled Disabled Increment INT 21 104 56 0 8 8 3 2 14 88 7 38N DINT 21 116 8 63 2 8 3 2 29 78 15 0N BIT 21 163 2 88 0 7 2 2 4 10 56 5 42N BYTE 21 96 52 0 8 8 3 2 72 3 57N Search Equal INT 19 64 8 39 2 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 97N DINT 19 71 2 42 4 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 6N BYTE 19 64 37 6 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 35N Search Not Equal INT 19 64 8 37 6 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 94N DINT 19 71 2 42 4 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 54N BYTE 19 64 37 6 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 74N Search Greater Than Equal INT 19 64 8 39 2 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 94N DINT 19 71 2 42 4 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 54N BYTE 19 64 38 4 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 74N Search Greater Than INT 19 64 8 39 2 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 94N DINT 19 71 2 42 4 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 54N BYTE 19 64 38 4 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 74N Search Less Than INT 19 64 8 39 2 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 94N DINT 19 71 2 42 2 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 54N BYTE 19 64 38 4 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 74N Search Less Than Equal INT 19 64 39 2 7 2 2 4 6 02 2 94N DINT 19 71 2 42 4 7 2 2 4 11 24 5 54N BYTE 19 64 38 4 7 2 2 4 5 02 2 74N Conversion Convert to INT 48 0 26 95 1 1 m s es i i mm Control Service Request 14 236 121 1 0 0 NA NA 15 9 103 2 72 45 0 0 NA NA 16 101 6 38 15 0 0 Nested MCR EN
118. 1998 GFK 1065F Status Indicators The module contains LEDs that provide the user with a visual indication of the CPU and I O status Table 2 7 Indicators LED Name Function Lighted if power is supplied to the unit and the power supply is operating correctly Not lighted if a power supply fault occurs or if power is not applied Blinks during self diagnostics Blinks with RUN indicator if a fault is detected during self diagnostics When lighted steadily indicates that self diagnostics have all passed Lighted when the PLC is executing the logic program entered by the user RUN mode Blinks if a fault is detected during self diagnostics These LEDs indicate the status of individual input points If the associated LED is lighted the voltage at the input point is high enough to energize the input circuit If the LED is not lighted the voltage is too low to energize the input circuit see I O Specifications in Chapter 4 for thresholds The input LEDs indicate the input status in all CPU modes STOP with I O Disabled STOP with I O Enabled and RUN standard sweep or constant sweep These LEDs indicate the status of individual output points An LED is lighted when its corresponding output is commanded to turn ON for example if Q1 1 OUTPUT 1 LED will be lighted All outputs turn OFF in the STOP with I O Disabled mode Outputs will hold last state or the present user commanded state in the STOP with I O Enabled mode
119. 2 SZ THS A0 9 SLY v SLY 8 SLO 31VW33 JIYN Nid 6 1808 cov Su 142 1904 cec Su 02 06 53 35 C c c c 31811 00 1X W8l 10 oOoooooooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 ocoocooooooooooo NOILVIS Nid ANWAS SUO103NNOO Q 5 006000692 SNOLLO3NNOO G307SIHS 22 59 pispre 224 SH 2zp Su zez SU LNSTVAIND 10278006901 D 17 lon drop Connect 90 PLC Mult 12 IBM XT Series D Figure Appendix D Serial Port and Cables GFK 1065F PLC to PLC Master Slave Connections The 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs can operate as an SNP SNPX master in a multidrop system that meets the requirements for Series 90 devices For system requirements see Tables D 1 and D 2 Figure D 13 shows possible configurations of systems that use the 23 or 28 point Micro PLC as an SNP SNPX master Figure D 14 shows a sample multidrop configuration with a Micro PLC as an SNP SNPX master that controls two Micro PLCs a Series 90 CMM and an Isolated Repeater Converter 1 655 590 known as a Brick The Brick connects additional Series 90 PLCs Figure D 15 details the cabling that connects the Micro PLC master to the slave devices Note that in this diagram an RTU master without flow control c
120. 2 Serial Port Connector Configuration Table D 4 Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Pinout Not Connected RD Receive Data Receive Data Request to Send R Request to Send Send ______ Workmaster 9 pin connector 5 Clear to Send ______ NotConnected DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect ______ NotConnected 9 Terminal Ready Tidtolin20 NotComeced _____ 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 11 20 ia 20 2 Data Terminal Ready 2 Not Connected 1 Ring Indicate 2325 For more information about the Workmaster industrial computer serial port refer to the following manuals Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GFK 0401 Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation GEK 25373 Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 5 5 IBM AT Serial Port The IBM AT or compatible computer s RS 232 serial port is a 9 pin D type male connector as shown in the figure below 244523 IBM AT 5 9 9 9 PIN Pte 2 5 1 Figure D 3 IBM AT Serial Port Table D 5 IBM AT Serial Port Pinout IBM AT IBM XT Pin No Signal Description Pin No Signal Description 1 NotComecea 2 RD__ Receive Daa 2 TD Transmit Data RD Receive Daia I DIR Pus Terminal Ready eens Renee sen Signal Ground Clear to Send i Ee ae 7 RTs jReqesitoSed 7 __ GND__ Si
121. 24 0494 and 1494 Pulse Train See page 5 35 for additional configuration details PWM Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and PULSE OUTx option for channel 1 are disabled This screen selects PWM as the counter output RO 04 HSC lt 5 PWMOUTX DISABLE Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Pulse Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PWM OUTx option for channel 1 disabled This screen selects a pulse train as the counter output RO 04 HSC lt 5 PULSEOUTX DISABLE Storing the User Program Using the HHP Note If the Micro PLC loses power during a program store operation configuration and reference tables will be deleted from flash memory You will need to restore not only your program but the configuration and reference tables After editing a program you must save it in nonvolatile flash memory To do this perform the following steps 1 With the HHP showing a screen that resembles the following press the WRITE key XXXX lt S lt END OF PROGRAM gt The following screen will result WRITE MEM CARD lt S PRG CFG REG 2 Next press the key twice The following screen will appear WRITE USR PRG lt S ONLY 3 Finally press the key This will store the edited user program to non volatile flash memory Note that this may take 5 to 10 seconds When the program has been stored the following screen will be d
122. 32 input words and 2 output words listed in Table 7 5 After the SVCREQ function executes the PLC returns the function status and the number of tries available to the 2 output words Note The third parameter in the block Destination Control at address 2 determines whether to write the constants in flash or in RAM You can select the RAM option and calibrate as many times as necessary without burning the calibration constants into the flash memory When you are satisfied with the calibration you can select the flash option and finalize the calibration process When the flash option is selected the calibration data is copied into RAM as well as burned into flash memory It is important to issue a SVCREQ with the flash option selected in the Destination Control parameter field once the desired calibration state is reached Otherwise the new calibration values will be lost when the unit is powered off For detailed information on using SVCREQ functions refer to the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 SVCREQ Parameters When enable is energized the requested service is performed FNC contains the constant or reference for the requested service This can be any type of memory except for S PARM PARM contains the beginning reference for the parameter block for the requested service This can be any type of word memory R AI or AQ The ok output is energized when the function is performed w
123. 32 interface e Allows connection to a programming computer without a Work Station Interface board e Easy cable connection to a Series 90 70 PLC Series 90 30 PLC or Series 90 Micro PLC e No external power needed operates from 5 volt DC power provided by the Series 90 PLC e Convenient lightweight self contained unit The RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter provides an RS 232 serial interface for the Series 90 PLCs which have a built in RS 422 RS 485 interface Specifically it provides a serial connection between a Series 90 PLC serial port and the serial port on the programming computer without the need for a Work Station Interface to be installed in the computer The programming computer can be a Workmaster computer or IBM PS 2 or compatible computer Location in System The RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter is a free standing device that requires two cables as the connections between the PLC and the programmer Its location 15 limited only by the length of the connecting cables as listed in the interface specifications in Specifications The cable at the PLC end that connects to the RS 422 RS 485 connector on the converter can be up to 10 feet in length without an external source of 5 VDC and up to 1000 feet 300m in length with an external source of 5 VDC The cable from the RS 232 connector on the converter to the programming computer s serial port can be up to 50 feet 15m in length
124. 4 Start address 3 Status Word Pointer Offset Zero based number that gives the address of the SNP status word for example a value of 99 gives an address of 100 for the status word RO109 Start address 8 Port Mode 0000 Slave 0001 Master master available only on 23 and 24 point Micros RO110 Start address 9 Data Rate 6 19200 5 9600 4 4800 3 2400 2 1200 1 600 0 300 Timeout 0 Long 1 Medium 2 Short 3 None The device identifier for SNP Slave ports is packed into words with the least significant character in the least significant byte of the word For example if the first two characters are and the start address 18 will contain the hex value 4241 5 16 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 5 COMM REQ Data Block for Protocol R0110 6 19200 5 9600 4 4800 3 2400 2 1200 1 600 0 300 19 21 Table 5 6 COMM_REQ Data Block for Custom Protocol R0110 Start address 9 Data Rate 6 19200 5 9600 4 4800 3 2400 2 1200 1 600 0 300 R0111 Start address 10 0 None 1 Odd 2 Even R0112 Start address 11 Flow Control 0 Hardware 1 None 2 Software R0113 Start address 12 Turnaround Delay 0 None 1 10ms 2 100ms 3 500ms R0114 Start address 13 0 Long 1 Medium 2 Short 3 None R0119 R0122 Device Identifier reserved 18 21 GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 18 Example A sample la
125. 40 ENV50204 Fast Transient Burst EN61000 4 4 IEC801 4 2KV power supplies IKV I O communications Surge Withstand EN61000 4 5 IEC 1000 4 5 Power gt 50 2 line to ground 1KV line to line supply 50V 0 5 line to ground 0 5KV line to line 1000 4 12 Communications port and 1KV Conducted RF EN50141 IEC801 6 10V 150kHz to 80Mhz injection for comm cables gt 30m ISOLATION Dielectric Withstand UL508 UL840 1 5KV for modules rated from 51V to 250V IEC664 POWER SUPPLY Input Dips Variations IEC1000 4 11 During Operation Dips to 30 and 100 Variation for AC 10 Variation for DC 20 Note 1 Module specific approvals are listed on the GE Fanuc Electronic Bulletin Board Service BBS The BBS can be reached at 804 975 1300 with the following modem settings up to 33 600 baud 8 data bits 1 parity bit no stop bits After accessing the BBS select the BBS File area PLC AGENCY STATUS and the file AGENSTDS XLS This information is also available on the Internet at our technical support World Wide Web site at the address http www gefanucsupport com Note 2 Refer to module specific data sheets and installation guidelines in the following publications Important Product Information Micro PLC GFK 1094 Important Product Information Micro Expansion Units GFK 1474 Data Sheet 14 Point Micro PLC GFK 1087 Data Sheet 28 Point Micro PLC GFK 1222 Data Sheet Micro Expansion Unit GFK 146
126. 466 Chapter 4 of the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 provides descriptions and examples of programming commands for the Micro PLC 4 What should I do when I get a Password disabled or insufficient privilege message There are two possible causes for these messages e Password is set to DISABLE in the Software Configuration screen for the Micro PLC The default configuration for password is ENABLE When changed to DISABLE and stored to the Micro PLC the setting is permanent If the configuration is changed back to ENABLE and stored the password disabled error message will be generated and the store will not be allowed You can either change the configuration back to DISABLE or use an HHP to erase the program and configuration thereby restoring the default configuration e Insufficient privilege has been set in the Software Configuration and stored to the PLC The OEM password cannot be overwritten To remove the OEM password you must use the HHP to clear the PLC memory If a password has been set from the level 4 menu and then forgotten you can override it This procedure is documented in Chapter 5 in the Software User s Manual GFK 0466 The original program disks are required 5 What does it mean when OK LED is blinking or the Run LED is not lighted Each time power is applied the CPU performs a self check for several seconds The OK LED blinks during the self test and then
127. 5 6 13 2 0 0 NA NA 29 a4 10 m NA Range oN 5 14 10 NA Times for 23 point Micro PLCs are the same as those for 28 point Micro PLCs 2 E Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued lt a Time u sec Size Enabled Disabled Logical AND 25 2 Operation Logical OR 13 44 25 2 0 0 Logical Exclusive OR 13 44 252 0 0 Logical Invert 9 40 8 22 8 0 0 NA NA Shift Bit Left 15 110 4 61 0 11 2 3 2 22 096W 12 0W 3 68B 1 87B Shift Bit Right 15 117 6 65 8 10 4 3 0 23 76W 12 59W 3 79B 1 87B Rotate Bit Left 15 124 8 69 7 0 0 24 94W 1 83W 3 73B 1 87B Rotate Bit Right 15 124 68 9 0 0 24 94W 1 83W 3 73B 1 87B Bit Position 13 56 8 23 3 1 4 1 0 7 8W 4 5L 5 1B 3 23N Bit Clear 13 56 8 33 3 0 0 NA NA Bit Test 13 40 8 23 0 0 0 NA NA Bit Set 13 56 8 32 9 0 0 NA NA Mask Compare WORD 146 4 78 11 2 7 15 17W 12 96W 6 51 1 71B Mask Compare DWORD 152 87 10 4 6 30 02W 25 79W 747B 2 24B Data Move Move INT 13 50 4 29 16 0 0 8 19 5 36N 27 4 Move BIT 13 67 2 38 0 0 0 9 8 5 4 36 8 4 89N Move WORD 13 50 4 29 16 0 0 8 19 NA 27 4 Block Move 91 2 52 0 7 2 2 6 NA NA Block Clear 9 45 6 24 8 0 0 6 6 3 36 Shift Register BIT 15 143 2 75 2 39 2 21 6 0 288 0 176 Shift Register WORD 15 65 6 37 6 19 2 9 6 11 64 6 19 Bit Sequencer 15 68 36 0 30 4
128. 5F 9 809778 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 LE 6 N33M138 Y 8 GALNAW3 IdM SI 014 FHL QU NOILWNINHSL 3 171 040 6921 ANY 16 42 6901 Su38WnN 901 1 2 8214 02 06 31935 HOF 011432 3 9NIMOT103 JHL T13HS Q Nid St JHL 3QISNI 01 Nid 6 N33M4138 V ONILOANNOO SLONGOUd 21 06 531935 FHL NO SI NOLLVNIIWH31 SIHL SANIT FHL 30 FHL LV SLINM NO AINO 03193NNOO 38 01 TYNDIS VLVG 3A130384 FHL 3ONVISIS3H NOILWNINYAL xx 328 05 1VNH31X3 38 LSNW NOILO3NNOO dOUGILINW SH313W 1334 01 QNOA38 308008 H3MOd H3183ANOO ATNO SHALIW 1334 01 NOLLO3NNOO 1 04 01 1 04 328005 H3MOd x 1808 1904 ecy Su 96654 91 Nid S JIYN NId Sc o 95 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05 o 0 0 09 00 Nid 6 09 00 00 00 190 0 0 60 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 o9 00 M 0 0 0 00 00 o LX Wal A Sulvd 00622 06921 Sulvd 03013 5 03013 5 03151 1 262 99 22 54 262 5 HO 1071820692 Figure D 6 Workmaster or IBM XT compatibles Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs GFK 1065F Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 D 10 2 RS 422 Point to Point Connection If your host device is equipped with an RS 422
129. 6 RS 422 interface D 1 RS 422 point to point connection D 11 serial cable diagrams D 7 Series 90 serial port Workmaster serial port Serial ports configuring 5 12 IBM AT D 6 protocols supported 2 9 Series 90 PLC connector configuration 0 3 described Workmaster D 5 Series 90 20 PLC functional cross reference C 1 Series 90 30 PLC compatibility with 5 4 5 6 HSC functions compatibility with 6 27 Slot assignments Micro PLC functions Micro PLC s high speed counter functions 6 27 SNP ID 2 11 5 12 Software packages 3 10 Specifications 5 VDC power supply 2 16 2 17 AC inputs AC outputs 4 18 Analog input environmental interface Micro PLC physical and functional relay output circuits 4 10 serial port cables Specifications power requirements AC42 18 DC42 19 Status codes Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 high speed counter Stepper motors Stop mode transition from STOP to RUN 5 35 Storing the user program how to 5 7 Strobe edge configuring for A ee configuring for B counter type A counters type B counter Strobe register Super Cap backup for RAM memory 2 4 Suppression circuits Surge protection 3 22 SVCREQ function block analog I O calibration to read elapsed time clock 8 11 Sweep PLC 8 1 Sweep time contribution 8 3 Symbol 1 System discrete references 8 7 definitions 9 7 Technical help 9 9 Te
130. 6 High Speed Counters 6 13 Counter Operation The primary difference between a type counter and a type A counter is the way counting is handled to generate a change to the Accumulator A type A counter simply counts input pulses and increments or decrements the Accumulator A type B counter uses two input signals for A Quad B counting A Quad B Counting If a counter is configured for A Quad B counting a count occurs for each transition of either A or B There are four counts for each A Quad B cycle Counts are evenly spaced with respect to the input waveforms when the phase relationship between A and B is shifted by 1 4 cycle The phase relationship between A and B determines count direction as shown below The count direction is up if A leads B a Lo f pe 7 N 6 Accumulator po 5 0 The count direction is down if A lags sil HERR couscous p Accumulator Value Hr amp N 6 6 14 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Counter Overview As shown in Figure 6 2 the Micro PLC s B type counter has Preload Strobe input 16 two Count Pulse inputs and one output with On Off Presets 01 The type B counter has a Strobe Register a 16 bit Accumulator and a Counts per Timebase Register The maximum count rate is 5 KHz Up Or Down Counter Preload Value 16 bit PRELOAD
131. 7 108 Accumulator HSC2 32768 to 32767 AIO9 Strobe Register HSC2 32768 to 32767 Accumulator 32768 to 32767 Strobe Register HSC3 32768 to 32767 2 Accumulator HSC4 32768 to 32767 Strobe Register HSC4 32768 to 32767 4 5 not used 0 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F High Speed Counter Status Codes The HSC Status Code in the AI Input Data contains the error codes returned to the PLC These codes are set as a result of message or configuration command errors To clear this code the CLEAR ERROR bit in the discrete outputs Q should be set Table 6 3 Error Codes Returned Invalid Counter Number Counter number in the Data Command Word was not a valid counter based on the current configuration NA Unused Counter 1 Limit Error Counter configuration limit was rejected because the new Counter 2 Limit Error values set would be incompatible High limit lt gt Low limit Counter 3 Limit Error with current High and Low limit values Counter 4 Limit Error Status Bits l These status bits are sent to the CPU as inputs and can influence outputs sent from the CPU to the HSC Data formats for the HSC are shown on the following pages Ses es se es Strobe Status HSC1 Strobe Status HSC 2 Strobe Status HSC 3 Strobe Status HSC 4 Preload Status HSC1 Preload Status HSC 2 Preload Status HSC 3 Preload
132. A 3 02 all all Continuation not supported N Contact lt gt Coils Normally Open all all Coil Negated NA all all all Retentive Coil a4 1 43 _ M m amp a 4 s m 4 Retentive SET SM NA all all all Coil all Retentive RM NA all RESET Coil NA all all Positive Transition Coil Negative NA all Transition Coil Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table C 2 Programming Function Matrix Continued ee 2 Logicmaster HHP 90 30 20 Micro Series 90 20 CPU Function Instruction Number Software Micro CPU IC692CPU211 212 Links Horizontal link Vertical link Timers and Counters Elapsed Timer On Delay Timer we 1 am a Down Couner me 3 ao Addition Addition double eae Subtraction Subtraction double Multiplication Multiplication m double precision Division Division dpdiv double precision Modulo Division Modulo Division double E rM SquaeRoot Root 302 02 Square Root e 3 02 double precision GFK 1065F Appendix C PLC Software Cross Reference 3 Table C 2 Programming Function Matrix Continued eS ______ Logicmaster HHP 90 30 20 Micro Series 90 20 CPU Function Instruction Number Software Micro CPU IC692CPU211 212 Relati
133. ABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A B C D OR NON HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY 2 3 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITU TION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUIT ABILITY FOR CLASS I DIVISION 2 and ADVERTISSEMENT RISQUE D EXPLOSION LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE MATERIEL INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EM PLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I DIVISION 2 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON HAZARDOUS ADVERTISSEMENT RISQUE D EXPLOSION AVANT DE DECONNECTER L EQUIPEMENT COUPER LE COURANT OU S ASSURER QUE L EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE NON DAN GEREUX Preface for Class I Div 2 replace with a BLANK SHEET Preface Content of This Manual This manual provides information necessary to enable you to integrate a Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller PLC into a wide variety of control applications This manual contains descriptions of hardware components installation procedures system operation information and maintenance information for the Series 90 Micro PLC Revisions to This Manual This manual revision GFK 1065E incorporates the following changes Anew 14 point Micro PLC IC693UDD 104 is now available Technical information pertaining to this unit has been added where appropriate e Additional corrections have been made as needed Content of This Manual GFK 1065F Chapter 1 Quick Start B
134. Accumulator STROBE 16 bit 16 INPUT Counts Per Time Base 16 bit Strobe Register STROBE On Off Presets Figure 6 2 Type B Counter Block Diagram GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 15 Operating Parameters 6 16 The following paragraphs describe how the operating parameters affect the operation of a B type counter The following parameters have no effect on the operation of a B type counter even though they can be changed in the configuration software screens Count Mode Count Edge and Count Direction For details on configuring the parameters refer to Configuration which begins on page 6 20 Counter Enable Disable When disabled the HSC is inactive and the output associated with the counter 15 available to the user program When enabled the HSC is active and its output is dependent on the Output Enable parameter This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ Counter Output Enable Disable When disabled the HSC output is available to the user program When enabled the output is reserved for the HSC and can not be controlled by the user program This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ Preload Strobe If preload is selected the configured Preload Value will be loaded into the Accumulator when the Preload
135. C 14 POINT EXPANSION UNIT SINPUT 60UTPUT EXPANSION UNIT 1 14PTGEMERIC ZI Ref Adr ZI Ref Size Bits 1 Ref 710017 Ref Size Bits 6 lt lt Config Exists Pos Next Page foe Pee gt gt 1 C NLMSONREL3 REPLACERCAPS Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Generic Expansion Unit The Logicmaster 90 configuration software provides the Generic Expansion Input Output Module configuration so that third parties can develop a wide range of input output modules with varying amounts of discrete or analog I O Generic input output modules can be placed on any 256 byte boundaries except for the four 256 byte areas reserved for the 14 point expansion units The configuration software maps the I O to open locations in the read write tables within the PLC on byte boundaries Each table can be independently mapped 2__ _ _ _ __ _ o _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IC693DR5 10 MICRO 26PT DCINARLY UT AC PS GENERIC EXPANSION INPUT OUTPUT MODULE EXPANSION UNIT 1 Expansion Module Address Offset Chex 0300 ZI Ref fidr 10305 Ref Size Bits n Q Ref 700305 Ref Size Bits n AL Ref ATOOZO Al Ref Size Words 9 AQ Ref zAQ013 YAQ Ref Size Words 0 lt lt Config Exists Pos Next Pa
136. C User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 9 4 System Discrete References 50001 fst_scn First Scan Set to 1 when the current sweep is the first sweep Last Scan Reset from 1 to 0 when the current sweep is the last sweep S0004 100 5 0 1 second timer contact S0007 Always 50008 Always Off 80009 sy_full Set when the PLC Fault Table fills up Cleared when an entry is removed from the PLC Fault Table and when the PLC Fault Table is cleared S0010 io_full Set when the I O Fault Table fills up Cleared when an entry is removed from the I O Fault Table and when the I O Fault Table is cleared 80013 prg_chk Set when background program check is active 8 0002 OV SWp Set when the PLC detects that the previous sweep took longer than the time specified by the user Cleared when the PLC detects that the previous sweep did not take longer than the specified time It is also cleared during the transition from STOP to RUN mode 96S A0003 apl flt Set when an application fault occurs Cleared when the PLC transitions from STOP mode to RUN mode 96S A0009 ii Set when a configuration mismatch is detected during system power up Cleared by powering up the PLC when no mismatches are present 8 0010 cpu Set when the diagnostics detect a problem with the CPU hardware Cleared by replacing the CPU module 5 0009 no_prog Set when an attempt is made to put the PLC in RUN mode when there is no executable application program
137. CNN NEN ON ONCE CREE CENSO ON gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IC693DR5 10 MICRO 26PT DCIN RLYOUT AC PS 0 LINK EXPANSION UNIT EXPANSION UNIT 1 Expansion Module ED ER ZI Ref 10049 ZI Ref Size Bits 256 Q Ref 700049 Q Ref Size Bits 256 55 Config Bade Exists Pos Next Page Pos Pee gt gt 1 ERN EL DT REPLACERCAPS Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F HHP Screens for Configuring Expansion Units As an example suppose a setup contains a generic expansion unit a standard expansion unit and an I O Link Interface expansion unit When the CPU s Default I O parameter is enabled expansion units are automatically configured For the purposes of this example Default I O is disabled Note that when manually configuring expansion units with the HHP the expansion unit must be physically present and you must press READ ENT on the HHP to initiate the configuration process Configuring Generic Expansion Units In the following example the generic expansion unit has 2 bytes of discrete input data byte of discrete output data 15 words of analog input data and 2 words of analog output data The address offset for the generic unit is 1 Press until configuration for RO S7 appears and press READ ENT 80 07 GENERIC gt S ADDR 0 00 2 Press to
138. Commercial oue ect net etm ERE tee EE vete etu H5 B Commercial Laundry x2 dot ose oe en etie H6 Constr ction Equipment me ed Rr er P ERR nese H7 E H 8 General Machinery uie et e Pee dye H9 c3 oes aL eis i oid H40 Material Handling sess rennen nere enne rennen H41 LED teaver 12 B uon dE RUE OBI IINE H42 ET Eea a EE E T Pepe uod H43 B Plastics H45 Public Emergency H47 E Sports Bquipnient eer e te e RED E e P Dee rer ee H48 Tubing H49 Water and Wastewater 20 M Wire Manufacturing aT E a A E E EEE H24 B Wood Workin es eeraa pee eere eee H25 GFK 1065F H 1 Automotive Industry Fluid Pumping Control H 2 The Need A cost effective PLC was needed to replace an expensive custommade PC control board that controlled an automated fluid pumping station The system controls four vacuum pumps alternates their startup sequence delays their run time when alarms are cleared and controls the clean out filters for the multiple conditions It was also important to the customer that a stocking distributor and technical support be avail
139. DMCR 8 32 8 20 3 12 8 3 2 NA NA combined PID ISA 8 830 429 97 49 NA NA PID IND 8 833 432 97 49 NA NA Times for 23 point Micro PLCs are the same as those for 28 point Micro PLCs except for Do I O function see Table A 2 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table A 2 Timing for Do 1 0 Function Execution Time u sec Enabled Disabled 14 point 23 point to discrete input 23 point with default analog pt config to analog input 23 point to analog output 28 point 3 outputs 1 40 1 inputs 1 24 GFK 1065F Appendix A Instruction Timing 5 Appendix B Reference Types This appendix contains listings of the user reference types supported by the Micro PLC It also identifies references reserved for fault reporting page B 2 and memory locations that are reserved for I O functions page 3 User References GFK 1065F Data in Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC programs is referenced by its address in the system A reference specifies both a memory type and a precise address within that memory type For example 100001 specifies address in input memory RO0256 specifies address 256 in register memory The symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames and is only used with Logicmaster 90 Micro software The symbol is not used with the HHP The prefix of a user reference indicates where data is stored in the PLC References in the Micro PLC are either
140. EISISEISEIES Bottom Bottom Correct Wrong Figure 3 11 Micro Expansion Unit Orientation Note The part number for the Micro expansion ribbon is IC693ACC003 These ribbons come in a 12 pack Chapter 3 Installation 3 17 3 18 Electromagnetic Compatibility To meet the electromagnetic compatibility requirements of FCC Rule part 15 subpart J the Micro Expansion Unit must be installed as described in the Important Product Information document GFK 1474 This IPI is provided with the Micro Expansion Unit and covers installation and shielding requirements Physical Order of Different Types of Expansion Units Different types of expansion units can be connected to a base unit The installation must meet the following requirements 1 Generic expansion units must be located immediately after the Micro PLC base unit and before any other types of expansion units 2 Standard Micro IC693UEX01 1 expansion units must be located after any generic expansion units and before the I O Link Interface expansion unit 3 I O Link Interface expansion unit I O Link must be located after all other types of expansion units Because the I O Link IEU has only one expansion connector it must be the last unit if other units are connected to the same base Micro PLC This also means that there can be only one I O Link IEU per Micro PLC base unit Note The I O Link IEU IC693UEX013 is not sold in the United States F
141. JovPsST4 ___ 907 OFF 5 __ d o Pid Value 56 PRELD4 ___ Counter Signal Counter Signal msg NONE 6 22 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 6 6 Abbreviations for 1 3 4 Counter Configuration Logicmaster 90 H HHP Parameter Abbreviation Screen Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default LE DISABLE LE DISABLE UP PRELOAD Pos Pos 1000mS ros NEG ros NEG Ec ee 4 mimi b b sa E E Ere DENN eee POS POS High Limit Enable Disable Counter 1 Pulse Output Pul Out 01 Enable Disable ON PST 1 OFF PST1 PRELD 1 PWMOUTI ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE PULSEOUTI ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE A QUAD BI DISABLE UP 32767 Low Limit loum 12 romi HP 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DISABLE Counter 4 Direction Coumt Dir 20 ue pows 0 Time Base4 Time Base 25 _ ___ 00 High Limit4 mms __ 6 owlmi4 7 bh b ON Preset4 fon sta ___ 9267 JOFFPreset4 7 JOrPest 29 b uda Pld Value 9 _ __ Counter Signal Count Direction Count Mode and Count Edge are ignored for the type counter PWM and Pulse Output parameters apply only to DC IN DC OUT Micro PLCs and
142. LC Fault Table sy_ sy_pres stor_er Unknown Fault Fault Table 9 io_pres Expansion Unit Configuration Fatal PLC Fault Table sy flt any flt sy pres cfe mm Mismatch fthe Micro PLC logs a Loss of Expansion Unit fault while scanning the input data from the I O Link IEU the input reference memory data will be set to all zeroes GFK 1065F Chapter 9 Diagnostics 9 5 9 6 Fault Summary References Fault summary references are set to indicate what fault occurred The fault reference remains on until the PLC is cleared or until the application program clears the fault An example of a fault bit being set and then clearing the bit is shown in the following example In this example the coil ight 01 is turned on when an over sweep condition occurs The light and the ov swp contact remain on until the 26010035 contact is closed OV SWp light 01 LEL v 10035 OV SWp TER R Fault Reference Definitions The Alarm Processor maintains the states of the 128 system discrete bits in S memory These fault references can be used to indicate where a fault has occurred and what type of fault it is Fault references are assigned with a nickname to S SA SB and SC memory These references are available for use in the application program as required The mnemonic for these discrete bits and a description of each bit is provided in Table 9 4 Some discrete bits are reserved for future use Series 90 Micro PL
143. Looking for more information 6 Artisan 2 Visit us on the web at http www artisan scientific com for more information QUALITY INSTRUMENTATION GUARANTEED Price Quotations Drivers Technical Specifications Manuals and Documentation Artisan Scientific is Your Source for Quality New Certified Used Pre owned Equipment Tens of Thousands of In Stock Items Fast Shipping and Delivery Equipment Demos Hundreds of Manufacturers Supported Leasing Monthly Rentals Consignment Service Center Repairs InstraView Remote Inspection Experienced Engineers and Technicians on staff in our Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with our State of the art Full Service In House Service Center Facility Innovative InstraView website at http www instraview com We buy used equipment We also offer credit for Buy Backs and Trade Ins Sell your excess underutilized and idle used equipment Contact one of our Customer Service Representatives today Talk to a live person 888 88 SOURCE 888 887 6872 Contact us by email sales artisan scientific com Visit our website http www artisan scientific com FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual GFK 1065F June 1998 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other cond
144. M and Pulse outputs G 1 Examples COMM_REQ command block for Autodial command block for Put String configuring Serial Port 25 18 configuring the HSCs 6 38 Expansion units configuring 5 26 different types in same installation 3 18 installation release information 2 11 Failure mode HSC configuring with HHP 6 27 configuring with Logicmaster 9016 24 described 6 7 Fast powerup effects effects of 9 2 powerup times 3 7 Fault bits Fault handling 9 3 Fault reporting d Faults classes of 9 3 fault actions table of 9 4 fault summary references example 9 6 Flash Memory Alarm fault 9 8 non configurable 9 8 PLC CPU software failure 9 8 PLC sequence store failure 9 8 reference definitions 9 6 summary 9 5 system response 0 9 4 Watchdog Timer Application fault 9 8 FCC notice FCC requirements for expansion unit 3 18 Field wiring4 20 Filter time Discrete Input Filtering 8 16 impact on sweep renee Filtering analog 8 17 discrete Flash memo capacity Ba Index 3 Index operation 8 18 function storing configuration and register data 5 8 storing the user program Flash Memor reap Formulas PWM duty cycle PWM frequency 5 36 Frequency pulse train output 5 38 PWM configuring 5 36 Frequently asked questions 1 4 FTB protection CE Mark requirements 3 22 Function codes RTU 2 10 Functional description 2 4
145. Memory Using the HHP To clear user RAM configuration registers user program and passwords power cycle or reset the Micro PLC with the following HHP keys pressed CLR and M T To boot up without loading memory from the EEPROM power cycle or reset the Micro PLC with the following HHP keys pressed LD and Nor To clear memory when powerup diagnostics are disabled go to Program mode and press the following key sequence 999 DEL For detailed information about using the HHP see the Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 5 8 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Booting up in Stop Mode Without Clearing Memory Power cycle or reset the Micro PLC with the following HHP keys pressed RUN and Setting the Time of Day Clock 23 and 28 Point PLCs To set the month day year hour minutes and seconds for the time of day clock function 1 From the initial power up screen shown on page 5 4 press the 4 key to enter the configuration mode 2 Select CPU Configuration 3 Use the key to scroll through the PLC parameters until the clock parameter is displayed 4 Continue to press the key to select each of the clock parameters turn To change parameter enter the new value and press the Ent key Note You can also use the SVCREQ function number 7 to read and set the time of day clock within a Logicmaster 90 program Refer
146. NP Slave at 4800 baud this setup will not take effect until the port loses communications with the programmer Upon loss of programmer communications the SNP Slave protocol at 4800 baud will be installed Any COMM REQs sent to the port by the application program while the PLC is attached to the programmer will be processed by the SNP Slave protocol A COMM that is supported by the RTU Slave protocol but is not supported by SNP Slave will be rejected For the case of a Serial Port Change COMM REQ which is supported by both protocols the new active port protocol supplied by this COMM REQ will not take effect immediately but will become the most recently established port protocol This means that the new port configuration supplied by the Serial Port Change COMM REQ will not take effect until the programmer is disconnected 5 20 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuring ASCII Output This feature allows the Micro PLC to automatically dial a pager via modem and send a specified byte string from Serial Port 2 Pager dialing and message transmission are set up by COMM_REQ functions in the ladder logic Note To implement this feature Serial Port 2 must be configured as a CUSTOM port see page 5 13 Pager enunciation is implemented by three commands requiring three COMM_REQ command blocks Autodial 04400 1130H Dials the modem This command works the same way that the SNP Master Autodial command 7400
147. PLC record all serial numbers These serial numbers will be required if you need to request product service during the warranty period of the equipment 3 1 3 2 Installation Requirements Installation The Micro PLC should be installed in a location that meets the environmental requirements listed on page 3 20 For best performance of your Micro PLC the installation location should also adhere to the following guidelines e temperature must not change so rapidly that condensation could form on or inside the unit e Nocombustible gases e No dust salty air or conductive materials iron powder etc that could cause internal shorts e If possible do not install the Micro PLC where it will be exposed to direct sunlight e Provide adequate ventilation space Recommended minimum space allowances are approximately 50mm 2 inches top sides and bottom See Figures 3 1 through 3 3 e Do not install the Micro PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of heat e Ifthe ambient temperature exceeds 55 C provide a ventilation fan or air conditioner e Do not install the Micro PLC within 200mm 8 inches of any high voltage more than 1000V or high current more than 1A line except for outputs controlled by the Micro PLC e ease of maintenance and safety locate the Micro PLC as far away from high voltage equipment and power generation equipment as possible e For recommended field wiring practices refer to
148. PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F I O System for the Series 90 Micro PLC The I O system for the Series 90 Micro PLC provides the interface between the Series 90 Micro CPU and the user supplied input devices and equipment to be controlled As shown in Figure 8 4 the I O Scanner writes to AI I and memory and reads from and Q memory It can read and write to G memory a45437 Word Discrete Data Memory 1 0 Configuration Data I 16 Blits gt Micro PLC Backplane Potentiometers Discrete Discrete Al 6 117 Input Output Points Points Figure 8 4 Series 90 Micro PLC I O Structure Scan Sequence For more information on scanning and the CPU sweep refer to the discussion on pages 8 3 through 8 4 Input Scan Inputs to the Series 90 Micro PLC are scanned from the lowest to the highest reference address Output Scan Outputs are scanned during the Output Scan portion of the sweep immediately following the Logic Solution Outputs are scanned in the same order as for the Input Scan from lowest to highest reference address Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points At power up output points default to OFF They retain this default condition until the first output scan from the PLC occurs Chapter 8 System Operation 8 15 Software Filters Note Software filtering is effective on DC input units only IC693UAL006 and IC693UDR001 002 005 010 Discrete Input Filtering Di
149. RE RUE 6 38 Application Examples RPM 6 40 Example 1 ete he epe heen a aie ei ee Ru eere 6 40 bxample 2 rene aon ene eee ect gelebt 6 40 Application Example Input Capture eese eren 6 41 Chapter 7 Amalog osea Ren RIA oo GG GRIP INN sula ELE 7 2 Configuration ente reti ne erre atte 7 5 L ogicmiaster 90 Screens inueni ie ti e PL o e eet ae e D PL Re ede 7 6 Analog Input mee he Deine Deere DR e ERU DRE 7 6 Analog ener et e eon eb t E erp t s 7 6 HHP Screens nmt ete eee o eie 7 7 Calibration e i e cet 7 9 Detault Gaims and Oftsets 2 epe ettet etd edet 7 9 Calibration Procedure rct ter He teet ere ee 7 10 Calibration of Input Channels essere 7 10 Calibration of Output Channels eene enne 7 11 Storing Calibration 7 12 Chapter 8 System erecto ito Ru NOR TRE PLC Sweep Summary Buell EA Ee e EHE ne predi be tnus 8 1 Sweep Time Contribution te re e Pe ene nen 8 3 Housekeeping end a deo 8 3 Input Scan oor eo De n I eR RR ORO 8 3 Program Execution e eae 8 4 Output SCan ssa oss il SRS EUR ibn eni heute 8 4 Programmer Setvice
150. Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 G 2 Solution The proposed solution requires the following e Logicmaster Series 90 Micro or Series 90 30 20 Micro Logicmaster software Release 6 0 or later e Double Integer division and multiplication math functions in application code e Series 90 Micro PLC with DC output e CALEX signal conditioning input unit e CALEX signal conditioning output unit Example 1 The CALEX 8507 input signal conditioner produces a 0 to 5khz wave for a 0 to 10 volt input The frequency varies proportionally to the voltage applied from the field side of the unit A frequency of 1 25khz seen by the Series 90 Micro would correspond to a sensor voltage input of 2 5 VDC To set up the CALEX signal conditioning input units run the Logicmaster 90 configuration package and select the I O option The signal conditioning input unit sends out a frequency that is proportional to the voltage or current applied from the field side The frequency is fed into one of the Type A HSC inputs on the Micro PLC To configure the Micro PLC set the HSC type to A enable counts and set time base to the number of counts desired example a 1000ms timebase will display 2000 count for a 2Khz wave sent out by the signal conditioner To speed up the effective throughput of the CALEX input unit decrease the counts per timebase and scale according to user needs in the ladder logic example A 500ms timebase will display 1000 counts fo
151. Strobe signal is active If Strobe is selected the Accumulator value is placed in the strobe register when the Preload Strobe signal is active This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ Count Mode This parameter applies to only to A type counters and is ignored for the B type counter The B type counter always counts in continuous mode The Accumulator wraps when the n or 1 count is reached and continues counting For example if the Hi Limit is n the Accumulator will wrap to the Lo Limit when it reaches n When the counter is at the limit counts in the opposite direction will count it back off the limit Note If is the desired number of pulses to be counted you must configure the counter so that high limit n for up counting or low limit n for down counting Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Each Strobe input the module can be individually configured to have either positive or the negative edge active By default they are positive edge sensitive This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ Positive default A count occurs on a positive to negative transition Negative A count occurs on a negative to positive transition Counter Time Base A timebase from 10 msec to 65535 msec can be selected The counter
152. TEP 0008 gt gt ALW_ON 50007 F I LE_ DINT SUBIT F R0025 I1 Q4 4 MOVE 4 0000009839 INT ALW SUB1 PWM_PT SROO027 12 SROO25 IN Q AQ002 0000065535 09839 LEN 09839 00001 lt lt RUNG 8 STEP 0011 gt gt ALW_ON 50007 t tal GT_ DINT SUBIT pace cce R0025 11 Q4 MOVE 4 0000009839 INT MAX_ALW PWM_PT 80027 12 CONST IN Q SAQ002 0000065535 00000 LEN 09839 0000 END OF PROGRAM LOGIC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Appendix Case Histories This appendix contains brief descriptions of applications that use the Series 90 Micro PLC The Series 90 Micro PLC is an ideal way to replace relays and automate small processes Its allin one construction saves panel space and its powerful features bring productivity and cost savings to almost any control application It is a perfect solution for such applications as packaging industrial machinery material handling and printing The Series 90 Micro PLC offers the high standards of reliability and quality you have come to expect from GE Fanuc at a cost lower than traditional control devices Sample applications for the following industries are described A tomotlve ono e SD Hte de e ne pe bb eee ERES H2 L EESTI ca H3 B Chemicals E ees Pene ep H4 B
153. Unstacker Videocassette Stacker Encoder oe ____ 14 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Plastics Industry Injection Molding The Need A control system was needed to automate the application of plastic handles to milk and juice jugs The system needs inputs for counting and sequencing of two jugs that will be joined with one plastic handle for retail customer convenience Jugs are queued up before being fed through the handle applicator The system needs to be flexible for continual or random feeding and to operate with jugs ranging in size from one quart to a gallon Handles are heated for easy application but without melting or deforming The handle magazine level must be monitored with ow and out alarms Other indicators include in feed and out feed jam detection feed rate shift and totaled count The Solution The 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it offers compact size functionality cost effectiveness and the customer s experience with local support Programming compatibility with the Series 9030 PLC was also a key factor because the system may grow beyond the capability of the Series 90 Micro PLC The Benefits By using the Series 90 Micro PLC the customer has the ability to easily modify the program to match the machine operation in the customers environment Also modifications for unforeseen glitches that are involved with each new installation can be made qu
154. User s Manual June 1998 RS 422 845715 Series 90 Cable A Micro PLC Series 90 PLC Serial Port 2 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Cable B Series 90 PLC Series 90 PLC Brick is the nickname for the Isolated Repeater Converter Figure D 14 Sample Micro SNP SNPX Multidrop System GFK 1065F 2 Substitute appropriate up stream device a45711 within dotted box per system design RS 422 Make connections 0 shielded twisted inside D connectors o pairs Y L5 90 247 E o Series 90 0 RD A Res a T Series 90 Micro 00 RD 8 ad 7 T Micro PLC RT 00 RTS 00 Serial Port 00 CTS o Serial Port 2 0 RTS o 1 0 CTS 0 0 0 0 E gt 0 00 09 0 7 0 o J sin 1 ply ____ AJ o0 15 pin female Series 90 20 or Series 90 30 Serial Port 2 DD D 20 00 CO SW_ ON NOTE 0 When wiring RS 422 485 multidrop cables reflections on 9 LE 0 the transmission line can be reduced by configuring the 0 Series 90 cable in a daisy chain fashion as shown below 0 CMM Master Slave 1 lo 0 0 0 F o gt lo 0 lo 0 pe Slave 3 Slave 2 25 pin female Necessary connections should be made inside the cable conn
155. able for the PLC The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was used to satisfy the needs of this system The PLC s ease of programming cost effectiveness and capabilities made it the logical solution UY Filter System E E Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 Vacuum Pump System Series 90 Micro The Benefits Tremendous cost savings are gained by eliminating the custommade PC board control system The customer also benefits from the extensive local and national product support Also the Series 90 Micro PLC is more versatile than the custommade board making the system easy to modify or expand in the future Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Bakery Industry Pastry Line Conveyor Control The Need The system includes several conveyors for a toaster pastry line in which onthespot decisions on when to transfer pastries to the packaging machine conveyor are made Decisions are based on the count of pastries which occurs at high speed and the downstream packaging machinery loading The Solution GE Fanuc supplied ten Series 90 Micro PLCs and a Series 9070 PLC The Micro PLCs are distributed along the conveyor belt at each packaging point The high speed counting ability of the Series 90 Micro and its local logic allow it to make the necessary onthefly decisions for conveyor control System parameters are transmitted using SNP to the Series 90 0 PLC at the heart of the system Th
156. able to the user program When enabled the output is reserved for the HSC and cannot be controlled by the user program This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM REQ Preload Strobe If Preload is selected the configured Preload Value will be loaded into the Accumulator when the Preload Strobe signal is active If Strobe is selected the Accumulator value is placed in the strobe register when the Preload Strobe signal is active This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM REQ GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 9 Count Mode Each counter has programmable count limits that define its range Hi Limit and Lo Limit The counter can either count continuously within these limits or count to either limit then stop This parameter applies only to A type counters and is ignored for B type counters Note If n is the desired number of pulses to be counted you must configure the counter so that high limit n for up counting or low limit n for down counting Continuous default The Accumulator wraps when the n or n count is reached and continues counting For example if the Count Direction is UP and the Hi Limit is n the Accumulator will wrap to the Lo Limit when it reaches 1 One Shot counter stops at 1 past the limit i e at n if n is the high limit and n if n is the low limit Whe
157. access the Analog I O configuration screens Analog Input 2__ _ _ _ _ _ _ o _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog MICRO 23PT ANALOG DCIMADUT ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION 10018 Mode VOLTAGE Range N A 10019 Mode VOLTAGE VIEW ONLY PARAMETERS AL Ref ddr 10018 Size 2 lt lt More Config Data Exists for Next Page PgUp for Previous Page gt gt OFFLINE PRG MICRO Analog Output pp URL LE LUE _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog MICRO 23PT ANALOG DCIMADUT ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION AQOG12 Mode VOLTAGE Range N A UIEU ONLY PARAMETERS AQ Ref ddr AQ0012 Size roD lt lt More Config Data Exists PgDn for Next Page Pyllp for Previous Page gt gt OFFLINE PRG MICRO Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F HHP Screens GFK 1065F The initial screen for configuring the Analog I O function follows the HSC screens For general information on using the HHP see Configuration and Programming Using the HHP in Chapter 5 1 Press the 4 key until the configuration for analog input channel screen appears as follows RO 05 lt 5 2 1018 1019 2 Press the key The following channel 1 mode screen will appear R0 05 AI S ChlMode voltage 3 Press to select channel 1 current mode
158. agnostics If the Micro PLC fails the powerup self test it will generate an error message in the form of an LED blink code Note Powerup diagnostics can be disabled using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software Unless your application requires unusually fast powerup it is recommended that you leave this feature enabled Disabling powerup diagnostics has the following effects The I O Link Interface Expansion Unit will not work No expansion units can be used If expansion units are connected while powerup diagnostics are disabled faults will be logged in the I O tables All HHP key sequences will be ignored when the Micro PLC is powering up Table 9 1 Powerup Diagnostic LED Blink Error Codes Number of Blinks RUN LED OK LED Lo oor Tmesmeme 007 2 Bad registers 3 3 mimeamdum Bad stack memory area Co esses L3 eee DMA 2 transfer failed 1 9 Addr line fail Timer 2 not counting 2 3 2 Timer 4 not counting Bad cache memory area Bad system heap RAM WDT watchdog timer timeout Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Faults and Fault Handling Faults occur in the Series 90 Micro PLC system when certain failures or conditions that affect the operation and performance of the system occur These conditions can affect the ability of the PLC to control a machine or process Fault Handling Th
159. an replace the SNP SNPX master The Micro PLC operates as an RTU slave only To use an RTU master with hardware flow control cabling must be configured as shown in Figure D 16 For a description of RTU protocol refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 For details on Series 90 products other than the Micro PLC refer to the appropriate user s and installation manuals Figures D 17 and D 18 detail the cabling that connects the Isolated Repeater Converter to downstream slave devices with and without hardware flow control respectively For more information about the Isolated Repeater Converter refer to Appendix E Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F 2 Micro PLO Master a45714 23 or 28 Point release 3 0 and later Programmer a en Ca a Port Port Logicmaster 90 Software or HHP 2 Master Micro PLC Operator Interface 23 or 28 Point Unit SNP SNPX eere IAM Network e Port Port 1 2 Micro PLC on 90 30 Rack ctt 90 30 Rack CIP U M IM CM UIM M Field Control System 90 70 Rack o T HEEL 970 Rack IP 111111111111 af fB U M M M ied L1 LL I Tt tT 11 Micro Field Processor um Repeater Converter ae Figure D 13 Example Connections to Micro SNP SNPX Master GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 19 D 20 Series 90 Micro PLC
160. are not available when the B1 3 A4 mode is selected Note Q 2 Counter is A QUAD B counter and counter 4 is an A type counter GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 23 Logicmaster 90 Software The HSC parameters are shown in the following configuration screens Refer to the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 for details on the use of the configuration software Scanner and Counter Type Configuration The first HSC screen shown below displays the counter types failure mode and I O configuration Counter types The counter function can operate with four type A counters A4 or with one type counter and one type A counter 1 3 4 Failure mode This parameter selects the state the outputs will assume when the PLC transitions from RUN to STOP mode These responses remain in effect until the Micro PLC returns to the RUN mode NORMAL default setting The inputs will continue to be processed and the outputs will continue to operate under control of the counters If Normal is selected the transition from RUN to STOP mode has no effect on counter outputs FRCOFF All outputs will be forced off The counters will continue to operate but will not change the state of the outputs HOLD The HSCs retain the last state of the output points before the PLC stopped The counters will continue to operate but will not change the state of the outputs The
161. as independent bytes consisting of a counter ID byte and a command code byte Note Command words can be entered in decimal format For example Load Accumulator 02 01 hex or 513 decimal Load Hi Limit 02 02 hex or 514 decimal Load Lo Limit 02 03 hex or 515 decimal Load Accumulator Command Code 01H Used to set any value within counter limits directly into the Accumulator Example To set Counter 3 to 1234H load COMM_REQ command registers with Command word 0301 LS data word 1234 Load Hi Limit Command Code 02H Load Lo Limit Command Code 03H Used to set the Hi and Lo limits to any value within the counter range Example To change the upper limit of counter 4 to 10000 2710H load registers with Command word 0402 LS data word 2710 Note If the limits are loaded in the wrong order they could be rejected and cause an error flag to be set To avoid this remember to always move the Lo Limit first when shifting the limits down or the Hi Limit first when shifting the limits up Also if the new value of the Hi Lo limit is out of range with the current Accumulator value the load operation will be rejected It is only successful if all parameters including the current Accumulator value are within the new Hi Lo range GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 35 Load Acc Increment Command Code 04H Used to offset a counter Accumulator by a small number of counts up to 127 128 Only the leas
162. aster 90 hardware configuration utility or by using the COMM REQ communications request function block within a ladder logic program Communication Protocols For detailed descriptions of the protocols used with Series 90 PLCs refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Logicmaster 90 Configuration of Serial Port 2 The Port 2 configuration screen immediately follows the general parameter screen for the Micro PLC The set of parameters listed depends on the Port 2 Mode selection Parameter definitions are provided in Table 5 3 The screen shown below shows the parameters for the default mode SNP 2__ _ _ _ __ _ _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog ie MICRO 26PT DCINARLY UT AC PS Port 2 Mode SNP SNP Mode SLAVE Baud Rate 19200 Flow Contrl NONE Farity ODD Stop Bits 1 Tineout LONG Turn Delay 9 SNP ID lt lt Config Exists Pos Next Page Palp foe Peee bias gt gt 1 C NLMSONRELS s REPLACERCAPS Table 5 3 Configuration Parameters for Serial Port 2 Port 2 Mode 23 and 28 point units only SNP CUSTOM SNP RTU DISABLED Port 2 Mode is SNP SNP Mode Configures the serial port as a slave the responding SLAVE MASTER SLAVE device or a master the initiating device in a master slave system Baud Rate
163. ave DC output IC693UDR005 010 UAL006 Note The PWM Out and PULSE OUT options are available only on counter channel 1 For additional details see Configuring DC Outputs in Chapter 5 Screen 16 PWM Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PULSE OUTx option for channel 1 are disabled This screen selects PWM as the counter output RO 04 HSC lt 5 PWMOUTX DISABLE Screen 17 Pulse Output This option can only be enabled if the CTRx option and the PWM OUTx option for channel 1 RO 04 HSC Sg disabled This screen selects a pulse train as the PULSEOUTX DISABLE counter output Note When the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode the configurations for HSC PWM and Pulse outputs are sent to the HSC from the CPU This has the net result of stopping the currently running counters reconfiguring all counters to the current CPU configurations and restarting them according to the new configuration Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Counter Specific Screens The following screens are specific to B1 3 A4 counters and are displayed when B1 3 A4 is selected as the counter type in Screen 1 In this configuration counter is the A Quad B and counter 4 is the A type counter Screens 3 18 Count Enable This series of two screens enables or disables a specified counter This means that each counter enabled will use certain
164. ay Next the timer values hundredths tenths and seconds are updated by calculating the difference between the start of the previous sweep and the new sweep time To maintain accuracy the actual start of sweep is recorded in 100 microsecond increments Each timer has a remainder field which contains the number of 100 microsecond ticks that have occurred since the last time the timer value was incremented Input Scan During this part of the sweep all Series 90 Micro inputs are scanned from lowest to highest reference address and their data stored 1 discrete inputs or AI analog inputs memory as appropriate The through 5 analog inputs are used by the High Speed Counter If the CPU is in STOP mode and the I OScan Stop parameter is configured to NO the input scan will be skipped Chapter 8 System Operation 8 3 8 4 Program Execution The application program is executed by the microprocessor on the CPU board The logic solution always begins with the first instruction in the application program immediately following the completion of the input scan Solving the logic provides a new set of outputs The logic solution ends when the END instruction is executed The program control capabilities provided by the Control functions are described in the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 and in the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual for Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controllers
165. cable provided with this Micro PLC with a generic ribbon cable If you need to order replacements the part number is 69 003 3 16 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F a45692 28 Point Base Unit 14 Point Expansion Unit 40 pin ribbon connector 40 pin connector for next Expansion Unit 4max Figure 3 10 Expansion Unit Installation Note Cable length is fixed at minimum length to eliminate noise Micro Expansion Unit Orientation The Micro Expansion Unit s input expansion port must be connected to the output expansion port of the base Micro PLC or another expansion unit Connecting the unit in the reverse position will damage the DC input circuit when the system is powered up 40 pin ribbon cable 40 pin ribbon cable 28 Point 14 Point 14 Point Base Unit Expansion Unit Expansion Unit 9598855585 lids steels EEEEEEEREEEE 599998859199 SIBISBI
166. card you can connect directly to Series 90 PLCs as illustrated in the following figure a44509 Host Computer Pin Shielded Twisted Pairs 4 50 feet 15 2 meters maximum without isolation Termination resistance for the receive data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC TET by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10 inside the eeu D shell with he following exception for Series 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and termination for RD at the PLC is implemented a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 Figure D 7 Typical RS 422 Host to PLC Connection with Handshaking GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 11 5 Multidrop Connections In a multidrop configuration the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs are configured as slaves This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master and any slave does not exceed 4000 feet 1200 meters This figure assumes good quality cables and a moderately noisy environment A maximum of eight slaves can be connected using RS 422 in a daisy chain or multidrop configuration The RS 422 line must include handshaking and use wire type as specified in the Cable and Connector Specifications section Programmer to Series 90 PLC Connections The following illustrations show wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a Workmaster
167. ccessfully completed the OK indicator will remain lighted For details refer to Powerup Self test in Chapter 3 Step 5 Connect a Programmer to the PLC Connect a programming device to the RS 422 serial port Port 1 on the Micro PLC Port 2 on 28 and 23 point Micro PLCs does not support configuration and programming For cabling diagrams refer to Connecting a Programming Device in Chapter 3 If Logicmaster 90 software is not installed on your programmer install it according to the procedures in the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Step 6 Configure the Micro PLC The Logicmaster 90 configuration function is used to select Micro PLC operating parameters to meet the requirements of your system A Start up your computer in DOS mode B At the DOS prompt type CD LM90 and press the ENTER key C Type LM90 and press ENTER D When the main menu for the Logicmaster 90 software appears press SHIFT F1 A list of PLCs will appear E From the list select the type of Micro PLC that you have and press ENTER F Press F2 The Software Configuration menu will appear For details on configuration refer to Chapters 5 6 and 7 When you have finished configuring the Micro PLC press ESC to return to the main menu Step 7 Enter a Ladder Program A In the Logicmaster 90 main menu press F2 The Programming Software menu will appea
168. ceed the Constant Sweep Timer GFK 1065F Chapter 8 System Operation 8 11 Timer Function Timed Contacts 8 12 Blocks The Micro PLC supports two types of timer function blocks in the Logicmaster 90 software an on delay timer and a start reset timer Four timed contacts each of which cycles on and off for a specified interval are available in the Logicmaster 90 software 0 01 second 0 1 second 1 second and minute Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F System Security Overview Security in the Series 90 Micro PLC is designed to restrict access to selected PLC functions The Series 90 Micro PLC supports two types of system security password protection and OEM protection Both types of protection can be accessed through the Status and Control portion of the Logicmaster 90 software or the Hand Held Programmer Password protection and OEM protection are described briefly here Refer to the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 or the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0402 for further details on the use of these system security features Password Protection GFK 1065F Privilege Levels There are four security or privilege levels in the PLC password system The default level level 4 in a system with no passwords allows read and write access to all configuration logic and data memories Levels 2 through 4 can be protected by a password
169. changes to a steady on state If the Run LED does not light when you go to run mode the cause could be invalid configuration or a fatal error in the CPU fault table Chapter 1 Quick Start 1 5 1 6 Programming Examples Test Rung In the following test rung an input on will turn on output Q1 511 On Delay Timer In the following LD the set coil 0001 turns on the timer which counts to 5 seconds 00050 x 0 105 and then activates M0002 M0002 turns on the output 00001 activates M0003 to reset the timer and resets M0001 E Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 START OF LD PROGRAM EXAMPLE VARIABLE DECLARATIONS BLOCK DECLARATIONS START OF PROGRAM LOGIC 5 5 M0001 8 M0001 M0002 d ONDTR_ 0 105 M0003 x de R CONST PV 00050 80001 M0002 00001 C M0002 M0003 C M0002 M0001 di 3b R END OF PROGRAM LOGIC GFK 1065F Chapter 2 GFK 1065F Introduction Series 90 Micro PLCs offer an array of useful features including Compatibility with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software Support for the 90 30 Hand Held Programmer HHP An alarm processor function Password protection to limit access to PLC contents A built in High Speed Counter HSC function that can be configured as
170. circuits wiring to B 5 4 20 I O Link IEU configuration I O Link Interface IO system 8 15 IBM AT serial port D 6 IEC definitions logic 4 1 Indicators definitions 2 13 powerup sequence 3 6 Inductive loads suppression circuits 4 11 Input 6 41 Input circuits described 2 7 specifications GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Input filterin 9 8 16 Input scan Inrush currents 4 13 Installation grounding procedures 3 5 Instructions supported by Micro and Series 90 20 PLCs C 2 timing A 1 Interface specifications 4 3 Isolated repeater converter cable diagrams E 20 complex multidrop configuration E 19 description of logic diagram pin assignments E 16 rules for using simple multidrop configuration E 18 system configurations Isolation Voltage 4 13 Jumpers RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter 7 termination 4 L LED indicators blink codes 9 2 normal operation definitions Levels privilege change requests 8 14 defined 8 13 Limits count type A counter type B counter 6 17 Lithium battery estimated lifetime Load suppression on output circuits 4 11 Logic Not Equal message 9 9 Logic program storing to flash memory detailed explanation 8 18 how 0 57 Logic solution overview 8 4 Logicmaster 90 software analog I O configuration 7 6 high speed counter configuration 6 24 Micro PLC configuration PLC compatibility Index I
171. cro 200 mA maximum 28 point Micro 200 mA maximum 14 point Expansion Unit 100 mA maximum Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Analog Inputs IC693UAL006 a45699 Figure 4 7 Analog Input Circuit Table 4 8 Analog Input Specifications Analog Input Channels 2 differential Input ranges 0 to 10V 10 24V max 0 to 20mA 20 5mA max 4 to 20 mA 20 5mA max Resolution 0 to 10 V range 10 bits 1 LSB 10mV 0 to 20 mA range 9 bits 1 LSB 40n A 4 to 20 mA range 8 bits 1 LSB 40 GFK 1065F Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 15 Analog Output IC693UAL006 a45698 Figure 4 8 Analog Output Circuit Table 4 9 Analog Output Specifications Analog Output Channel 1 single ended non isolated Output ranges 0 10 10 24V maximum 0 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum 4 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum Resolution 0 to 10 V range 12 bits 1 LSB 2 5mV 0 to 20 mA range 12 bits 1 LSB 5 4 to 20 mA range 11 bits 1 LSB 5 Accuracy 1 of full scale over full operating temperature range 0 C to 55 C Current maximum compliance voltage at 20mA 10V user load range 0 to 500 ohms output load capacitance 2000 pF maximum output load inductance 1 henry maximum Voltage output loading 2 Kohm minimum at 10 volts output load capacitance 1 maximum Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F AC Inputs IC693UAA003 007 The 120 VAC input circuits are reactive r
172. d Programmer Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Always connect the cable to the Hand Held Programmer first then connect the cable to the Micro PLC This avoids any chance of shorting the 5 volt supply on the PLC which could cause incorrect operation of the Micro PLC Incorrect operation of the PLC could damage the equipment or cause personal injury to an operator To connect the Hand Held Programmer cable e Attach the 15 pin male D connector on one end to the mating 15 pin female D connector on the Hand Held Programmer e Attach the connector on the other end of the cable to the RS 422 connector on the Micro PLC Port 1 on the 28 point Micro PLC These connections are shown in Figure 3 6 Note Port 2 on the 28 point Micro PLC does not support the HHP You must connect the HHP to Port 1 845438 Hand Held Programmer Series 90 IC693PRG300 Micro PLC Cable IC693CBL303 Figure 3 6 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Micro PLC GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation 3 9 Connections for Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Software You need a Software and Cable Kit package IC640HWP300 to use Logicmaster 90 Micro software with the Micro PLC Workmaster Computer with WSI The cable connection for this configuration is from the connector on the WSI board IC647WMI920 to the Micro PLC serial port as shown below 845445 Serial Cable IC647CBL704 51 Serial
173. d Programmer and cable Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software or Logicmaster 90 Micro software Workmaster II or CIMSTAR I industrial computer or an IBM AT PS 2 or other MS DOS compatible Personal Computer with 386 or higher microprocessor and 2 Mbyte memory and appropriate cables Tools for mounting the Micro PLC and connecting field wiring If the PLC is to be programmed using Logicmaster 90 software a Workmaster II CIMSTAR I or an IBM or IBM compatible computer is required Logicmaster 90 software can use a Work Station Interface WSI board an RS 422 port or a standard RS 232 interface with an RS 422 to RS 232 converter The WSI board is installed in the Workmaster II computer at the factory 1 Visual inspection Upon receiving your Micro PLC system carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage that may have occurred during shipping If any part of the system is damaged notify the carrier immediately The damaged shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection by the carrier It is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred during shipment However GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you if such action is necessary 2 Unpacking Unpack all shipping cartons and verify the contents All shipping containers and packing material should be saved in case it is necessary to transport or ship any part of the system 3 Pre installation Check After unpacking the Micro
174. dder diagram for changing the default settings for Port 2 of the 28 point Micro PLC is provided in Figure 5 1 Rung 4 uses a one shot coil T0002 to execute the COMM_REQ once This prevents multiple messages from being sent Rung 5 contains the Block Move Word function and is used to load the commands which are listed in Tables 5 4 through 5 6 In this example 0101 through 0115 are used for the COMM_REQ command block Any registers can be used except for R1617 through R1814 which are reserved on the 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs The example command block contains the following settings 0107 Start address 6 Command FFFO 0108 Start address 7 Protocol SNP 0001 RO109 Start address 8 Port Mode Slave 0000 RO110 Start address 9 Data Rate 19200 0006 R0111 Start address 10 Parity Odd 0001 0112 Start address 11 Flow Control None 0001 0113 Start address 12 Turnaround Delay None 0000 0114 Start address 13 Timeout Long 0000 R0115 Start address 14 Bits per Character 1 0116 Start address 15 Stop Bits 1 0000 0117 Start address 16 Interface reserved 0000 RO118 Start address 17 Duplex mode reserved 0000 RO119 Start address 18 Device identifier 0 for SNP 0000 RO120 Start address 19 Device identifier bytes 1 and 2 B A 4241 0121 Start address 20 Device identifier bytes 3 and 4 0000 RO122 Start address 21 Device identifier bytes 5 and 6 0000 RO123 Start address
175. ds to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made on the 25 pin Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper Female between pin 9 and pin 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series esp Les e e 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and expe C697CPU771 the termination for RD at the PLC x x Xx is implemented by a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 x X Es On the CMM311 only Port 2 can suppor Pin J2 SWE ON u RS 422 485 15 14 0 16 0 17 Isolated 0 13 Repeater 11 0 12 Brick 0 10 0 19 0 150 ohms 0 18 0 7 0 25 Female Figure D 16 Cable A Master to Slaves RTU Master with Hardware Flow Control D 22 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F 2 Shielded Make connections a45712 twisted inside D connectors pairs RD 0 o RD 8 T 0 SD A 00 Isolated TAN 00 Repeater CTS 0 Converter 04 Brick 0 RTS 0 0 CTS 87 p 0 09 0 TERM o 0 o 0 GND 0 SHLD 0 25 pin female When wiring RS 422 485 multidrop cables reflections on the transmission line can be reduced by configuring the cable in a daisy chain fashion as shown below Brick Slave 1 Series 90 Micro PLC Serial Port 1 Necessary connections should be made
176. e 2 Counter 2 Preload Strobe Pld strobe 2 selection Counter 2 Strobe Edge 23 24 Time Base 2 25 High Limit 2 2 Low Limit 2 27 ON Preset 2 2 OFF Preset 2 29 Preload 2 Counter Signal wow These parameters apply only to Micro PLCs that have a DC output IC693UDR005 010 and UALO006 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 NABLE NABLE P LOAD OS OS NABLE NABLE E NABLE P AD OS OS POS POS 0 1 2 6 8 0 1 2 6 8 Counter 1 Pulse Output Pul Out 01 PULSEOUTI Enable Disable 7 GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 21 Table 6 5 Abbreviations for ALL A type Counter Configuration Continued Logicmaster 90 HHP HHP Parameter Abbreviation Screen Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE UP CONT PRELOAD PRELOAD NEG ____ 5 NEG POS TimeBase3 Time Bas rMEBS3 10005 High Limit 3 39 mms ___ Low Limit 3 olmi b ON Preset 3 Prset a fonpst3 leza OFF Preset 3 omPrse 42 Preload 3 Pia Vale 43 Counter Signal ComSig Counter 4 Enable Disable ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE UP CONT PRELOAD PRELOAD NEG ____ 5 NEG 8 Time Base4 Time Bas s TIMEBS4 ___ 1000 HighLimt4 5 8 homm b ONPrst4 On Preset 54
177. e Logic Controllers 2 2 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Compatibility e Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software IC641SWP301 304 306 307 release 8 01 or later e Series 90 30 firmware release 5 0 and later e Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 e Series 90 Protocol SNP and SNPX and RTU Slave protocol e Series 90 20 PLCs Micro PLCs with relay output IC693UDRO005 010 and UAL006 only Table 2 1 Configuration Programming Software Versions for Partial Compatibility Store to Store to Load from Load from Logicmaster 90 Micro Rel 2 Micro Rel 3 Micro Rel 2 Micro Rel 3 Software Version or Earlier or Later or Earlier or Later 5 01 or later 5 6 01 or later Component Rel 3 reads from Memcard Rel 2 reads from Memcard Written by a Rel 2 Micro Written by a Rel 3 Micro Configuration Instructions and Function Blocks The Series 90 Micro PLC supports most 90 30 instruction functions and function blocks Detailed descriptions and examples of the use of these instructions can be found in the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Series 90 30 20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 and Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual 0402 See Appendix A for a list of instructions supported by the Series 90 Micro PLC GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 3 Functional Description CPU B
178. e Micro PLCs Specifications for input and output signals are provided in Chapter 4 Table 2 8 1 0 Point Configurations Input Points Output Points Description points common points common Catalog Numbers 14 point DC in relay out AC power 8 DC 6 relay IC693UDRO01 4 and 4 1 1 and 4 14 point DC in relay out DC power 8 DC 6 relay IC693UDR002 4 and 4 1 1 and 4 14 point DC in DC out DC power 8 DC 6 DC IC693UDD004 4 and 4 6 14 point AC in AC out AC power 8 AC 6 AC IC693UAA003 4 and 4 2 and 4 28 point DC in relay and DC out AC power 16 DC 1 DC 11 relay IC693UDR005 4 4 4 and 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 and 3 28 point AC in AC out AC power 16 AC 12 AC IC693UAA007 4 4 4 and 4 2 4 2 and 4 28 point DC in relay out DC power 16 DC 1 DC 11 relay IC693UDRO10 4 4 4 and 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 and 3 23 point analog DC in relay and DC out AC power 13 DC 2 analog 1 DC 9 relay IC693UAL006 4 4 4 and 2 1 analog 1 4 1 1 1 and 1 14 point Expansion Unit 8 DC 6 relay 1 69630 011 DC in relay AC power 4 and 4 1 1 and 4 See Chapter 4 for fusing information GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 15 2 16 Table 2 9 Physical and Functional Characteristics 14 Point PLCs Weight IC693UDR001 002 UAA003 UEX011 0 86 lbs 390 g Module Dimensions Height 3 2 82mm Depth 3 0 76mm Width 4 5 115mm Typical Scan Rate 1 8 ms K of logic Bool
179. e Series 9070 PLC monitors the overall performance of the system The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC affords the customer the advantage of a costeffective compact package that provides high speed counting and local logic Series 90 Micro PLCs control individual sections of the conveyor as the Series 90 70 PLC controls the overall system GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 3 Chemical Industry Chemical Pumping Station The Need A PLC was needed to replace mechanical timers counters and relays that controlled pumping stations delivering chemicals to the cleaning station The mechanical system was hard wired and difficult to modify The Solution 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was used with a compatible Operator Interface Terminal OIT The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC offered flexibility through programming reduced need for panel space and ease of wiring Cleaning Station Operator Interface Terminal H 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Commercial Agriculture Industry Grain Processing The Need A control system was needed to replace an existing filter timer board and tie in hardwired relay controls The filter board was replaced with PLCs to standardize the process control The Solution 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was installed because it satisfied the system requirements and because the customer was very satisfied with previously owned GE Fanuc equ
180. e a poe G 1 SOLU OM seed en EE G 3 n G 3 Example 2 e i e RR Ee G 4 ee a eE TETEA ERE NU EP dedo tee EIER eter ied G 4 Sample Ladder Logic G 5 Appendix H Case HIStOFIes sere ere ere rre rk rd eia H 1 Automotive Industry ERE be ee EXE ones H 2 Fluid Pumping Control gies jos ee teet ete e esee pito ende H 2 Bakery Industry 253 RA edet e e ie e e RE H 3 Pastry Line Conveyor Control aset diese e entere tie H 3 Chemical IndUstry Ier pee erret e pietre eee ede ea H 4 Chemical Pumping 5 H 4 Commercial Agriculture 5 Grain Processing eene om eH T Une eiie pee H 5 Commercial Laundry 2 6 Garment Storage Rail Control seen eene H 6 Construction Equipment eene H 7 Pipe Measuring System ite eed eed e e i ertet edet e Hes H 7 Entertainment Gb eae Lem bee H 8 Nightclub Entertainment nte dte etit e term dem ede Mare cid H 8 General Purpose Machihery 2 e etii eeeteee titre etie H 9 Automated Picture Frame Stapler H 9 Lumber Ind stry a RR e ec e o e e ees H 10 Pallet R building ceteri rete ch gutoescni
181. e amount of time that the signal is active compared to the signal period within the range of 0 to 100 can be selected by writing a value to memory location AQ3 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Board GFK 1065F Pulse Output The frequency 10hz to 2Khz of the pulse train is selected by writing a value to memory location 123 The number of pulses to be output 0 to 32767 is selected by writing a value to memory location 0124 ASCII Output IC693UDR005 010 UAL006 This feature allows you to send a specified byte string out the serial port by including a COMM REQ Communications Request instruction in a ladder diagram The Micro PLC can automatically send a message to a remote location that has the ability to display an ASCII string such as a pager As an example of how pager enunciation could be used when a specific alarm condition is detected by the PLC the PLC would execute a COMM instruction to autodial the modem attached to the serial port If the autodial COMM REQ is successful a second COMM REQ would be executed to send an informative ASCII string to the pager where it can be viewed by the user Finally a third COMM REQ would be sent to hang up the pager The I O board provides the interface to the front panel input output and power supply connections for the Micro PLC Input Circuits DC Input Circuits IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UAL006 The DC input circuits conditi
182. e and Connector D 2 Port Configurati ns orsi ee Lr distin FREE E Pe eli eas D 3 Serial Cable Diagrams iino ee EGG D 7 Point to Point Connections D 7 Multidrop Connections 2 0 0 eeeeeeseesseecsseecsseecsseeceseeeesseecsaeecseecsseeseseeeesaeeesaeers D 12 RS 422 Interface The Series 90 PLC products are compatible with ELA RS 422 specifications RS 422 drivers and receivers are used to provide communications between system components that use multiple driver receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in transmission and or damage to Series 90 PLC components Table D 1 System Connection Specifications Cable type Five twisted pairs See Table D 2 for cable specifications Maximum cable length 4000 feet 1200 meters Multidrop system configuration Up to eight drivers and receivers Although this number can be increased with the use of a repeater signal quality may be diminished Maximum common mode voltage between RS 422 standard 7 volts to 7 volts drops Driver requirements Output 2V minimum into 100 ohms Output impedance 120 Kohms minimum in the high impedance state Receiver Input resistance 12 Kohms or greater Sensitivity 200 mil
183. e condition or failure itself is called a fault When a fault has been received and processed by the Alarm Processor software in the CPU it is called an alarm The interface to the user for the Alarm Processor is through the Logicmaster 90 programming software Any detected fault is recorded in a Fault Table and displayed on either the PLC Fault Table screen or the I O Fault Table screens More information on faults and fault handling can be found in the Logicmaster Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 and the Logicmaster Series 90 30 20 Micro 90 30 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 For information on error detection and correction for Statement List programs and the Hand Held Programmer refer to the Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 Classes of Faults The Micro PLC detects several classes of faults These include internal failures external failures and operational failures Following are examples of these failures Internal Failures Non responding circuit boards O Memory checksum errors External Failures O Sequence fault Operational Failures O Communication failures O Configuration failures O Password access failures GFK 1065F Chapter 9 Diagnostics 9 3 9 4 System Response to Faults Some faults can be tolerated while others require that the system be shut down I O failures may
184. e protocol on the port This could be either the RTU Slave protocol the protocol running before the programmer was attached a new protocol received through a configuration store or a new protocol from a Serial Port Setup COMM_REQ Installing the most recently established port protocol puts that protocol back to its initial state In the normal case upon loss of the programmer connection the RTU Slave protocol will be reinstalled on the port It is important to note that there will be a delay of approximately 20 seconds from the time you remove the programmer from the serial line and the time that it is detected as missing Therefore in the normal case mentioned above there will be an interval after disconnecting the programmer during which no RTU messages can be processed on that port This delay is implemented to prevent brief periods of signal instability from being mistaken as loss of programmer If a new configuration has been stored while the port is attached to the programmer the newly configured port protocol will become the most recently established protocol and will be installed on the port upon a loss of programmer communications Example If RTU Slave is running on Port at 9600 baud and a PLC programmer running at 9600 baud is attached to the port SNP Slave will be installed on the port and the programmer will communicate as normal If during that communications session a configuration store is done which sets up the port for S
185. e protocols Port 2 supports SNP SNPX Slave and Master protocols and RTU Slave protocol Port 2 does not support the HHP Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F a45683 2 Parallel Expansion 11 24 VDC lt 4 24 VDC for Outputs 24 VDC for Inputs Input Power Input Power 5 14 VDC Bolle ee ee ee 1 ee re Ue On ek Figure 2 2 Micro PLC Functional Block Diagram GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 5 2 6 High Speed Counters 1 693008011 002 005 IC693UAL006 IC693UDR010 The high speed counter HSC function consists of four built in counters Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 5Khz for industrial control applications such as meter proving turbine flowmeter velocity measurement material handling motion control and process control Because it uses direct processing the HSC can sense inputs count and respond with outputs without needing to communicate with the CPU The HSC function can be configured to operate in one of two modes 4 four identical independent simple type A counters that can count up or down B1 3 A4 counters 1 3 configured as one type B counter counter 4 as one type A counter In either mode each counter can be enabled independently Type A counters can be configured for up or down counting default is up and for positive or negative edge detection default is positive The HSC function
186. e the input screen to be displayed this is not configurable RO 02 I S I16 10001 10008 If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 313 331 340 341 or 351 the input module should be located in the first I O slot slot 02 on the Model 331 340 341 or 351 and slot 01 on the Model 311 and Model 313 6 Pressing the 4 key again causes the output screen to be displayed this is not configurable 20 03 0 lt 5 016 00001 00006 If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 313 331 340 341 or 351 the output module should be located in the second slot slot 03 on the Model 331 340 341 or 351 and slot 02 on the Model 311 and Model 313 7 Pressing the J key again causes the first HSC screen to be displayed DC In Relay Out and DC In DC Out Relay Out models only RO 04 HSC S CTR TYPE ALL A If the program is transferred to a Series 90 30 Model 311 313 331 340 341 or 351 the HSC module should be located in the third I O slot slot 04 on the Model 331 340 341 or 351 and slot 03 on the Model 311 and Model 313 The remaining HSC configuration screens are discussed in Chapter 6 The following two screens are displayed only for Micro PLCS that have DC output 1C693UDR005 010 UAL006 Note The PWM Out and PULSE OUT options are available only on counter channel 1 These outputs are also controlled by values in memory locations AQ2 and AQ3 PWM and 123 AQ1
187. ean contacts Maximum number of Discrete Physical I O Points 14 8 inputs 6 outputs Maximum number of slave devices per network 8 can be increased with a repeater Output Power Supplies IC693UDR001 002 UEX011 24VDC for input circuits amp user devices 100mA max 5VDC on pin 5 of Serial Port 155mA max for UDR001 002 only Super cap backup for RAM Provides data retention for 3 4 days with the power off at 25 C Table 2 10 Physical and Functional Characteristics 28 Point PLCs Weight 1C693UDRO005 1 5 Ibs 680 g IC693UAA007 1 54 165 700 g IC693UDRO10 1 54 Ibs 700 g Module Dimensions Height 3 2 82mm Width 8 6 218mm Depth 3 0 76mm Typical Scan Rate 1 0 ms K of logic Boolean contacts Real Time Clock accuracy 10 C 4 54 sec day 25 C 5 22 sec day 55 C 10 66 sec day Maximum number of Discrete Physical I O Points 28 16 inputs 12 outputs Maximum number of slave devices per network 8 can be increased with a repeater 24 VDC Output Power Supply IC693UDR005 010 200 mA maximum for input circuits and user devices 5 VDC on pin 5 of Serial Ports Serial Port 1 155mA maximum Serial Port 2 100mA maximum Serial Ports 1 amp 2 combined 255mA maximum The load on either port can exceed the individual ratings listed above if the combined load does not exceed 255mA See Caution below Lithium battery lifetime Shelf life powered down Up to 7 years typical at 30 C Up to 5 years
188. ector to be mounted on the PLC Do not use terminal strips or other types of connectors along the length of the transmission line Isolated Repeater Converter Brick Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made onthe Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between 9 and pin 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771 the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 used asa repeater 25 female On the CMM31 1 only port 2 can support RS 422 RS 485 Figure D 15 Cable A Master to Slaves SNP Master or RTU Master without Flow Control GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 21 RTU Master with Hardware Flow Control RS 422 Twisted Make connections Pin Shielded Pairs inside D connectors 2 m a Y 3 5 50 ri e 10 RD A E 90 oo 50 8 TH 11 0 a 0 RD A 12 SD A 09 Series 00
189. ed adjustment value and write back to it during which time received counts are ignored GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 3 Strobe Register This register is used if the counter s Preload Strobe parameter is set to Strobe Preload and Strobe cannot be active at the same time This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or the HHP It cannot be changed by a COMM_REQ When the Strobe signal goes active the current value in the Accumulator is stored in the associated Strobe register and a Strobe flag status bit is set to indicate to the CPU that a Strobe value was captured This value remains in the Strobe register until the Strobe signal goes active again and is overwritten The Strobe flag stays on until the application program clears it The Strobe input always updates the Strobe register with the latest Accumulator value regardless of the state of the Strobe flag Data Automatically Sent by the HSC Analog Input Al Data The 15 words of Analog Input data values and 16 Status bits I sent to the CPU are listed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Description of Data 101 HSC Status Code see Table 6 3 102 Counts per timebase HSC1 32768 to 32767 103 Counts per timebase HSC2 32768 to 32767 104 Counts per timebase HSC3 32768 to 32767 105 Counts timebase HSC4 22768 to 32767 106 Accumulator HSC1 32768 to 32767 107 Strobe Register HSC1 32768 to 3276
190. ed times housekeeping and diagnostics and variable times The variable times vary according to the I O configuration size of the user program and the type of programming device connected to the PLC Table 8 1 Sweep Time Contribution Time Contribution Time Contribution ms ms Sweep Element Description 14 Point 23 and 28 Point Housekeeping Schedule start of next sweep Determine mode of next sweep Update fault reference tables Reset watchdog timer Program User logic solved Execution time is dependent on the length of the Execution program and the types of instructions used in the program Instruction execution times are listed in Appendix A Services programming device HHP 1 93 HHP 0 333 filtertime x A C D E 0 5 filtertime x A C D E 0 5 To determine filter time see Discrete Input Filtering on page 8 16 Data Input Input data received On DC input units B is increased by an amount determined by the discrete input filter time see formula below B for 14 point Micro PLC 0 365 0 036 B for 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs 0 417 0 006 Housekeeping The housekeeping portion of the sweep performs all of the tasks necessary to prepare for the start of the sweep If the PLC is in the constant sweep mode the sweep will be delayed until the required sweep time elapses If the required time has already elapsed the ov_swp 5 40002 contact is set and the sweep continues without del
191. ed to start up the DC power supply 14 Point AC In AC Out AC Power IC693UAA003 Inputs Eight AC inputs See page 4 15 Outputs Six AC outputs See page 4 18 Field wiring diagram See page 4 22 AC Power Requirements User Internal 1 6930 003 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 596 to 60 4596 Hz Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Current 18 A maximum at 120 VAC 30 A maximum at 200 VAC 40 A maximum at 265 VAC Inrush Time 2 ms for 40A Input Current 0 25 A typical at 100 VAC 0 12 A typical at 200 VAC Input Power Supply Rating 20 VA Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F 28 Point DC In DC amp Relay Out AC Power IC693UDR005 Inputs Sixteen 24 volt DC positive negative logic input circuits See page 4 7 Potentiometers See page 4 8 Outputs One DC output 01 See page 4 12 Eleven normally open 2 amp relay circuits See page 4 10 24 VDC Isolated 24 VDC output power supply See page 4 12 Field wiring diagram See page 4 23 AC Power Requirements User Internal IC693UDR005 Range 100 15 to 240 10 VAC Frequency 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Hold up 10 ms at 85 VAC Inrush Current 30 A maximum at 200 VAC 40 A maximum at 265 VAC Inrush Time 2 ms for 40A Input Current 0 26 A typical at 100 VAC 0 12 A typical at 200 VAC Input Power Supply Rating 40 VA 23 Point DC In DC amp Relay Out Analog Power IC693UAL006 Inputs Thirteen 24VDC positive negative logic
192. ee de ees 4 3 Model Surmaties ete eet e tete depart beste ede 4 3 14 Point DC In Relay Out AC Power IC693UDROOl UEXO11 4 3 14 Point DC In Relay Out DC Power IC693UDR002 14 Point DC In DC Out DC Power IC693UDD104A 5 terri nitet reas be et eS Tee cocta 4 4 14 Point AC In AC Out AC Power 1 6930 003 4 4 28 Point DC In DC amp Relay Out AC Power 1 6930 05 4 5 23 Point DC In DC amp Relay Out Analog I O AC Power IC693UAL006 4 5 28 Point AC In AC Power 1 6930 007 4 6 28 Point DC DC amp Relay Out DC Power IC693UDRO010 eee 4 6 Positive Negative Logic Inputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UDD00104 UALO006 UEXOLLD edebat Muted ie cate i 4 7 Potentiometer Analog Inputs Models eene 4 8 High Speed Counter Inputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UALO06 4 9 Relay Outputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UALO006 UEXO011 4 10 Output Circuit Protection scesero ee 4 11 High Speed Counter Outputs IC693UDR001 002 005 IC693UALO006 4 12 DC Outputs IC693UDR005 010 and 6930 1006 4 12 T
193. eference tables will be deleted from operation flash memory You will need to restore not only your program but the configuration and reference tables If system includes expansion unit s Micro PLC base unit loses power before the Expansion units will be reset all outputs will be set to expansion unit s zero Expansion unit s lose power before the Micro A Loss of Expansion Module fault will be logged PLC base unit while Micro PLC is scanning I O Micro PLC base unit powers up before the If expansion units do not power up within approximately expansion unit s 3 seconds a Loss of Expansion Module fault will be logged Expansion unit s power up before the Micro Expansion unit outputs remain off until the Micro base PLC base unit unit completes powerup and begins scanning I O GFK 1065F Chapter 8 System Operation 6 9 True stop mode Copy flash to RAM gt Clear RAM program False Y Power up in True Battery voltage Power down in RUN mode Figure 8 3 Powerup Decision Sequence Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Clocks and Timers Elapsed Time Clock The Elapsed Time Clock uses 100 microsecond ticks to track the time elapsed since the CPU powered on The clock is not retentive across a power failure it restarts on each power up Once per second the hardware interrupts the CPU to enable a seconds count to be recorded This seconds count rolls over approxi
194. en HHP bbreviation Output Failure Mode Failure Mde FAIL NORMAL FRCOFF HOLD NORMAL Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 6 5 Abbreviations for ALL A type Counter Configuration Logicmaster 90 HHP HHP Parameter Abbreviation Screen No Abbreviation Value 1 Value 2 Default Counter 1 Count Enabl 3 CTRI DISABLE DISABLE Enable Disable Counter 1 Output Out Enable 4 OUT DISABLE DISABLE Enable Disable Counter 1 Direction 5 CTRI DIR UP Counter 1 Mode CONT __ 15 CONT U Counter 1 Preload Strobe Pld strobe 7 CTRI PRE STROBE PRELOAD selection P P E E E U Counter 1 Strobe Edge Counter 1 Count Edge POS POS Time Base 1 Time Base Ie ___ 1000mS High Limit 1 082767 Low Limit 1 ON Preset 1 ____ OFF Preset 1 Preload 1 Pld Value Counter 1 PWM Output PWM Out 01 Enable Disable 3 4 5 32767 OFF PST1 PRELD 1 PWMOUTI DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE CTR2 ENABL DISABLE DISABLE CTR2 OUT DISABLE DISABLE DOWN 0 CONT CTR2 PRELO STROBE PRELOAD ImMEBS2 mim pomm e fg EE d erra pos POS EA i Er i Se ONPSTI 1 NONE Counter Signal Counter 2 Count Enabl Enable Disable Counter 2 Output Out Enable Enable Disable Counter 2 Direction 2 Counter 2 Mod
195. en the Micro PLC is powering up 5 2 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 1 Micro PLC Parameters Continued In RefAddr Discrete input reference not editable 100001 100001 Input Size Discrete input size not editable 8 14 point 16 28 point 16 13 23 point 13 Out RefAddr Discrete output reference not editable 000001 000001 Output Size Discrete output size not editable 6 14 point 6 12 28 point 12 10 23 point 10 GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 3 Configuration and Programming Using the HHP You can use the HHP to perform the following tasks e Statement List logic program development including insert edit and delete functions The Statement List programming instructions provide basic Boolean instructions to execute logical operations such as AND and OR and many functions that execute advanced operations including arithmetic operations data conversion and data transfer e On line program changes e Search logic programs for instructions and or specific references e Monitor reference data while viewing logic program e Monitor reference data in table form in binary hexadecimal or decimal formats Monitor timer and counter values e View PLC scan time firmware revision code and current logic memory use e Load store and verify program logic and configuration between the HHP and a removable Memory Card IC693ACC303 This allows programs to be moved between PLCs or
196. ents for Micro PLC Functions Slot as seen on HHP Function Fixed Configurable High Speed Counter Fixed 100497 100512 000497 000512 AI00001 AI00015 5 AI18 19 IC693UAL006 only Fixed for IC693UAL006 configurable for other units 12 IC693UAL006 only Fixed for IC693UAL006 configurable for other units 7 Expansion Unit 1 23 and 28 point units i 11 Unused Unused If you want to transfer a program developed for a Series 90 Micro PLC to a Series 90 30 PLC the I O modules in the Series 90 30 PLC must be in the above listed rack and slot locations for the program and configuration to work properly The screen shown above also shows the first configuration item which allows you to change the Hand Held Programmer Key Click feature The default is KEY CLK OFF 3 Pressing the T key causes the next screen to be displayed R0 00 PWR SUP S IO BASE 18 06 This screen indicates that the baseplate located at rack 0 and slot 00 is a generic 8 Input 6 Output module 4 Pressing the key causes the previous screen to be displayed RO 01 PLC S KEY CLK OFF Use the lt and keys to view the other Micro PLC parameters for configuration and the key to select the items within each parameter Refer to Table 5 1 for acceptable values and default values for Micro PLC parameters GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 5 5 When all Micro PLC parameters have been configured press the key again to caus
197. eo O O O O O O O O O O O Q Q 1 MOd elpsre KI eoinog OVA 0 2 001 JOA OA Figure 4 15 28 Point AC In AC Out Modules IC693UAA007 GFK 1065F Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 4 24 juano ul y y sjeuDis 10 sjunoo esneo pinoo Hulounog 1 ejejs pios eq s y yms 1ndui sindui peeds se pesn 81 11 uSuM y eounos eounos eounos eounos OVA 10 OV 40 OV 40 OV 10 OV 40 OV 0 2 001 I inon roor anor woo woo evo T T9 T moo T Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv V V V 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B Pa Pa Pa sen o e T T To E Tee L5 ola T T So Duce ae LNI gt 7O 899e Notes connected as positive and I9 through 113 either positive or negative logic In the are connected a
198. equences system clocks and timers system security through password assignment and the I O system PLC Sweep Summary The logic program in a PLC executes in a repetitive fashion until stopped by a command from the programmer or by a command from another device such as a host computer This repetitive cycle which includes the sequence of operations necessary to execute a program one time is called a sweep In addition to executing the logic program the sweep includes obtaining data from input devices sending data to output devices performing internal housekeeping and servicing the programmer see Figure 8 1 The following configuration items affect the Series 90 Micro PLC sweep Stop Mode Stop with I O Disabled Stop with I O Enabled Constant Sweep Mode Enable Disable GFK 1065F 8 1 8 2 Start of sweep Housekeeping VO Enabled 2 yes Input Scan Application Logic Solution VO Enabled 2 Yes Output Scan Programmer Attached Communications Services Start Next Sweep Housekeeping Data Input Program Execution Data Output Communications Services Figure 8 1 PLC Sweep Sequence Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 Scan Time of PLC GFK 1065F Sweep Time Contribution GFK 1065F Five items contribute to the sweep time of the PLC The sweep time consists of fix
199. er s Manual GFK 0466 provides details on the use of the configuration software 2__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ gt SERIES 90 MICRO SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog ie MICRO 26PT DCINARLY UT AC PS I Scan Stop 0 Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits Pur Up Mode LAST Parity ODD Cfg From RAM Stop Bits 1 Registers RAM Modem TT 9 1 100 Second Count Passwords ENABLED Idle Time 10 Seconds Pur UP Diag ENABLED Sweep Mode NORMAL Sweep VIEW ONLY PARAMETERS In Ref ddr 100001 Out ReffAddr Q00001 Input Size 16 Output Size 12 lt lt Config Exists Pos Next Page foe gt gt C NLMSONREL3 REPLACERCAPS Note If the Micro PLC loses power during a program store operation configuration and reference tables will be deleted from flash memory You will need to restore not only your program but the configuration and reference tables GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 11 Configuring Serial Ports 5 12 Port 1 an RS 422 compatible serial port is used to communicate with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software the HHP or for general purpose communications This port supports SNP SNPX protocols On 14 point Micro PLCs it also supports RTU slave protocol Port 1 is configured as part of the general parameters for the Micro PLC using the Logicmaster 90 configuration program or the HHP except for RTU communications
200. er network This number can be increased with the use of a repeater For additional information on serial communications refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the line This termination is made on the Series 90 Micro PLC products by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15 pin D shell Sample cabling for multidrop installations is provided in Appendix D Serial Ports and Cables and Appendix E Converters Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Replacing Fuses AC In AC Out Models Only There are user replaceable parts in the DC In Relay Out Micro PLCs UDR001 002 005 010 UAL006 UEX011 The AC In AC Out model Micro PLCs IC693UAA003 007 provide user replaceable fuses for their AC output points Because each output fuse is on the common of several circuits a blown fuse will prevent the entire group associated with it from working Refer to Table 3 3 and to the field wiring diagrams in Chapter 4 Remove power from the unit before removing field wiring or removing the front cover Failure to remove power from the unit before disassembling it could cause severe or fatal injury to personnel Do not attempt to remove the circuit boards from the Micro PLC assembly or to replace fuses on the power supply board Any disassembly beyond removing the
201. es 1 If configured to disable powerup diagnostics the 28 point DC In Relay Out DC Power unit IC693UDRO010 will begin logic solution 100ms after the voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24VDC The 24VDC power source for the UDRO10 unit must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and maintain a 24VDC voltage level see power supply specifications for inrush requirements above 2 The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage approximately 4 VDC than at rated input voltage A minimum of 2 0 A is necessary to start up the DC power supply GFK 1065F Chapter 2 Introduction 2 19 Table 2 14 Environmental Requirements Operating temperature 0 to 55 C Relative humidity 5 to 95 Table 2 15 Memory Allocation For a list of reserved memory locations refer to Appendix B 2 20 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation This chapter describes the procedures for installing the Micro PLC and preparing the system for use Included in this chapter are instructions for unpacking inspecting and installing the Micro PLC Instructions are also provided for connecting cables to programming devices Minimum Hardware Requirements Unpacking GFK 1065F To install and set up the Micro PLC you will need e Micro PLC Module e Programming device this can be one of the following items A Hand Hel
202. es detected constitute faults and are alarmed If there is no software configuration the CPU will use the default configuration In the final step of the execution the mode of the first sweep is determined based on CPU configuration Figure 8 3 shows the decision sequence followed by the CPU when it decides whether to copy from flash memory or to power up in STOP or RUN mode In the figure text in bold refers to commands entered using the Hand Held Programmer or the Logicmaster 90 software Command HHP Key Combination clear Press CLR and M T simultaneously using HHP Id_not Press LD and simultaneously using HHP ostop Press NOT and RUN simultaneously using HHP Power Down Conditions System power down occurs automatically if the power supply detects that incoming AC power has dropped The minimum hold time is one half cycle Note During a gradual power down when the input power supply voltage is below the minimum operating voltage the Micro PLC may power off and then power on again until the input voltage drops low enough to prevent power on again You should take precautions if this type of behavior cannot be tolerated in your application Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Power Cycle Table 8 4 lists the effects that a power cycle can have on Micro PLC operation under specific conditions Table 8 4 Effects of a Power Cycle Micro PLC loses power during a program store Configuration and r
203. es 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Miniconverter Kit This section describes the Miniconverter Kit for use with Series 90 PLCs Description of Miniconverter The Miniconverter Kit IC690ACC901 consists of an RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter 6 foot 2 meter serial extension cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin Converter Plug assembly The 15 pin SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series 90 30 power supply Series 90 70 CPU Series 90 20 CPU or Series 90 Micro CPU The 9 pin RS 232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS 232 compatible device 844985 RS 422 RS 232 PORT PORT Figure E 6 Series 90 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter When used with an IBM PC AT or compatible computer one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter s 9 pin serial port connector while the other end plugs into the 9 pin serial port of the computer The Converter plug supplied with kit is required to convert the 9 pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25 pin serial port connector on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer or an IBM PC XT or PS 2 Personal Computer The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter not supplied with kit please contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor for use with the Miniconverter GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters E 9 Pin Assignments The pinout of the Miniconverter is shown in the following
204. esistor capacitor inputs Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table 1 Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user The input circuits require an AC power source they cannot be used with a DC power source 5V 5V a45690 Terminal gt Strip LED High Frequency gt CPU Filter To other circuits 0 Figure 4 9 Typical 120 VAC Input Circuit Table 4 10 AC Input Circuit Specifications Points Common 4 1 14 and 15 18 Rated Load Voltage 85 132 VAC 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms 50 60 Hz Input Current 8 mA rms 100 VAC 60 Hz Voltage ON minimum 80V rms 4 5 mA rms OFF maximum 30V rms 2 mA rms Response Time maximum 25 ms ON OFF maximum 30 ms Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side 500 rms between groups GFK 1065F Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 17 4 18 AC Outputs IC693UAA003 007 The 120 VAC 0 5 A output points are provided in isolated groups A circuit diagram is shown in Figure 4 9 The commons are not tied together inside the module This allows each group to be used on different phases of the AC supply or to be powered from the same supply Each group is protected with a 3 2 amp fuse for its common Also an RC snubber is provided f
205. est to Send Clear to Send Clear to Send Send Data Send Data Receive Data Receive Data Receive Data Optional Termination Receive Data Optional Termination No connection No connection Send Data Optional Termination Send Data Optional Termination No connection SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B and denote outputs A and B denote inputs Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F The signal ground connections pin 7 on each connector must be made between the Isolated Repeater Converter and the PLC for J1 and the Isolated Repeater Converter and the host computer for J2 Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal shell of the J1 connector Pin 7 of the J2 port is connected to the metal shell of the J2 connector These two signal ground connections are isolated from each other and from the power system ground green wire on the terminal block To maintain proper isolation these signal grounds cannot be tied together No gt co lt eo oooooooooooooo ooooooooooooo aw i RS 422 TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS e RS 422 ISOLATED REPEATER RS 232 CONVERTER IC655CCM590 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS Y oocooooooooooo HOST COMPUTER Figure E 12 Example RS
206. esults iere RE EE AER ER dE 9 8 Accessing Additional Fault Information 9 8 Special Operational Notes ee et e ete ee e eee etn ote 9 9 Technical Help nmt RR ete ee Rec En el al ea 9 9 Appendix A Instruction 1 Appendix B Reference eese sees sese es soseessseeesss B L xvi Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Contents User References en Meee 1 References for Fault Reporting itte ient iet cese tb B 2 Fixed Map Locations n ce dee C ee qe ete B 3 Appendix C PLC Software Cross Reference eee C L Appendix D Serial Port and 1 er esee ETE D 1 Cable and Connector D 2 Port Configurations edet reete heed ests D 3 Series 90 PEG Serial Port eR eese er D 3 Workmiaster Serial stokes A CUR E BIER D 5 IBM AT Serial Port 825 200 seti D 6 RS 232 RS 485 Converter eee E AO e EE CE Ro D 6 Serial Cable Diagrams ERE Atene REA eatin de D 7 Point to Point Connections ccccccccccecesssececececsessssececececeesessnsececececsesessaeeeeeeeeeenes D 7 RS 232 Poi
207. f the PWM output 19 hz to 2 Khz by writing a value to e g memory location AQ2 The PWM duty cycle 0 to 100 is selected by writing a value to e g memory location AQ3 Sample calculations of PWM duty cycle and frequency are provided in Table 4 6 When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode PWM will continue to operate Also PWM will continue to operate over a power cycle Therefore if PWM is running when power is lost it will run when power is restored 5 40 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 18 Sample Values for PWM Duty Cycle and Frequency Contents of Frequency Register Contents of Duty Cycle Typical On Duty Cycle 4c 5 Register e g AQ3 at 24 VDC 16 mA 1 5Kohm load Formulas 9 Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers They can be entered as hex or as two s complement values 10 Frequency calculation AQ2 9 84 MHz 8 x frequency 1 Frequency tolerance is 0 01 11 On Duty Cycle calculation AQ3 On_duty_cycle 100 x frequency delta_delay 9 84MHz 8 1 On Duty Cycle 0 to 100 Delta Delay Difference between the off and on response times of the output device see Table 4 7 for typical delta delay values 4 On Time calculation AQ3 ontime delta delay 9 84 MHz 8 1 5 Off Time calculation Off Time 1 frequency ontime Table 5 19 Typical Values for Delta Delay
208. f the AGVs battery power The Solution Two GE Fanuc Series 90 Micro PLCs per AGV were installed for peripheral driving control of the vehicles and to communicate with the base station via SNP and radio modems The Benefits The system now requires less power and less panel space because the Series 90 Micro PLC replaced the larger PLC Overall hundreds of dollars in savings per system were realized It was also advantageous to install Series 90 Micro PLCs because the customer was already using GE Fanuc Series 9030 PLCs As part of the Series 90 family Series 90 Micro PLCs use the same programming equipment and software as the Series 9030 PLC The Series 90 Micro PLCs provide peripheral driving control of the Automated Guided D Sara GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories 11 Paper Industry Gear Pumping Machinery The Need Pumps are used to separate chemicals from rinsing water for proper disposal A costeffective system was needed to control the logic for sequencing the operation of turning the solenoids and pumps on and off In addition the operator must be able to monitor and change each of the 12 timing sequences externally The process was controlled by timers and relays which were costly to maintain The Solution A Series 90 Micro PLC and an Operator Interface Terminal OIT were used to replace the mechanical system The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC was
209. four type A counters or as one type B counter and one type A counter DC in relay out Micro PLCs only Two potentiometers that provide selectable analog inputs to AI16 and 7 with configurable filtering Configurable software filtering of discrete inputs Series 90 SNP and SNP Extended SNPX and RTU slave communication protocols A pulse catch input function selectable on up to four inputs that detects pulses at least 100 microseconds in width Pulse train and Pulse Width Modulation PWM outputs Micro PLCs with DC output only Compatibility with 14 point expansion unit 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs Pager Enunciation function that can be configured to send a specified byte string from Serial Port 2 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs Two analog inputs and one analog output 23 point Micro PLC 2 1 The Micro PLC hardware consists of a single module that includes CPU I O and power supply functions Figure 2 1 The compact lightweight unit is designed for 35mm DIN rail or panel mounting a45452 SS C RE CE ___ os o sm x meur pwr d Series 90 Micro qu ur EIS EIU EE TU E E Eti dd ourPuT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Reel 000000000000 Typical 14 Point Micro PLC a45499 Series 90 Micro EL EL Be BIET ERES EE E D D LDLDL Oooogog PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Typical 28 Point Micro PLC Figure 2 1 Series 90 Micro Programmabl
210. ge Pos gt gt 1 EE E D T REPLACERCAPS GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 29 5 30 Link Interface Expansion Unit Note The I O Link IC693UEX013 is not sold in the United States This page is for informational purposes only For details on installation and operation refer to the documentation provided with the I O Link IEU The I O Link IEU is a slave device on an I O link This device connects to a Micro PLC base unit or to an expansion unit and allows the Micro PLC to reside on an I O Link network The I O Link IEU receives 32 64 128 or 256 inputs from the I O link and transmits 32 64 128 or 256 to the I O link Because the I O Link IEU has only one expansion connector it must be the last unit in a chain of expansion units if other units are connected to the same base Micro PLC This also means that there can be only one I O Link IEU per Micro PLC Any available Q discrete reference memory address can be used for the output data and any available I discrete reference memory address can be used for the input data as long as it does not overlap the input reference address of other input devices The I O Link IEU s reference addresses will default to 7010049 and 00049 when the Micro PLC s configuration is defaulted If the Micro PLC logs a Loss of Expansion Unit fault while scanning the input data from the I O Link IEU the input reference memory data will be set to all zeros
211. gh Speed Counter Status 2 2 40 0 0000000 6 5 Status Bits 9010 Et 6 5 Data Automatically Sent to the 5 6 eere 6 6 Output Failure Moderar ene Rete EEE RE E E EA a 6 7 Counter Operation iisi 2 e tette eeaeee 6 8 Type A Counter Overview eane eee eed hn te aes 6 8 Type A Operating Parameters en e e enne nennen nennen nennen 6 9 Counter Enable Disable 6 9 Counter Output Enable Disable sess 6 9 Prel ad Strob6e e rtr i ino eee EDU Ug iet 6 9 Count Mode Sec ea e Re EIN eR RE Ue tec e een Siete 6 10 Count Direction a oC RR ree er pP eR ip 6 10 Sttobe Count Edge etse ee e e DRE De ee eth 6 10 Counter Time Bases eiie eere dee io pedes ete oer ce s pter ebat 6 10 Count 6 11 Output Preset Points eee e Ue Seri EE e eee irent 6 11 Preload Valie d 6 13 B Counter Operatlon i thereto Eee cavi Te E EHE EROR Een 6 14 A Quad B Counting inne tee dori etes tra pe aee eae 6 14 Type B Counter Overviews eite iei ei 6 15 Type B Operating Parameters nennen 6 16 Counter Enable DBisabl te itor 6 16 Counter Output Enable Disable cee
212. gic Diagram of the Isolated 2 2 15 Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater Converter esee E 16 System ConfiguratiOTis turre i tede Hates seve cones eei eia get ee E 18 Simple Multidrop Configuration eese eene eene nennen enne nnne E 18 GFK 1065F Contents xvii Contents xviii Complex Multidrop Configuration essere E 19 Rules for Using Repeater Converters in Complex Networks E 19 Cable Diagrams aee PD te bi e ti E 20 Appendix F Cable Data Sheets 1 ense teen F 1 IC693CBL303 Hand Hand Programmer Cable eee F 2 IC690CBL701 Workmaster PC XT to RS 485 RS 232 Converter Cable F 4 IC690CBL702 PC AT to RS 485 RS 232 Converter F 5 IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface to SNP Port Cable F 6 IC690CBL705 Workmaster II PS 2 to RS 485 RS 232 Converter Cable F 7 2 Wire Cable Diagrams ey S dn EE HO e RE RE F 8 Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs G 1 Series 90 Micro PLC Analog I O Through CALEX Signal Conditioners G 1 Application rs Trete tet eee cec LE tha eee ree ed e
213. gnal Ground 8 CTs __ 9 Connected s Data Terminal Ready RS 232 RS 485 Converter The RS 232 RS 485 Converter IC690ACC900 can be used to convert from RS 232 to RS 422 RS 485 communications The converter has one 15 pin female D type port and one 25 pin female D type port This converter unit can be purchased from GE Fanuc Automation Please contact any GE Fanuc Automation sales office or field service representative For detailed information on the converter refer to Appendix E Examples of serial cable diagrams that include the converter are provided in the remainder of this appendix D 6 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Serial Cable Diagrams Point to Point Connections In the point to point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication line The communication line can be directly connected using RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum or RS 485 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum Modems can be used for longer distances Note The cable connector for the Series 90 70 Series 90 30 and Series 90 Micro PLC serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly Refer to Connector Cable Specifications in Table D 2 RS 232 Point to Point Connections Figures D 3 through D 5 illustrate typical RS 232 point to point connections to Series 90 PLCs GFK 1065F Appendix D Seria
214. gnal Ground Resistor Terminator Differential Receive Data In in Differential Send Data Send Daa 15 1065 Appendix Converters 5 E 6 Logic Diagram The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter RS 232 RS 485 44539 8 232 CONVERTER 85 495 I A 25 PIN IC690ACC900 18 PIN SHIELD d lt TERMINATOR RESISTOR 120 0 Figure E 4 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter Logic Diagram Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Jumper Configuration GFK 1065F There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options Each jumper position has three pins as shown in the following illustration These jumper positions labeled JP2 JP3 and JP4 are accessed by removing the square plastic cover on the top of the converter Configuration can be changed as required by carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair of pins Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in Table E 3 and place the jumper on the selected pair of pins The pin numbers are 1 2 and 3 Default jumper locations are indicated by a rectangle around the pins to be jumpered for each position The default pin numbers are 1 and 2 RS 422 R S485 a44680 Figure E 5 Location of Jumper
215. grammer Y attached status Not Not attached Previous Attached attached Previous T status Status ache No Programmer Rd request Abort Setup for rossed 2 _ operation Hand Held progress Programmer Yes Y Y Y Yes Process request Setup for Send initial Process key Series 90 display protocol Send new display Figure 8 2 Programmer Communications Window Flow Chart Deviations from the Standard Program Sweep The user can select certain deviations from the Standard Program Sweep by configuration or by program instructions These variations are described in the following paragraphs Constant Sweep Time Mode In the Standard Program Sweep each sweep executes as quickly as possible with a varying amount of time consumed each sweep An alternative to this is the Constant Sweep Time mode In the Constant Sweep Time mode each sweep consumes the same amount of time which can be selected during configuration to be from 5 to 200 milliseconds For more information on the constant sweep timer refer to Clocks and Timers on page 8 11 PLC Sweep When in STOP Mode When the PLC is in STOP mode the application program is not executed In this mode you can choose whether or not the I O is scanned and communications with the programmer will continue For efficiency the operating system uses larger time slice values than those that are typica
216. grammer must be in on line mode and communicating with the PLC Entering or changing passwords requires access to the highest level If no passwords have been set up for the system this level is automatically available Note Once passwords have been entered they can only be changed by e Entering the correct password to access the highest level privileges In the configuration software by placing the master diskette in the system disk drive of the computer and pressing the ALT and O keys It is important to keep the original software master diskettes in a secure location because this allows passwords to be overridden A programmer requests a privilege level change by supplying the new privilege level and the password for that level A privilege level change will be denied if the password sent by the programmer does not agree with the password stored in the PLC s password access table for the requested level If you attempt to access or modify information in the PLC using the HHP without the proper privilege level the HHP will respond with an error message stating that access is denied When communicating over a serial link a privilege level change remains in effect only as long as communications between the PLC and the programmer are intact There does not need to be any activity but the communications link must not be broken If there is no communication for 15 seconds the privilege level returns to the highest unprotected level
217. he PLC to the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter IC690ACC900 The prewired cable IC693CBL303 is 6 feet 2 meters long This is the cable used with the HHP If a different length cable is required for connection to the converter refer to the information below for specifications and wiring information This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable The recommended cable types for custom cables are listed below and depend on the length of the cable Table F 1 Specifications for 693 303 Prewired Cable Connectors 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Canon DAISS solder pot Same connector is on both ends AMP 207470 1 connector shel AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips Cable Type Belden 9508 AWG 24 22 mm2 Cable Length 6 feet 2 meters Table F 2 Wire Types for Custom Cables Cable Length Catalog Number 30 feet 10m 22 36 mm 2 Belden 9309 gt 30 10m feet 22 36 mm 2 Same as for 30 feet In addition the 5VDC logic power source for the to 980 feet converter cannot be supplied by the PLC It must be provided by an 300m external power supply connected to the 5V and SG pins at the converter end of the connector The 5V pin at the PLC connector must not be connected to the cable The 5V and SG connections from the power supply must be isolated from their own power line ground connection Be sure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC
218. he configurations for HSC PWM and Pulse outputs are sent to the CPU when the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode When the transition to RUN mode occurs the currently configured output stops running and the new configuration takes over Note A pulldown resistor connected between Q1 and COMI is required for high frequency Pulse and PWM up to 2Khz outputs and for duty cycles in the lower ranges 5 and lower A 1 5 Kohm 0 5 watt resistor is recommended for this purpose ee __ Sal MICHI SOF TARE COME EGURAT LUH IIRL IT FH CMTE 1 Count Emahl BISABHLEB fet Enable DISABLED TRELOGP Pun Out Gi Count Edge FOS Pal xi Count Sig On Preset Pret REP LACE GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 35 5 36 PWM Output PWM output can be used to control DC and stepper motors You can select the frequency of the PWM output 19hz to 2Khz by writing a value to memory location AQ2 The PWM duty cycle 0 to 100 is selected by writing a value to memory location AQ3 Sample calculations of PWM duty cycle and frequency are provided in Table 5 12 When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode PWM will continue to operate Also PWM will continue to operate over a power cycle Therefore if PWM is running when power is lost i
219. he following features e Two 25 pin female D type connectors Two 25 pin male D type connectors solder pot are included for user cabling e 115 230 VAC power connection internal 4 position terminal block e Fused l Amp power protection e Power ON green indicator LED e Three position toggle switch recessed in the back of the unit is set according to the system configurations described on page E 18 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater Converter The figure below provides a functional overview of the unit Note the three position switch for controlling the J1 port transmitters This switch is discussed in System Configurations on page E 19 344782 RS 422 RS 232C 2 gt gt SD 85 2320 y OPTICAL 422 ISOLATION J RD 8 PN 14 14 gt 9 2 en gt 50 23 23 E CTS B lt eil CTS A lt Ho RTS RS 232C 0 gt gt ATS 5 gt 5 RTS A ra 42 e lt lt lt H 85 2326 gt RD B gt RD A gt CTS B gt CTS A 5 gt Figure E 11 RS 422 Isolated Repeater RS 232 Converter Logic Diagram GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters E 15 E 16 Note All inputs are biased to the inactive state Inputs left unconnected will produce a binar
220. hlRange 0 20mA Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Calibration Note The Analog I O function is factory calibrated Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to change the calibration Do not attempt the procedures in this section unless you are familiar with the operation of D A and A D converters Four calibration values for each analog channel are loaded into the Micro PLC flash memory at the factory voltage mode gain voltage mode offset current mode gain and current mode offset These calibration values be changed through a Service Request SVCREQ function You can calibrate the gain and offset values up to 50 times by following the calibration procedure described in this section If further calibration is necessary after the allocated number of tries is exhausted another set of 50 tries can be made available by updating the firmware Default Gains and Offsets A set of default gains and offsets is maintained in the PLC firmware in case you want to restore these values for calibration or for other reasons For the input channel in voltage mode the AI range of 0 to 32 000 corresponds to 0 to 1 000 counts of the A D converter Therefore the default input voltage gain is 32 and offset is O In current mode the AI range of 0 to 500 corresponds to 0 to 32 000 counts so that default current gain is 64 and offset is 0 The values for the A D converter are fixed In voltage mode the
221. hrough an internal fault table Access to S information is available through Logicmaster 90 Micro software or with the HHP For more details on faults and fault reporting see Chapter 9 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Fixed Map Locations GFK 1065F The following tables list memory locations that are reserved for I O functions Use of these addresses for other purposes in your ladder logic program is not recommended Table B 2 Reserved System Register References R1617 R1814 If transition coils are used this area is used to store their previous value Table B 3 Reserved Discrete Inputs 100002 Input 2 Preload Strobe Interrupt 1 100008 Input 8 Preload Strobe Interrupt 4 100495 Pulse Train complete on Q3 100497 500 Strobe status HSC1 HSC4 Preload status HSC1 HSC4 100505 508 Output status HSC1 HSC4 100509 1 module ready always 1 100510 not used always 0 100511 not used always 0 100512 Counter Error status Appendix B Reference Types B 3 Table B 4 Reserved Discrete Outputs 000003 Output 3 PWM Output Pulse Output Third standard expansion unit if configured Fourth standard expansion unit if configured ETT Q00499 Clear Strobe bit for HSC 3 vm Q00505 Enable Output HSC 1 000511 Clear error all counters 000512 Not used but unavailable Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table B 5 Reserved Analog Inputs
222. ickly The Series 90 Micro PLC is part of a product family that allows the system to grow as needs change without retraining and the customer is fully supported both locally and nationally Handle Magazine Heater Stop Gate 1 555555505559 The Series 90 Micro PLC uses inputs from various sensors to control the handle applicator system GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories 15 Plastic Parts Manufacturing The Need The customer needed the ability to standardize on one PLC product line to control various bowl feeders The PLC interfaces with sensors throughout the cycle of the bowls to control the output of parts to an assembly machine The Solution The 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was used because it is part of the Series 90 family The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because of its programming hardware and software compatibility with the Series 9030 PLC which was already being used Additionally its cost effectiveness allowed the customer to replace other controls including other brands of Micro PLCs used by OEM bowl suppliers Assembly Machine Series 90 Micro PLCs control various bowl feeders allowing standardization on one PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Public Emergency Services Industry GFK 1065F Storm Warning Systems The Need A small PLC control sy
223. inations with B1 3 A4 Configuration 1 Counter Type B 1 Counter Type A PWM Output Q1 Pulse Train Output Q1 1 x Type B Or AND Counter at Q1 PWM Output Q2 Pulse Train Output Q3 Example for a permissible combination Type B Counter at Q1 PWM Output Q4 Example for a not permissible combination Type B Counter at Q1 Pulse Train Output Q3 Note A bias resistor connected between the output and COMI is required for high frequency Pulse and PWM up to 2 Khz outputs and for duty cycles in the lower ranges 596 and lower A 1 5 Kohm 0 5 watt resistor is recommended for this purpose Note The configurations for HSC PWM and Pulse outputs are sent to the CPU when the Micro PLC changes from STOP to RUN mode When the transition to RUN mode occurs the currently configured output stops running and the new configuration takes over GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 39 Table 5 17 Memory Locations for PWM and Pulse Train Parameters Aw OU Ag EMO Agi OUT mess 0 OU meses ag OU Pulse Train 1 Pulse Train Frequency Number of pulses to send Pulse train complete Pulse train complete Pulse Train Q5 Pulse Train Frequency Number of pulses to send Pulse train complete Pulse Train Q3 Pulse Train Frequency Number of pulses to send PWM Output IC693UDD104 PWM output can be used to control DC and stepper motors You can select the frequency o
224. ined in flash memory even after the user invokes the Write to EEPROM FLASH function in the programming configuration software or with the HHP Separate copies of the user configuration and the reference tables are maintained in the EEPROM FLASH areas of the flash memory The Configuration entry Cfg From determines only whether the user configuration is obtained from RAM or PROM The user program is always read from flash PROM memory In addition be aware that editing the user program with the HHP stores the edited copy of the program in RAM memory If you do not save the edited version of the program to flash memory the changes will be lost See Storing the User Program Using the HHP in Chapter 5 for the key sequence for this procedure Table 8 5 Settings for Cfg From Parameter Location Registers x LE EPROM FLASH Recommended Settings Read From Location Configuration x Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Chapter GFK 1065F 9 Diagnostics This chapter provides a guide to troubleshooting the Micro PLC and consists of two sections Powerup Diagnostics describes how to use the LED blink codes that the Micro PLC generates if the unit fails the power up self test described in Chapter 3 Faults and Fault Handling discusses how the Micro PLC handles system faults These faults can be diagnosed and corrected using the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP 9 1 Powerup Di
225. ing all 0 5 A point at 240 VAC models Maximum Inrush Current 5A 1 period point 10A 1 period common Maximum leak current when OFF 1 8 mA rms 115 VAC 3 5 mA rms 230 VAC Response Time OFF2ON maximum 1 ms ON OFF half of the load frequency 1 ms or less Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side 500 rms between groups a45682 D T D EB LET Per Common ft C Per Point 1 17 I d 5 10 1000 ms Figure 4 11 Inrush Derating Curve for AC Output GFK 1065F Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 19 Field Wiring Installation Wire Connection Information Wire connection information for power supply and I O connections for Series 90 Micro PLCs is detailed below Warning The Series 90 Micro PLC must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard Failure to do so could result in injury to personnel You should calculate the maximum current for each wire and observe proper wiring practices Failure to do so could cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment Caution When connecting stranded conductors insure that there are no projecting strands of wire These could cause a short circuit thereby damaging equipment or causing it to malfunction Power Supply and I O Connections e Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires but the w
226. ing siere ecenin seintes aeneon ieii nennen enne 3 5 Powerup Self test onimo ia a aie ee eee eek 3 6 Normal Powerup Sequence aie ete U pente tes eme m E 3 6 Fast ore e E ti e e eie eae aee tt 3 7 Error Detection And Correction nennen nennen 3 7 Connecting a Programming Device essere ener nennen nennen 3 8 Connecting the Hand Held Programmer eene 3 8 Connections for Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Software 3 10 Workmaster II Computer with 3 10 IBM PC Compatible Computer eese eene nennen rennen 3 10 Multidrop Serial Data Configuration to Series 90 PLCS eese 3 12 Replacing Fuses AC In AC Out Models 3 13 Expansion Unit Installation ee E pq E eee 3 16 Micro Expansion Unit od e aee 3 16 Micro Expansion Unit Orientation sees eene enne 3 17 Electromagnetic Compatibility eese nennen ene 3 18 Physical Order of Different Types of Expansion Units 221 2 2 2 11 3 18 Agency Approvals Standards and General Specifications for Series 90 Micro PLC 3 20 CE Mark Installation Requirements eese nennen rennen nennen 3 22 Field VV AUTEN siae on E 4 1 Positive and Negative Logic Definitions 000 0 ee ee esee 4 1 Interface Specifications eoe
227. ing A through F must be preceded by a zero for example OFFFF To enter a two s complement number enter it as a negative integer int For additional information on editing values in reference tables see Reference Tables in the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Sample calculation for PWM Output The formulas provided with Table 5 12 can be used to determine the value of AQ3 required at the fastest frequency to produce a minimum ON and OFF pulse width when the application is primarily concerned with varying the frequency For example an application might require a PWM output of 0 to 2Khz with an input device that requires a minimum pulse width of 50us With a fixed ON time the worst case OFF time occurs at 2Khz Therefore the value of AQ3 that will guarantee at least a 50us OFF pulse width is given by OFF time Period ON time 50us OFF 500us ON time ON time 450us 450s 0 09ms x 9 84 MHz 8 1 443 GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 37 Pulse Train Output You can select the frequency 10Hz to 2Khz of the pulse train output PTO by writing a value 32768 to 32767 to memory location AQ123 The number of pulses to be output is selected by writing a value to memory location AQ124 The pulse train is started when the Q494 bit is set to 1 by the ladder logic program Starting the pulse train clears 1494 When the number of pulses specified in AQ124
228. input channel A D range of 0 to 1 000 counts corresponds to a 0 to 10 000mV input signal Therefore the default input voltage gain is 10 and offset is O In current mode the input channel A D range of 0 to 500 counts corresponds to a 0 to 20 000u A input signal for a gain of 40 and an offset of 0 Input Channel Formula AI A D count x Default Gain Offset Table 7 4 Input Channel Gain and Offset Fixed Gain Range Default Gain Default Converter Input A D Converter AI Converter Offset Point Voltage Mode 0 10 000mV E 1 000 counts 0 32 000 Current Mode 0 20 000 0 500 counts 0 32 000 Current Mode 4 20 000 ET 100 500counts __0 32 000 1065 For the output channel the D A range of 0 to 4 000 corresponds to a range of 0 32 000 in AQ giving a gain of 0 125 and an offset of 0 for both modes The values for the D A converter are fixed The output channel D A range of 0 to 4 000 counts corresponds to 0 to 10 000mV in voltage mode and to 0 to 20 000 in current mode Therefore the default output voltage gain is 2 5 and current gain is 5 leaving offsets of 0 for both modes Output Channel Formula D A count x Default Gain Offset Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 9 Table 7 5 Default Output Channel Calibration Values Mode Fixed Gain Range Range Default Gain Default Converter Output D A Converter AQ Converter Offset Point Voltage Mode 0 10 000mV
229. input device is connected between the positive power bus and the input terminal The negative bus is connected to the input circuit common Input Points Negative Logic Characteristics e Equivalent to IEC source inputs e Source current through the input device to the user common or positive power bus e The input device is connected between the negative power bus and the input terminal The positive bus is connected to the input circuit common 2845705 IEC source in 4 1 Output Points Positive Logic Characteristics e Equivalent to IEC source output points e Source current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The load is connected between the negative power bus and the module output Output Points Negative Logic Characteristics e Equivalent to IEC sink outputs e Sink current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus e The load is connected between the positive power bus and the output terminal Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 a45707 42 4V Output IEC source 2 _ Toy Seon IEC I source 24V in GFK 1065F Interface Specifications Input output and power supply characteristics are listed below for each Series 90 Micro PLC model Refer to the pages listed for detailed specifications for the type of input or output and to the field wiring diagrams for each model Model Summaries
230. inside the cable connector to be mounted on the PLC Do not use terminal i i female strips or other types of connectors along the length of To other devices the transmission line Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop Terminate the RD B signal Terminate connection on first and last drops only only at end of multidrop cable On the CMM install jumper to connect internal 120 ohm resistor On the Isolated Repeater Converter install 150 ohm resistor supplied On the CMM311 only Port 2 can support RS 422 RS 485 Figure D 17 Cable B Brick to Slaves without Flow Control GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 23 Shielded Make connections twisted Inside D connectors pairs Isolated repeater Converter Brick NOTE When wiring RS 422 485 multidrop cables reflections on the transmission line can be reduced by configuring the cable in a daisy chain fashion as shown below Brick Slave 1 Slave 3 Slave 2 To other devices Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop Last device must be terminated Necessary connections should be made inside the cable connector to be mounted on the PLC Do not use terminal strips or other types of connectors along the length of the transmission line Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin
231. ipment The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC added flexibility to the system and was a perfect fit for standardization The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as the Series 9030 PLC which was already being used This saved the cost of purchasing and learning new programming equipment The Series 90 Micro PLC continuously cycles outputs that actuate solenoids which allow compressed air to clean Air Tank the filter socks Compressed i a Filter GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories 5 Commercial Laundry Industry H 6 Garment Storage Rail Control The Need A control system was needed to replace a custom built PC board that was costly to maintain The control system must be able to accurately drive the advancement of two garment storage rails and track the number of garments on each rail The storage systems include 30 to 40 rails each with 400 to 500 garments The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was used because it features builtin 5KHz high speed counters The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC uses the same programming hardware and software as the Series 9030 PLC which was already being used This saved the cost of learning and purchasing new programming equipment Also eliminating the high support costs associated with the custombuilt board provided significant cost savings Sensor Garment Storage Rail EH RAY Hanger
232. ires into any given terminal should be of the same type and size e Use copper conductors rated for 75 C 167 F for all wiring You use one AWG 14 2 1 mm2 conductor or two smaller conductors AWG 16 1 3 through AWG 20 0 36mm2 per terminal The suggested torque for the terminal connections is 5 in lbs 5 76 kg cm 4 20 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F General Wiring Procedures The following procedures should be followed when routing and connecting field wiring from user devices to the Series 90 Micro PLC inputs and outputs Figures 4 11 through 4 15 provide wiring information for connecting user supplied input and output devices and power sources for the Series 90 Micro PLCs e Turn off power to the Series 90 Micro PLC before connecting field wiring e low level signal wires should be run separately from other field wiring e AC power wiring should be run separately from DC field wiring e Field wiring should not be routed close to any device that could be a potential source of electrical interference e Jf severe noise problems are present additional power supply filtering or an isolation transformer may be required e Ensure that proper grounding procedures are followed to minimize potential safety hazards to personnel abelall wires to and from I O devices Note All DC inputs can be connected as either positive or negative logic In the following field wi
233. is configured using the Series 90 30 and 90 20 Hand Held Programmer or the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function Many features can also be configured from an application program using the COMM function block Type A Counters A type A counter accepts a count input that increments a 16 bit accumulator It also accepts a preload strobe input that can either preload the counter accumulator with a user defined value PRELOAD mode or strobe the accumulator STROBE mode into a 16 bit register The four type A counters provide 15 words of 6AI data or 16 bits of I data to the PLC They receive 16 bits of Q data from the PLC Each counter has two discrete inputs and one discrete output Type B Counter The type B counter provides an AQUADB counting function An AQUADB input consists of two signals designated A and B A count occurs for each transition of either A or B The counter uses the phase relationship between A and B to determine count direction DC Output IC693UDR005 010 UAL006 The high speed DC output 01 can be configured for PWM pulse train or HSC output Counter channel 1 can be configured for only one of these outputs at a time Because AQUADB counting uses channels 1 3 the PWM and pulse train outputs are not available when a type B counter is configured PWM Output The frequency of the PWM output 19hz to 2Khz is selected by writing a value to memory location 2 A PWM duty ratio th
234. ise indicated Use the Block Move BLKMV function to move these values to the Register tables see the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 for information on using the BLKMV and COMM_REQ functions Table 6 7 Command Block for Data Commands 0001 0004 Always 0004 for this HSC application 0002 don t care Not used Always zero Micro PLC ignores the WAIT flag for all COMM_REQ functions 0003 don t care Not used 0004 don t care Not used ROOOS don t care Not used 0006 don t care Not used 0007 don t care Not used 0008 don t care Not used 0009 0008 Data type 8 registers 0010 000 Start location of Command word 1 96R0011 ROOI1 nnnn Command word See Table 6 8 Table 6 9 0012 nnnn LS data word 0013 nnnn MS data word not used by Micro PLC The command block can be placed in any word oriented area of memory that is not reserved Table 6 8 lists the Data Command words for type A counters Table 6 9 lists the Data Command words for type B counters Following the tables are descriptions of each command 6 34 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 6 8 Data Commands Type A Counter ae 88 Command Name Hexadecimal Load Accumulator n Load Acc n Increment Set Cntr n Direction Load Timebase n Load ON Preset n Load OFF Preset n Counter 14 The bytes in the command word are always treated
235. isplayed WRITE OK lt S At this point the program can be put into RUN mode 4 Toreturn to the program edit mode press the Ent key GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 7 Storing Configuration and Register Data Using the HHP Because the user program is stored in non volatile flash memory only one copy is maintained even after you invoke the Write to EEPROM FLASH function in Logicmaster 90 or using the HHP However separate copies of the user configuration and reference tables are maintained in the EEPROM FLASH areas of the flash memory The configuration entry Cfg From see table on page 5 2 determines only whether the user configuration is obtained from RAM or PROM The user program is always read from flash PROM memory To store the configuration and register data 1 From the END OF PROGRAM screen press the key see steps 1 and 2 above 2 Press the key until the following screen appears WRITE PROM lt S CFG REG ONLY 3 Press the Enr key This will store the configuration and register data only Program data will not be stored When the store operation is complete the WRITE OK screen will be displayed 4 To return to the edit mode press the Ent key Other HHP Functions Note If the Micro PLC is configured with powerup diagnostics disabled it will ignore all HHP key sequences when powering up Disabling powerup diagnostics for the Micro PLC is not recommended Clearing User
236. it resolution equivalent Installation is made easy through DIN rail mounting and Phoenix European style wiring terminals CALEX signal conditioners are available in Current In Current Out Voltage In Voltage Out and J type Thermocouple units The unit has space requirements of approximately 1 65 inches 42mm high 1 06 inches 27mm wide and 3 78 inches 96mm long The signal conditioning unit weighs only 3 ounces 85 grams A user wants to use one analog input channel and one analog output channel to control flow rate The analog input channel is used to determine fluid level and the analog output channel to control a positioning valve that varies flow rate into a tank The user would also like to scale the output so that a one to one relationship exists between the value entered and the frequency sent out to the Frequency to Analog converter The Series 90 Micro PWM and pulse train PT frequencies are varied by entering values into the 2 AQ123 registers respectively The frequency that is output has an inverse relationship to the value entered in the register That is the lower the value placed in the AQ register the higher the frequency sent out For example the PWM output will be set to the maximum frequency of 2khz for a decimal value of 614 written into the AQ2 register and 20hz for a decimal value of 61439 For sample calculations of PWM and PT frequencies see Configuring Q1 for PWM or Pulse Output in Chapter 5 N
237. ithout error Example 9610001 00001 In this example when the enabling input 10001 is on SVCREQ function CONST number 35 is called with the 00035 parameter block starting at 0001 0001 Output coil 00001 is set on if the operation succeeds Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 7 6 SVCREQ 35 Parameter Block Password 4143H address Password LB 424CH Select Control AI Ch 1 Vol 0 last 1 new 2 default 3 factory address 3 Input Channel 1 Meter High Value Voltage address 6 Input Channel 1 8 High Value Current address 9 Input Channel 1 Meter Low Value Current address 12 Select Control AI Ch 2 Vol 0 last 1 new 2 default 3 factory address 13 Input Channel 2 9 Low Value Voltage address 15 Select Control AI Ch 2 Cur 0 last 1 new 2 default 3 factory address 18 Input Channel 2 Meter High Value Current address 21 Output Channel 1 12 High Value Voltage address 24 Output Channel 1 Meter Low Value Voltage address 27 Output Channel 1 Meter High Value Current address 31 GFK 1065F Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 13 7 14 Notes Password Password is set to No calibration operation will be allowed without the correct password If an invalid password is provided the service request will return error 3 in the status word Destination Control Determines whether to write the calibration constants in flash mem
238. itions Analog I O expansion units 5 26 for Micro PLC Port 2 5 13 Passwords changing 8 14 overview 8 13 Phone numbers GE Fanuc Automation 9 9 Asia Pacific Operations 3 15 Pinouts expansion port 3 19 serial port D 6 isolated repeater converter Micro PLC serial D 4 Miniconverter F 10 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter E 5 Workmaster RS 232 port D 5 PLC sweep software structure 8 6 summary 8 1 when in STOP mode 8 5 Point to point connections RS 232 D 7 RS 422 D 11 Port 2 task id 5 18 Ports RS 422 described pinouts D 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 PLC configuration 0 3 Positive logic input points 4 1 MIEL Potentiometers input settings 8 17 input Power cycle effect on PLC operation 8 9 Power requirements AC IC693UAA003 IC693UAA007 IC693UDRO001 2 18 1 69300 005 IC693UEX011 DC IC693UDD104 4 4 IC693UDR002 IC693UDR010 Power supply 24 VDC output specifications 4 14 input wiring to 4 20 Power supply board overview 2 13 Power down conditions 8 8 Powerup defaults for 6 20 Powerup self test LED blink error codes normal powerup sequence Powerup NA 7 Powerup times with diagnostics disabled 3 7 Preload value configuring for A counter configuring for B counter 6 33 effect on Preload flag type A counters type B counters 6 19 Privilege
239. itions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master Field Control Modelmaster Series One CIMPLICITY GEnet PowerMotion Series Six CIMPLICITY Control Ge
240. l Port and Cables D 7 LE 6 N33M138 v GALNAWATdWI SI 214 IHL LY GY NOILVNINHAL FHL 14119946901 ANY 16 42 6921 SHAGWNN 901V1VO 8214 02 06 531035 NOlLd30X3 ONIMOT104 JHL 113 5 0 91 JHL AGISNI 01 Nid 6 Nid N33M138 YAdWAL V ONILO3NNOO SLONGOUd 214 06 531935 FHL 3QVW SI NOILYNINYAL 5 SANIT 3HL 30 FHL LY SLINN NO AINO Q3193NNOO 38 OL 1 915 VLVG 3A1393Y FHL 3ONVISIS3H NOLLVNIWH3L xx 7828005 TVN831X3 38 LSNW NOILO3NNOO dOUGILINW SU313W 1334 0 QNOA38 3028005 H3MOd H3183ANOO ATNO SU313N 1334 01 NOLLO3NNOO LNIOd OL LNIOd 804 328005 H3MOd x 1HOd 1HOd S8v SH cec Sd 31VW33 31VW33 31VW33 Nid S4 Nid S2 9 Nid S2 Nid S2 04 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 o 00 00 0 M o 00 00 1808 0 9 0 0 0 60 5 0 6 0 0 0 05 o 00 00 0 0 0 0 II H3lSV DIHOM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D o 00 00 0 2 0 0 0 Nid Sulvd 00622706921 Sulvd 3 13 9 Q3Q13lHS 03151 1 262 5 2209 58 S85 Su 2 z Su 1N31VAInO3 HO 50218 00699 Connection to Series 90 PLCs in Seria Figure 0 4 Workmaster 25 GFK 1065F Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 D 8 LE 6 Nid M1389 YAdWAP V A8
241. l and circuit specifications for the HSCs refer to Chapter 4 The HSCs are configured using the Series 90 30 20 Hand Held Programmer or the configuration function provided by the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software Many features can also be configured from the application program The HSC function can operate in one of two modes 4 four identical independent simple type A counters B1 3 4 one type B counter for A Quad B counting and one type A counter In either mode each counter can be enabled independently Type A counters can be configured for up or down counting default is up and for positive or negative edge detection default is positive The HSCs run independently of the PLC logic If the PLC is in STOP mode outputs that are configured for HSC operation can be configured to operate in one of three failure modes described on page 6 7 Type A counter operation is described on page 6 8 and type B counter operation is described on page 6 14 Warning When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode the HSCs will continue to operate Also the HSCs will remain in run mode through a power cycle Therefore if an HSC is running when power is lost it will run when power is restored GFK 1065F 6 1 Table 6 1 High Speed Counter Terminal Assignments A4 Configuration B1 3 A4 Configuration Count 1 B counter Phase 1 Preload Strobe 1 Not used Count 2 B counter Phase 2 Preload Strobe 2 Not used Count 3 Not used
242. l not allow you to set incompatible limits If aCOMM_REQ sets new limits that are incompatible they will be rejected and the old limits retained In this case a counter limit error code will be returned To avoid this situation when the limits are changed one at a time a good rule to follow is always move the high limit first when shifting the limits up and always move the low limit first when shifting them down The limit range for both Type A and Type B counters is 32 768 to 32 767 Output Preset Points Each counter output has a preset ON and OFF point which must be located between the Hi and Lo limits The output state indicates when the Accumulator value is between the ON and OFF Preset points For example a43003 COUNTS MU OFF PRESET VALUE ON PRESET VALUE CORRESPONDING ON OUTPUT rt TL Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 11 If the output is enabled for the HSC channel being used the output will turn on in accordance with the following table Preset closest to low limit Output ON Output OFF ON gt ON Preset gt OFF Preset lt OFF Preset lt ON Preset lt OFF Preset lt ON Preset gt ON Preset gt OFF Preset As the following example shows the output can be either on or off when the Accumulator value lies between the Preset points On Off Preset 1 Preset 1 Off On Preset 1 Preset 1 ZEE _ Increasing Counts Note If your program
243. liability of the Series 90 Micro PLC improved equipment performance and cost efficiency Series 90 30 PLC CIMPLICITY InTouch RS422 LAN Each Series 90 Micro PLC controls a tank and is also connected to the master Series 90 30 PLC for override control Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Water Flow Control The Need A control system that includes analog and discrete I O was needed to monitor and control water flow through a treatment facility Remote well sites are required to operate independently as well as receive override control from a master PLC site via RF modem or short haul modem The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen to be used with the Series 9030 PLC and CIMPLICITY InTouch and HMI software because of its compatibility and small footprint The system was able to use DataLinc Group modems and it was easy to program the logic The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC and other GE Fanuc products are proven to be very reliable and interface well with each other Water Management Office The master Series 90 30 PLC collects data from the remote Series 90 Micro PLCs and sends it to the CIMPLICITY system which has overriding control of the system Modem GFK 1065F Remote Pu
244. listed below are only for the output points on the AC In AC Out Micro PLCs IC693UAA003 UAA007 You can easily access these fuses by removing the PLC front cover There are no user replaceable parts in the DC In Relay Out Micro PLCs Table 3 3 List of Fuses for AC In AC Out I O Boards Micro PLC Output Points Controlled 1 693 003 IC693UAA007 FUSE 1 Q1 Q2 FUSE 2 Q3 Q6 IC693UAA007 FUSE 3 07 08 FUSE 4 09 012 Table 3 4 Fuse Specifications Current Rating Catalog Number Available From GE Fanuc 1 693 001 GE Fanuc Automation N A Inc Asia Pacific Operations 5 package No 1 Teban Gardens Crescent Jurong Singapore 608919 Phone 65 566 9902 or 65 566 4918 Fax 011 65 567 1856 or 011 65 566 7703 Third Party Daito HM32 See Distributors below Distributors U S A MHOTRONICS Inc Phone 847 913 960 Corporate Woods Parkway 9566 Vernon Hills IL 60061 Fax 847 913 9587 Europe OESS Gmbll Frankfurt Office Phone 6106 Senefelder Street 1 750313 63110 Rodgau Germany Fax 6106 72719 Singapore B B S Electronics PTE LTD Phone 748 8400 1 Genting Link 05 03 Fax 748 8466 Perfecindustrial Building Singapore 1334 GFK 1065F Chapter 3 Installation 3 15 Expansion Unit Installation The 23 point Micro PLCs support the Series 90 Micro Expansion Units IC693UEX01 1 Generic third party expansion units and the I O Link Interface unit IC693UEX013 Up to four expansion units can be c
245. lity with Series 9030 PLC programming e 28ypoint model has two communication ports e Pulse width modulation on DC output models e Pulse catch outputs on DC output models Operator Interface Unit Pushbutton Station The Series 90 Micro PLC measures the length of the pipe using input from the encoder and displays the length on the operator interface unit GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 7 8 Entertainment Industry Nightclub Entertainment The Need A pushbutton control system that allows a disc jockey to vary the sequence of blinking lights for a disco display was needed The display consists of ten blinking lights in an adjustable timed sequence The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC and a pushbutton assembly were used The PLC was used because of its size ease of installation and programmability The analog potentiometers on the Series 90 Micro PLC allow the time base to be easily adjusted The Benefits Considerable cost savings were gained due to reduced labor because the Series 90 Micro PLC was easily installed Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F General Purpose Machinery Automated Picture Frame Stapler The Need A compact robust control system was needed for a new machine to simplify the stapling process in the construction of picture frames The Solution A 28 point Series 90 Micro PLC was used because of the high level of support that GE Fan
246. livolt GFK 1065F D 1 5 Cable and Connector Specifications The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure For best performance construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and specifications Table D 2 Connector Cable Specifications Series 90 PLC Serial RS 422 port with metric hardware Connector 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA15S solder pot Hood AMP 207470 1 connector shell Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips Workmaster II Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Mating Connector 25 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DB25S solder pot with Connectors DB110963 3 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector Workmaster Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Connector 9 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DE9S solder pot with DE110963 1 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector IBM AT XT Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Connector 9 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DE9S solder pot with DE110963 31 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector RS 232 RS 485 Converter one 15 pin male and one 25 pin male connector 15 pin male connector requires metric hardware same connector hood and hardware as for Series 90 PLC listed above 25 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA25S solder pot with DB110963 3 hood or equivale
247. lly used in RUN mode usually about 50 ms per window GFK 1065F Chapter 8 System Operation 8 5 Software Structure The Series 90 software structure supports program execution and basic housekeeping tasks such as diagnostic routines input output scanners and alarm processing The operating system also contains routines to communicate with the programmer these routines provide for the uploading and downloading of application programs return of status information and control of the PLC The application user logic program which controls the end process to which the PLC is applied is called a control program Program Structure Each control program is comprised of a single program block This includes the user program and some system overhead The program block must be less than or equal to 3K words 14 point units or 6K words 23 point and 28 point units Data Structure The Series 90 Micro PLC has nine data memories each designed for a specific purpose The following table lists these memories For a list of reserved memory addresses see Appendix B Table 8 2 Memory Data Types Discrete Input 1 bit Discrete Output 0 bit Discrete User Internals bit Discrete Temporaries T bit Discrete System S bit Discrete Global G bit Register PR word Analog Input word Analog Output AQ word Note The symbol is used to distinguish machine references from nicknames and is only used with Logicmaster 90 Table 8 3
248. lses to be output is selected by writing a value to memory location e g AQ124 The pulse train is started when the e g 0494 bit is set to 1 by the ladder logic program Starting the pulse train clears for example 1494 When the number of pulses specified in AQ124 has been generated the 1494 bit will be set to 1 and Q494 will be cleared For sample pulse train frequency calculations refer to the table shown below When the Micro PLC goes from RUN to STOP mode Pulse Train Output will continue to operate Also Pulse Train Output will continue to operate over a power cycle Therefore if Pulse Train Output is running when power is lost it will run when power is restored Table 5 20 Example Values for Pulse Output Frequency er Frequency Hz Formulas 1 Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers Enter them as hex or as two s complement 2 0123 9 84 MHz frequency 16 1 Frequency tolerance is 0 01 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 43 Chapter High Speed Counters 6 The Series 90 Micro PLC has four built in high speed counters HSCs Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 5KHz for industrial control applications such as meter proving turbine flowmeter velocity measurement material handling motion control and process control This chapter describes the features operation and configuration of the HSCs For electrica
249. ly Figure F 1 Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 GFK 1065F Appendix F Cable Data Sheets F 3 IC690CBL701 Workmaster PC XT to RS 485 RS 232 Converter Cable This cable provides RS 232 signal connections between the RS 485 RS 232 converter IC690ACC901 and a serial port on a Workmaster computer or IBM XT or equivalent PC Table F 3 Cable Specifications 690 1701 Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature type 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 9 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205203 1 or equivalent Cable Clamps 25 pin AMP 207908 7 or equivalent 9 pin AMP 207908 1 or equivalent Cable Type Six conductor overall shield non paired AWG 24 21 mm2 Belden 9536 or equivalent 42831 WORKMASTER OR IBM PC XT 9 PIN 9 PIN 25 25 FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE Figure F 2 Converter to Workmaster or PC XT Serial Cable F 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F IC690CBL702 PC AT to RS 485 RS 232 Converter Cable This cable provides RTS 232 signal connections between the RS 485 RS 232 converter IC690ACC901 and a serial port on an IBM PC AT or equivalent PC Table F 4 Cable Specifications 690 1702 Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Connectors PCM ADC CMM Side 25 pin male D subminiature type 205208 1 or equivalent Programmer Side 9 pin male D subminiature type AMP 205203 1 or equivalent Cable
250. mately 100 years after the clock begins timing Because the elapsed time clock provides the base for system software operations and timer function blocks it cannot be reset from the user program or the programmer However the application program can read the current value of the elapsed time clock by using Function Number 16 of the SVC_REQ function Time of Day Clock 23 and 28 Point Micro PLCs This clock maintains the current time and date in 28 point Micro PLCs These settings can be displayed and changed using the CPU configuration function in the Logicmaster 90 software You can also use the SVCREQ function number 7 within a Logicmaster 90 program to read and set the time of day clock in the Micro PLC Refer to the Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 4067 for information on using the SVCREQ instruction Watchdog Timer The Watchdog Timer in the Micro PLC is designed to catch catastrophic failure conditions The timer value for the Watchdog Timer is 200 milliseconds this is a fixed value which cannot be changed The Watchdog Timer starts from zero at the beginning of each sweep If the Watchdog timeout value is exceeded the CPU goes through its power up sequence and the PLC is left in STOP FAULT mode with a Watchdog Timer fault recorded To achieve a watchdog timeout value greater than 200ms which the Micro PLC requires the watchdog function is implemented as a two step process Because the watchdog time
251. mmunications User s Manual GFK 0582 Note In communications logic using COMM_REQ function blocks you should use the following parameters SYS ID should be 0001 for Rack 0 Slot 1 TASK ID should be 20 14H for Micro PLC Port 2 Programmer Logicmaster 90 software or HHP L Port 1 Port 2 Additional PLCs up to eight per master more with a repeater le dE Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port2 Additional PLCs up to eight per master more with a repeater Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Additional PLCs up to eight per master more with a repeater Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Additional PLCs up to eight per master 23 or 28 point Micro PLCs more with a repeater Rel 3 00 or later Figure D 19 Sample Micro PLC Network GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 25 Appendix Converters E This appendix provides detailed descriptions of the following converters M RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 8 E 2 E Minicom verter Kits POE fa O a Steve eee oue E edo E 9 Isolated Repeater Converter uer ener re rer pet E 13 GFK 1065F 1 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter E 2 Features Functions This section provides a detailed description of the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter IC690ACC900 for the Series 90 Programmable Logic Controllers e Provides the Series 90 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS 2
252. mounted on the PLC Do use terminal strips or other types l of connectors along the length of the isai To Other PLCs transmission line Maximum of 8 PLCs on a multidrop a more with a repeater Termination resistance for the RECEIVE DATA RD signal 15 needed only on units at the ends of the lines This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771 the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by placing a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 Ground potential Multiple units that are not connected to the same power source must have ground potential within 7V for proper operation of this system Failure to provide a common ground may cause damage to PLC components Figure D 9 WSI Multidrop Cabling to Series 90 PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F 0 91 uod eor Su Sd 06 06 59195 uonels ise aye 91 uod 22r Su 02 06 531935 5 01578 oocococooooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 c c 18 6 si jo 1994014 10 punos6 10 punos6 uow
253. mping Station Remote Pumping Station The Series 90 Micro PLCs control the water flow at the remote sites and transfer process data to the master Series 90 30 PLC Appendix H Case Histories 23 Wire Manufacturing Industry 24 Quality Control The Need A control system was needed to replace a strip chart that plotted the number of quality defects per 100 feet of wire produced The data is used to correlate the quality of the wire to the process variables temperature and speed The correlation will be used to achieve a level of Six Sigma Quality The Solution A system consisting of two Series 90 Micro PLCs and CIMPLICITY software was installed to interface with the existing Series 9030 PLC The Series 90 Micro PLCs collect quality data the Series 9030 PLC collects process variable data and the CIMPLICITY software correlates trends and analyzes the data The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because of its cost effectiveness The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC automated the data transfer process so that the manual data retrieval and analysis associated with the strip chart was eliminated The compact size of the Series 90 Micro PLC was also a benefit to the system CIMPLICITY HMI with Minitab software correlates the quality data to the Process Variable Changes Series 90 Micro PLCs collect the Quality Data
254. mputing its counts timebase register data Example To change the timebase for counter 1 to 600 ms 258H load Command word 0106 LS data word 0258 Note The maximum range of the counts timebase register is 32767 and 32768 counts The length of the timebase and the maximum count frequency should be coordinated so that these limits are not exceeded The indication will roll over from to or to if exceeded Load ON Preset Command Code Load OFF Preset Command Code 15H Used to set up the output turn on off points within the counter range Example To set counter 1 output to turn on at 5000 1388H counts load Command word 010B LS data word 1388 and off at 12000 2 counts load Command word 0115 LS data word 2EEO Load Preload Command Code 1FH Used to change the count value that will be loaded into the counter Accumulator when the preload input is activated Example To make counter 1 start at 9632 25 counts at its preload signal load Command word 011F LS data word 25A0 Example The COMM_REQ function is conditionally executed in the ladder logic to communicate a request to the HSC A sample ladder diagram for configuring the HSC function is provided in Figure 6 3 In this example the Accumulator for Counter 3 is loaded with 1234 Rung 4 uses a one shot coil 0002 to execute the COMM_REQ once This prevents multiple messages from being sent
255. n Logicmaster 90 press F2 to enter the configuration software To check the computer settings press F7 Programmer Mode and Setup and then F4 PLC Communications Serial Port Setup To check the PLC settings press F1 I O Configuration The PLC baud rate and parity will be displayed in the Software Configuration Screen e Broken cable between your computer and PLC or broken or missing RS 232 RS 422 converter For information on installing the converter refer to Appendix E in this manual 2 How do you set up the High Speed Counters HSCs Using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or a Hand Held Programmer HHP enable each HSC that you want to use If you want the HSC to drive an output you must enable its output in the software configuration and set its Enable Output bit in your program or in the data tables For example if HSC 1 is configured with its output enabled and its Output Enable bit 06505 is set it will control Q1 HSC 1 will continually report to the CPU memory location AI06 A sample rung that sets the Output Enable bit for HSC 1 is shown below FST SCN 550001 tt f MOVE_ BIT IN 0 500505 LEN 00003 For more information refer to High Speed Counter CPU Interface in Chapter 6 of this manual Simple A type counters and A Quad B B type HSCs count continuously by default resetting themselves automatically when a high or low limit is reached A type HSCs can
256. n how these parameters control operation of B type counters refer to page 6 16 ee __ SERIES 30 SOFTE CORE LGLBAT LOM Catalog RIE MUCH ZAFT OCI BLT nc P3 TYPE HB 1 3 Ceumi Hadie CONTI Count Esahl Enable DISABLED Tet Dir UF Pid strobe TRELOGP Plur Oot al DALE Tim 1000 Count Edge FOS Pol ut gt 01 DISABLED Strate Edge POE Count Fig AQUADE Hi Linit i Lo umo Pid Freset o c 32757 Preoct 1 0 u 44 Fore Config Data Exists Pam fur Heut lage Flp for Fage 92 gt LAPP Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Hand Held Programmer If you have just configured the Series 90 Micro PLC parameters using the Hand Held Programmer see Chapter 5 all you need to do is press the J key to go to the slot assigned to HSC For details on how these parameters control operation of A type counters refer to page 6 9 for B type counters refer to page 6 16 Note The Series 90 Micro PLC functions are assigned to rack and slot locations corresponding to those in the Series 90 30 PLCs The Series 90 Micro PLC system is always in rack 0 and its HSC functions are in slot 4 Configuration Screens Common to A4 and B1 3A4 Configurations The following series of screens shows the parameters common to both counter types i
257. n in Figure 4 5 In addition relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The 1A 100V diode shown in the typical DC load suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4934 Table 4 4 Typical Contact Life Current Voltage Resistive Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations a45664 Series 90 WS AC Loads Micro PLC Y TY I CYY Y 1A 100V 022 Uf 100 Relay gt Relay Output Output C Com _________ AC Source DC Supply Figure 4 5 Suppression Circuits Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 High Speed Counter Outputs IC693UDR001 002 005 IC693UAL006 Micro PLC outputs Q1 through Q8 can be configured to be controlled by the HSC function HSC output for Q1 can not be enabled if it is being used as a PWM or pulse train output Unused HSC outputs can be used as standard relay outputs Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs DC Outputs IC693UDR005 010 and IC693UAL006 The DC output circuit Q1 can be configured to provide High Speed Counter pulse train or PWM output Table 4 5 Specifications for DC Output Circuit Operating Voltage 24VDC 12VDC 5VDC Voltage Range 24 VDC 42096 79 Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0 75 at 24 VDC Maximum Resistive Load Rating 0 75A at 24 VDC 0 5A at 12 VDC 0 25A at 5 VDC Output Vol
258. n the HSC Press the key to toggle the screen display then press the ENT key to record the value If you change your mind about a parameter press the CLR key instead of ENT to recall the original value To get to the next screen in the series press the key To back up to previous parameters screens press the lt key Screen numbers correspond to numbers listed in Tables 6 4 through 6 6 Screen 1 Counter Type RO 04 HSC lt 5 CNTR TYPE ALL A Press the key to select the type of counter then press the ENT key The CLR key before ENT is pressed will cancel the operation Screen 2 Output Default Module Failure Mode RO 04 HSC lt 5 FAIL This screen selects the state that the outputs assume if the PLC goes to STOP mode GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 27 6 28 A4 Counter Specific Screens The following screens will be displayed when ALL A is selected in Screen 1 Screens 3 18 31 44 Counter Enable These screens enable or disable the specified counter Each counter enabled will use certain portions of PLC reference memory and PLC input and output resources If is set to ENABLE CTRx_ DISABLE screens 4 15 will appear or 19 30 for counter number 2 32 43 for counter number 3 and 45 56 for counter number 4 20 04 HSC lt 5 Screens 4 19 32 45 Count Output Enable Note If the configured Series 90 Micro PLC is a DC IN DC OUT type this
259. n the counter is at the limit counts in the opposite direction will count it back off the limit In either mode when the counter is at the limit counts in the opposite direction will count it back off the limit This parameter must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP it cannot be changed by a COMM REQ Count Direction Each A type counter can be configured to count either up the Accumulator increments for each count received or down the accumulator decrements for each count The default is up Strobe Count Edge For A type counters Strobe and Count inputs are edge sensitive Each Strobe and Count input on the module can be individually configured to have either the positive or the negative edge active By default they are positive edge sensitive These parameters must be set by the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP they cannot be changed by a COMM REQ Positive default A count occurs on a positive to negative transition Negative A count occurs on a negative to positive transition Counter Time Base For each counter the time base represents a span of time that can be used to measure the rate of counting For example the program could be required to monitor the number of count pulses that occur during a 30 second interval A timebase from 10 msec to 65535 msec can be selected for each counter The counter timebase is set to 1 second 1000 msec by default The module stores the number of counts that occurred
260. nd registers with Command word 0101 LS data word 2211 Load Hi Limit Command Code 02H Load Lo Limit Load Acc Increment Command Code 03H Used to set the Hi and Lo limits to any value within the counter range Example To change the upper limit of counter 1 to 1690 4240H load registers with Command word 0103 LS data word 4240 Note If the limits are loaded in the wrong order they could be rejected and cause an error flag to be set To avoid this remember to always move the Lo Limit first when shifting the limits down or the Hi Limit first when shifting the limits up Also if the new value of the Hi Lo limit is out of range with the current Accumulator value the load operation will be rejected It is only successful if all parameters including the current Accumulator Value are within the new Hi Lo range Command Code 04H Used to offset a counter Accumulator by a small number of counts up to 127 or 128 Example To offset counter 1 by 9 counts load Command word 0104 LS data word 0009 This can be done at any time even while the counter is counting at maximum rate If the offset causes the counter to exceed its limits this parameter will be rejected If a count is received at the same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value the count will be lost GFK 1065F Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 37 Load Timebase Command Code 06H Used to change the time interval referenced by the counter when co
261. ndex Low limit configuring for A counters configuring for B counter 6 32 Manual revisions vii Master slave networks Micro PLCs various devices D 18 Maximum Inrush Current 4 13 Maximum Load 4 13 Memory clearing 5 8 Memory allocation 2 20 Memory size B 2 Micro PLC functional description 2 4 specifications general 2 15 Miniconverter kit cable diagrams description RS 422 SNP to 5 329 system configurations Minimum hardware requirements 3 1 Modem Hayes compatible 5 21 Multidrop installations general PLC PLC programmer to PLC D 12 with isolated repeater converter Negative logic input points output points 4 2 Noise suppression AC output 4 18 0 OEM protection 8 14 Off preset configuring for A counter configuring for counter 6 32 type A counters type B counter OFF state leakage 4 13 On preset configuring for A counters configuring for counter 6 32 type A counters Index 5 Index Index 6 type B counter 6 18 Operating parameters type A counter 6 9 type B counter Optical isolation Ordering information fuse kits 3 15 Output circuit protection 4 11 Output circuits described 2 8 specifications 4 10 4 12 Output preset points type A counters type B counter Output scan 8 4 Output Voltage Drop 4 13 Outputs DC configuring PWM and Pulse Train 5 35 selecting with HHP 6 30 p Pager enunciation See ASCII output Parameter defin
262. neric Expansion Units sess 5 31 Configuring Standard Expansion Units sese 5 32 Configuring I O Link Interface Expansion Units eene 5 33 Reference 5 34 Configuring Q1 for PWM or Pulse Output IC693UDR005 010 IC693U AL006 5 35 GFK 1065F Contents xiii Contents Chapter 6 xiv PWM Output eel beret eS ete t tet tet e 5 36 Pulse Train oct pt ere t LL ERR RE CHA ESL aped toc eee Egone 5 38 Configuring of Outputs Q1 to Q5 IC693UDD104 eene 5 39 PWM Output IC693UDD1094 5 40 Sample Calculation for PWM Output sese 5 42 Pulse Output IC693UDD104 esses eene nnne a EEEE 5 43 High Speed Counters 225222 su rubros seba rasis O L High Speed Counter CPU 6 3 ERA 6 3 Counts per Timebase Resister asero i eene enne enne 6 3 Preload Registet ure ee Ete RES n epe eet e SE bee 6 3 Strobe Registetz iiec rete REP RI p I err UE eR Ceo 6 4 Data Automatically Sent by the HSC essere 6 4 Analog Input 2 44422222 1 0 0 6 4 Hi
263. ngle communication path between the host and the slave devices Appendix E Converters E 19 Cable Diagrams The cable diagrams below are referred to as Cables A E from the system configurations in the previous figures These diagrams show the principles for constructing your own cables and can be modified to fit your specific application 44929 J2 SW ON 0 0 0 05 09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Series 90 00 Oo Isolated 0 CMM o9 09 Repeater 00 o9 Og Converter o9 Port 0 0 Brick 0 0 0 0 1or2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 0 0 0 25 25 25 25 Female Male Male Female Figure E 15 Cable A RS 232 CMM To Converter 244930 J2 SW ON 0 9 16 0 0 09 21 17 00 00 13 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 14 0 0 0 0 Series 90 00 12 19 0 Isolated 0 CMM o9 24 18 0o Repeater 00 09 0o Converter 00 Port 0 10 0 0 Brick 0 0 11 12 0 0 10 2 0 0 0 0 0 22 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 25 pin 25 pin 25 pin 25 pin Female Male ale Female Terminate connection On the CMM Install jumper to connect internal 120 ohm resistor On the isolated repeater converter install 150 ohm resistor supplied Figure E 16 Cable B RS 422 CMM To Converter E 20 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F SUBSTITUTE APPROPRIATE UP STREAM DEVICE WITHIN DOTTED BOX PER SYSTEM DIAGRAMS SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS
264. nius ProLoop Series Three CIMPLICITY PowerTRAC Genius PowerTRAC PROMACRO VuMaster CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Helpmate Series Five Workmaster CIMSTAR Logicmaster Series 90 Copyright 1994 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved RFI Standards The Series 90 Micro PLCs have been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule Part 15 Subpart J The Federal Communications Commission FCC requires the following note to be published according to FCC guidelines Note This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of Communications Note apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications 1065 iii This page was intentionally left blank for pagination purposes replace with a BLANK SHEET The following markings are required to appear in the Series 90 Micro PLC User s LISTED 8M89 E157515 C IND CONT EQ FOR HAZ LOC CLASS I GROUPS ABCD DIV 2 TEMP CODE T4A IS SUIT
265. nput the values seen in AI16 and AI17 will have some fluctuation The Micro PLC uses an averaging filter to stabilize these inputs The number of samples to be averaged is controlled by the value in as described in Analog Input Filtering in Chapter 8 Table 4 2 Potentiometer Analog Specifications For details see Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering in Chapter 8 Reference locations 6 7 Range 0 1023 per 34 turn Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F High Speed Counter Inputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UAL006 GFK 1065F The 24 VDC input positive negative logic circuits can be used as inputs for the High Speed Counter HSC function provided by the Series 90 Micro PLC These inputs can be connected either as positive or negative inputs as described in the DC input circuit section The maximum frequency for the HSC inputs is 5Khz The HSCs can be configured as four type A counters or as one type B counter and one type A counter Unused HSC inputs can be used as standard DC inputs Refer to Chapter 6 for input assignments Terminal Strip 5V a45687 CPU CPU Figure 4 2 High Speed Counter Circuit Negative Logic Connection 5V 245688 CPU Vo CPU Figure 4 3 High Speed Counter Circuit Positive Logic Connection Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 9 Relay Outputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UAL006 UEX011 These normally open relay outputs can control
266. nt standard RS 232 connector Computer grade 24 AWG 22 minimum with overall shield Catalog Numbers Belden 9505 Belden 9306 Belden 9832 These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19 2 Kbps as follows RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum cable length RS 422 RS 422 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum length Must not exceed the maximum RS 422 Common Mode specification of 7V to 7V Isolation at the remote end can be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages At shorter distances under 50 feet 15 meters almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cable will work as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly When using RS 422 RS 422 the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair If this is ignored cross talk resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of the communications system When routing communication cables outdoors transient suppression devices can be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment D 2 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Port Configurations Series 90 PLC Serial Port The Series 90 PLC serial port is compatible with RS 422 An RS 232 to RS 422 conve
267. nt to Point Connections D 7 RS 422 Point to Point ener enne D 11 Mu ltidrop 2 2 D 12 Programmer to Series 90 PLC Connections D 12 PLC to PLC Master Slave D 18 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter esses eene enne eene enne E 2 E E 2 CUOMS UIS Ett 2 Location am eee E 2 Installation eee ERE EE GARE I SINE E 3 Cable IDeseriptlon tecti er e ote act Pee LEER eee ste Dite doeet E 4 Pin Assignments ep ped epe tele qe adeps E 5 Logic Diagrati ete ree Ete a a oi Sete eet E 6 Jumper Configuration iere tee eoe ete phe int euo Pee endear dota E 7 Specifications sd eee ae e pee bie gere quee p dedo E 8 Miniconyerter Kit iiie UR PRIMER easiest E 9 Description of 9 Pin Assignments T ERE EE SE E 10 System Configurations cipe tete He eot c ede E 11 Cable Diagrams Point To Point E 11 Isolated rrt te D e ee 13 Lo
268. o PLC s high capacity for amperage allows the PLC to be directly wired to the coil of the motor starters Competing brands of micro PLCs did not offer this capability The Benefits Using the Series 90 Micro PLC eliminated the need for emergency maintenance callouts The decrease in overtime and downtime costs paid for the Series 90 Micro PLC in less than a month The Series 90 Micro PLC controls two alternating pumps as they pump water from the 90 ft deep basin Ground Level Outgoing Flow 90 Feet 7 Water Level Incoming Flow Wet Well Bottom of the Shaft GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 21 Wastewater Treatment 22 The Need The customer needed to replace an electromechanical control as part of the redesign of wastewater treatment equipment The system automatically adjusts treatment parameters in response to changes sensed in the influent It also permanently records all operational functions to provide information on every function of each cycle for whatever time reference desired This information is used to indicate if service or maintenance is needed so the operator can use preventive measures to stop failures The Solution Series 90 Micro PLCs were installed with a Series 9030 PLC and CIMPLICITY InTouch software The Series 90 Micro PLC was selected because it provides software compatibility with the Series 9030 PLC The Benefits The compact size and re
269. oard 2 4 The Micro PLC contains a CPU circuit board an I O board and a Power Supply board Figure 2 2 provides an overview of Micro PLC inputs and outputs and of the functions performed by each circuit board The CPU contains and executes the user program and communicates with the programmer HHP or computer running Logicmaster 90 30 90 20 Micro software The primary capabilities of the Micro PLC CPU hardware are listed in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 CPU Capabilities 14 Point Micro PLCs 23 and 28 Point Micro PLCs H8 3003 microprocessor running at 9 84Mhz Powerup reset circuit Interrupt for power fail warning 2 0 ms Internal Coils 1024 Four configurable 5Khz HSCs 512K x 8 sectored flash memory for operating 256K x 16 sectored flash memory for operating system and nonvolatile user program storage 3K system and nonvolatile user program storage 6K words of user flash memory words of user flash memory 32 Kbyte RAM backed by super cap provides data 64 Kbyte RAM backed by lithium battery retention for 3 4 days with the power off at 25 C Real time clock backed up by lithium battery Maximum User Program 3K words Maximum User Program 6K words Registers 256 words Registers 2K words Typical Scan Rate 1 8 ms K of logic Boolean Typical Scan Rate 1 0 ms K of logic Boolean contacts contacts An RS 422 serial port that supports SNP SNPX and Two RS 422 serial ports Port 1 supports SNP SNPX RTU Slave protocols slav
270. offers compact size builtin high speed counters and cost effectiveness Also it utilizes the same instruction set as the Series 9030 PLC which will allow easy expansion for added features The Series 90 Micro PLC uses sensor inputs to control a GE Variable Frequency Drive which has seven preselected speeds Together they provide a variety of motions that simulate those of a boxing opponent The Benefits The Series 90 Micro completed the tasks while saving both space and cost The Series 90 Micro PLC uses input from sensors on the bag to control the GE Variable Frequency Drive that determines the bag s motion Series 90 Micro PLC Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Tubing Manufacturing Industry Tube Bending The Need A control system was needed to automate a tube bending process which was being performed manually by sight with control relays The objective is to bend the tube to a specific angle which changes by order The Solution A 28 point Series 90 Micro PLC was used with an Operator Interface Terminal OIT and three encoders The Series 90 Micro PLC uses pulse width modulation to control the encoders for positioning and communicates with the operator via the OIT The operator uses the OIT to adjust the process speed The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC is much more accurate than the manual method and therefore material waste was significantly reduced Also setup time
271. ogic 10012 10016 M0005 Ji al 6 e System discretes S SA SB SC include system bits used internally by the CPU fault bits for holding system fault data and reserved bits for future system expansion Many of the fault bits are referenced by the application program to determine what faults exist in the Series 90 Micro PLC system Examples of these fault contacts are over sweep condition ov swp and low battery low bat The first scan contact fst scn also resides here Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on Fault bits e Transition bits are discrete memory locations used internally by the PLC when solving logic that involves transitional coils This data is not accessible to the user The PLC sets and resets this transition data based upon changes in the associated status table GFK 1065F Chapter 8 System Operation 6 7 8 8 Powerup and Power Down Sequence Powerup Sequence The powerup sequence for the Micro PLC consists of the following events as shown in Figure 8 3 1 The CPU runs self diagnostics This includes checking a portion of RAM to determine whether or not the RAM contains valid data Powerup diagnostics can be disabled through hardware configuration It is recommended that you not use this feature unless your application requires unusually rapid powerup For details see Fast Powerup in the index The hardware configuration is compared with the software configuration Any mismatch
272. ohevecbivee seuss H 10 Material Handling Industry eese eee nre H 11 Automated Guided H 11 Paper Industry rem E dete et te H 12 Gear Pumping Machinery iet tereti E e reb tette herren H 12 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Contents Petroleum en epe teo ete eae eesti H 12 Lease Acquisition Control Transfer sesenta H 12 Packaging Industry oi eee e re d ere p et e Le oa e Roe o genda H 13 Shrink Wrapping Machine sees eene H 13 Videocassette Packaging 2 4444 4 e iiaii a 14 Plastics Industty ree ette Ree E ee reir Pete pee H 15 Injection Molding eerte eter epe eite tese eiie tt eda H 15 Plastic Parts Manufacturing esee ener enne enne H 16 Public Emergency Services Industry eese H 17 Storm Warning Systems esce dieere ep betae S H 17 Sports Equipment Industry eese ener nr enne H 18 Boxing Partner Rr PEG IRURE Mea H 18 Tubing Manufacturing Industry eese ener enne enne H 19 Tube eroe ev eu OU H 19 Water and Wastewater Industry eese nennen ennemi H 20 Flood Control
273. on and filter 24 VDC input voltages so that they can be properly detected by the CPU module The input points can be used in either positive or negative logic mode The DC inputs can be used as regular inputs or to supply count and preload strobe inputs for HSCs For more details on the operation of HSCs see Chapter 6 AC Input Circuits IC693UAA003 007 The AC input circuits accept 120 VAC 50 60 Hz signals Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Potentiometer Inputs All Models Two potentiometers are provided to allow adjustment of the values in analog registers AI16 and ATI17 The potentiometers can be turned by inserting a small screwdriver through an access hole in the Micro PLC front panel see Figure 2 3 A potential use for the potentiometers would be to set threshold values for use in logical relationships with other inputs outputs Chapter 2 Introduction 2 7 2 8 Output Circuits Relay Output Circuits IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UEXO11 UAL006 The 2 amp isolated normally open output circuits allow the low level signals from the CPU module to control relay devices There is no fusing on relay outputs The user should provide external fusing to protect the outputs The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the HSCs AC Output Circuits IC693UAA003 007 The AC outpu
274. onal Less Than or Equal To Greater Than or Equal To Than Greater Than _ Than Equal double precision Not Equal double precision Less Than or Equal To double precision Greater Than or Equal To double precision Less Than dplt 76 double precision Greater Than dpgt double precision Range signed integer Range double precision signed integer Range word rangw 142 4 01 all 4 40 Range double not supported 4 01 4 40 word Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table C 2 Programming Function Matrix Continued HHP Logicmaster HHP Function 90 30 20 Micro Series 90 20 CPU Function Instruction Number Software i IC692CPU211 212 Bit Operation Bit Set bitset ogc e Logical Exclusive OR Shift Right Rotate Right Masked Compare word Multiple Integer Move Constant Block bmovi 38 all all all Move Integer Multiple Bit movbn Move Multiple Word Move Constant Block bmovw sae i Block Block Clear Shift Register Word Bees Communication comrq Request GFK 1065F Appendix C PLC Software Cross Reference C 5 Table C 2 Programming Function Matrix Continued HHP Logicmaster HHP Function 90 30 20 Micro Series 90 20 CPU Function Instruction Number Software Micro CPU IC692CPU211 212 Table Functions Search equal to sreq 101 to 104 3 02 Search less than 113 to 116 3 02
275. onnected in series to a base Micro PLC Power down the Micro PLC before connecting an Expansion Unit Connecting an Expansion Unit with the Micro PLC powered up will damage the unit Note If you are connecting a third party expansion unit you will need to provide a ribbon cable Software filtering of generic third party expansion I O is not supported Hardware filtering should be supplied to meet the required noise immunity on these units Micro Expansion Unit The Micro Expansion Unit IC693UEX011 connects to a 23 point Micro PLC to provide additional I O points 8 inputs and 6 outputs per each unit This expansion unit has the following features e Ribbon cable for connection to 28 point Micro PLC is provided with expansion unit This ribbon cable is 3 CM in length and cannot be substituted That is you must use the ribbon supplied with the unit e The Micro PLC firmware supports input filtering of the 14 point expansion units The expansion unit has a 40 pin female connector at each end The left connector can be connected to either a base Micro PLC or to another expansion unit s right side 40 pin female connector via a short ribbon cable Table 3 5 lists pin assignments for the expansion ports The 40 pin ribbon cable provided with the Micro Expansion Unit has keyed connectors to prevent incorrect connection Powering up the system with the cable improperly installed can damage the Expansion Unit Do not substitute the ribbon
276. ontectOrs aee tee e eter Pe e bd e Eee Sene 2 9 Serial POrts NS C EE 2 9 Serial Communications Protocols eese enne nennen nennen 2 9 Port Models rette ere tor E e Pe Ee 2 10 Port 2 23 and 28 Point 5 2 11 Expansion Port 23 and 28 Point Models eee 2 11 Terminal Strips ect he phe Dreier DER D gre mers 2 12 SIGUE Eata ETE 2 13 Power Supply cine see AER 2 13 Configuration and Programming eese nennen nennen nennen 2 14 Fault Reporting AR a ee Seabee 2 14 MES 2 15 Chapter 3 M Minimum Hardware 3 1 Unpacking tei A ditate ute 3 1 Installation Requirements 0 1 Ut ree Feet er eei tendo tien 3 2 HE te ett le aet 3 2 Mounting a Unit on a DIN 2 2 2 0 01 00000000 00 3 4 GFK 1065F Contents Chapter 4 Removing a Unit From a DIN 3 4 Grounding Procedures 54 2 iiti inet Eee ttes ot ege EEEE EE 3 5 Logicmaster Programming Device Grounding esee 3 5 Installation and Wit
277. or IBM PS 2 Workmaster IBM AT XT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an eight wire multidrop serial data configuration Figure D 8 provides an example of the wiring configuration required for the multidrop configuration when using the RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 converter Figure D 9 illustrates the wiring configuration required when a Work Station Interface WSI board is installed in the computer The 37 pin serial port connector for Workmaster and Workmaster computers is on the WSI board in the programming computer The cable type for these connections should be 24 AWG 0 22 mm2 30V computer grade Extra flexible cable construction is recommended for short lengths Figures D 10 through D 12 show wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a Workmaster II or IBM PS 2 Workmaster IBM AT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an eight wire multidrop serial data configuration Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F wayshs siy jo 10 uonejosi 10 sjeljua od snw asnos amod y jou spun ejdniny punoly uid pue 6 uid 1eduin e si 91d qu 10 uorjeuruJel eui 17704d94690I pue 16704946991 8214 06 seues 103 uondeoxe Bul mojo YM qu 10 uoneuruie eui 44204976921 pu
278. or details on installation and operation refer to the documentation provided with the I O Link IEU Additionally if two or more generic expansion units are used in a system they should be configured and physically located with their address offsets in ascending order Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Table 3 5 Micro Expansion Port Pin Assignments IN Left Connector on Expansion Unit 06 Wait state control GND Ground Data 3 Data 2 Data 6 Data 0 Address 0 Address 10 Read Address 11 Address 9 Address 8 Address 7 Wie GND Ground IO link status NA Expansion select Expansion reset NA Data 4 Data 5 Data 1 Data 7 Address 1 OUT Right Connector on Micro PLC and Expansion Unit Name SEIE Eg gt All B11 D1 B13 B18 Em ow feo fren All reserved pins should remain unconnected by expansion units Chapter 3 Installation Function Ground Write Address 07 Address 08 Address 9 Address 11 Read Address 10 Address 00 Data 6 Data 2 Data 3 Ground Wait state control Ground Ground Ground Address 06 Address 05 Address 04 Address 03 Address 02 Address 01 Data 7 Data 5 5 5 9 i Expansion reset Expansion select gt gt A IO link status Agency Approvals Standards and General Specifications fo
279. or each output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line This module provides a high degree of inrush current 10x the rated current which makes the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads An inrush derating curve is provided in Figure 4 10 AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied by the user This module requires an AC power source it cannot be used with a DC power source User replaceable fuses are supplied internally on the common of each output group This fuse does not guarantee that the output point will be protected from a direct short It is recommended that each output point be externally fused minimum 1 amp to protect the output point For lighter loads the internal common fuse 3 2 amp can be replaced with a 1 amp fuse to protect the output point without adding the external fusing a45691 5V 5V LED gt gt CPU Q Q To other 20 Fuse output circuits CPU 10 on same group Figure 4 10 Typical 120 VAC Triac Output Circuit Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 4 11 AC Output Circuit Specifications 01 02 07 08 nd Tour 3 06 09012 100 15 to 240 10 VAC 50 5 to 60 5 Hz Maximum Resistive Load Current 14 point 0 5 A point 0 6 A max on COM 1 1 2 A max on COM 2 28 point 0 5 A point 0 6 A max on COMI COM3 1 2 A max on COM 2 and COM 4 Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rat
280. ory or in RAM Select Control Allows you to calibrate a particular channel in a specific mode Four choices are allowed for each channel 0 Last user calibration The last calibration in flash will be used for the channel and for the mode If no user calibration exists the last factory calibration will be used 1 New The firmware will calculate new gain and offset using the values supplied in the next four words New calibration value will replace the value in the RAM or flash as determined by the Destination Control field 2 Default If this option is specified neither factory nor user calibration value will be used Default calibration value will be used 3 Factory If this option is specified the last factory calibration value will be used Status A status word will be returned by the special service request to notify the user the result of the service request 1 Complete 4 Not in calibration mode 2 Out of tries 5 Calibration values checksum bad 3 Invalid password 6 Invalid calibration data Number of Tries Available Because the number of tries is limited per firmware update the number of tries left will be returned by the service request each time it is performed Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Chapter System Operation This chapter describes system operations of the Series 90 Micro PLC It includes a discussion of the PLC system sweep sequences the system power up and power down s
281. ote Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers They can be entered as hex or as two s complement values In Logicmaster 90 when entering hexadecimal numbers in a reference table a leading A through F must be preceded by a zero for example OFFFF To enter a two s complement number enter it as a negative integer int For additional information see Reference Tables in the Logicmaster Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 1065 ndino 5 jeu amp ig 9000 909992 1 920109 921105 921105 921105 82105 921105 18NOd 1 4 18M0d l8MOg 90A vo Ave 90 0 90 0 9010 9010 9010 9Y 9010 pa 997 zi i e996 ane OWA 2 g 1 g 0 0 0921001 8 5 indu 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Jeuonipuo g 1002 ao 00 9402 60 9402 80 N09 10 90 zwoo 60 0 20 9 1WO2 10 and N 1 Aiddng 2 2 Noo 9 su H ewoo enoo zu ou 4 9 woo Figure G 1 Sample Wiring Diagram for PWM Pulse Train Application
282. other PLCs 2 3 Configuration Analog I O ASCII output 5 21 averaging filter for potentiometers 8 17 DC output 5 35 discrete input filtering 8 16 expansion units 5 26 HSC using HHP HSC using Logicmaster 90 software serial ports using Hand Held Programmer using Logicmaster 90 software Configuration and programming overview Configuration pm register data storing to flash memory 5 8 5 88 18 Configuration HSC Logicmaster 90 screens Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 type A counter 6 25 6 28 type B counter 6 31 Connecting a programming device 3 8 Connections wiring vo 420 input power supply 4 20 Constant sweep time mode Constant Sweep Timers 8 11 Converters 1 655 590 1 690 900 6 690 901 Count direction 6 10 B counter 6 31 configuring for A counters 6 28 Count edge B counter 6 32 configuring for A counters 6 29 type A counters 6 10 Count limits A type 6 11 type B counter Count mode 6 10 B 6 31 configuring for A counters 6 28 type B counter 6 16 Count output enable A counters 6 28 configuring for B counter 6 31 Counter timebase 6 3 type A counter 6 10 Counter enable configuring for A counters configuring for B counter 6 31 Counter strobe preload configuring for A counters configuring for B counter Counter Time Base type B counter 6 17 Counter type HHP screen CPU serial port
283. over full operating temperature range 0 to 55 C Current maximum compliance voltage at 20mA 10V user load range 0 to 500 ohms output load capacitance 2000 pF maximum output load inductance 1 henry maximum Voltage output loading 2 Kohm minimum at 10 volts output load capacitance 1 uF maximum Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuration The analog I O function can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or the HHP Table 7 3 Configuration Parameters for Analog I O ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION AJ0018 Mode Voltage or current mode VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT Current range selection 10019 Mode Voltage or current mode VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT Range Current range selection 4 20mA 4 20mA 20mA AIRef Addr AIRef Addr Addr Analog input reference not editable input Analog input reference not editable not editable ADOS 18 0 0 8 Size Analog input size not editable ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION AQ0012 Mode Voltage or current mode VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT Range Current range selection 4 20mA 4 20mA 0 20mA AQRef Addr Analog output reference not editable 00012 00012 1065 Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 5 7 6 Logicmaster 90 Screens The screens for configuring the Analog I O function follow the High Speed Counter configuration screens in the Logicmaster 90 software Press the PAGE DOWN key to
284. properly followed for safe operation of your Micro PLC system The maximum recommended resistance to ground is 200mQ equivalent to 100 feet of AWG 12 329mm copper cable e Grounding installation must conform to National Electrical Code NEC standards e Ground conductors should be connected with separate branches routed to a central earth ground point This method is shown in the figure below e Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible Braided straps or ground cables AWG 12 3 22mm2 or larger can be used to minimize resistance Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being considered 845684 Motor Drives Machinery and other Electrical Control Programming Series 90 Micro Equipment Device NOTE Signal and power Earth Central connections Ground Ground Point not shown Figure 3 4 Recommended System Grounding Logicmaster Programming Device Grounding For proper operation the programmer for Logicmaster 90 Micro software Workmaster II or CIMSTAR I or IBM PC or compatible computer must have a ground connection in common with the Micro PLC Normally this common ground connection is provided by ensuring that the programmer s power cord is connected to the same power source with the same ground reference point as the Micro PLC but this will need to be verified for each installation Installation and Wi
285. put 9 relay outputs 100 to 240 VAC IC693UAL006 2 analog in 1 analog out 28 16 DC inputs 1 DC output 11 relay outputs 100 to 240 VAC IC693UDR005 16 AC inputs 12 AC outputs 100 to 240 VAC 1C693UAA007 16 DC inputs 1 DC output 11 relay outputs 24 VDC IC693UDROIO What You Will Need One of the Micro PLCs listed above e Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software or Logicmaster 90 Micro software 14 14 14 14 14 8 DC inputs 6 relay outputs expansion unit 23 2 e Programming device and appropriate cables Workmaster II or CIMSTAR I industrial computer an IBM AT PS 2 or other MS DOS compatible Personal Computer with 386 or higher microprocessor and 2 MB memory or a Hand Held Programmer and cable e RS 422 to RS 222 Interface Logicmaster 90 software can use a Work Station Interface WSTI board an RS 422 port or a standard RS 232 interface with an RS 422 to RS 232 converter The WSI board is installed in the Workmaster II computer at the factory e Tools for mounting the Micro PLC and connecting field wiring cables To run Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software the programmer computer will need e At least 4MB of free disk space At least 520KB 532 480 bytes of available DOS application memory for the WSI version at least 564KB 577 536 bytes of available DOS application memory or 520 KB and 42 KB of available High Memory Area Upper Memory Block or Expanded Memory For details see the Logicmas
286. r B Press F1 Program Display Edit An empty program folder will appear For details on using the programming software refer to the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 A sample program for the Micro PLC is provided in the Series 90 Micro Programmable Logic Controller Self Teach Manual GFK 1104 Turn off power to the Micro PLC before connecting field wiring Step 8 Connect Field Wiring Refer to Field Wiring Installation in Chapter 4 for general wiring information and wiring diagrams for each Micro PLC model GFK 1065F Chapter 1 Quick Start 1 3 Frequently Asked Questions 1 4 1 What causes Communications message when I toggle to MONITOR or ONLINE Following are a few possible causes e Insufficient conventional memory at least 545Kbytes in your personal computer to load the Logicmaster 90 communications driver Make sure the config sys file in your computer is properly configured For details on configuring your config sys file refer to Software Installation the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 For additional assistance call your personal computer help line or GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support at 1 800 GEFANUC e Configuration mismatch between Logicmaster 90 in your computer and the PLC configuration Make sure that the computer and the PLC are using the same baud rate and parity From the main menu i
287. r Series 90 Micro PLC The Series 90 Micro PLC products supplied by GE Fanuc are global products which are designed and manufactured for application in industrial environments throughout the world They should be installed and used in conformance with product specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals standards and general specifications AGENCY APPROVALS OVERVIEW Comments Industrial Control Equipment 01 508 CUL Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules Safety European EMC Directive CE Mark Selected modules Hazardous Locations Safety UL1604 Certification by Underwriters Laboratories for selected modules Class I Div I A B C D with C UL 3 20 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F STANDARDS OVERVIEW2 Conditions ENVIRONMENTAL Vibration IEC68 2 6 1G 40 150Hz 0 012in p p 9 10 40Hz JISCO911 Shock IEC68 2 27 15G 11ms 5 0912 Operating Temperature 0 C to 55 C ambient Storage Temperature 409 to 85 C Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing IEC529 Enclosure per IP54 protection from dust amp splashing water EMC EMISSIONS Radiated Conducted CISPR11 Group 1 Class A applies to CE Marked modules 55011 part 15 subpart J EMC IMMUNITY applies to CE Marked modules Electrostatic Discharge IEC801 2 8KV Air Discharge 4KV Contact Discharge EN 61000 4 2 Radiated RF IEC801 3 ms m 80Mhz to 1000Mhz modulated ENV 501
288. r a 2Khz wave which can be scaled to 2000 counts through a multiplication function in the ladder logic The corresponding frequency can be viewed in the counts per timebase register for the above example the HSC 2 counts per timebase register is 103 It should be noted that the TYPE A counter setup requires two inputs for each counter If the second input required for a TYPE A counter is not used for strobing the counter it is still available as an input This means that the signal conditioning input only requires one input per analog channel in Additionally due to hardware constraints when the high speed output function is used PWM or PT channel one cannot be used as a high speed counter input This makes the maximum number of AI set to three when PWM or PT is required in TYPE A counter mode GFK 1065F Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs G 3 G 4 Example 2 Benefits The CALEX 8510 output signal conditioner produces a 0 to 5VDC output for a 0 to 2Khz input from the Micro PLC The voltage output varies proportionally to the applied frequency A frequency of 1Khz will result in an output voltage of 2 5VDC It should be noted that the Micro PLC does not allow frequencies of less than 19hz to be produced because the largest supported value for the AQ register is hex FFFF In addition the frequency that can be output is in increments of 3hz best case but varies between 3 and 4hz due to the rounding effects of the equa
289. r has a maximum timeout of 100ms the time is first programmed as an interval timer that generates an interrupt after 100ms If this time elapses the firmware then programs the timer as a watchdog timer which will reset the microprocessor after an additional 105ms The second step does not usually occur unless the user program is greater than 100ms Therefore if a device holds the wait line before the second step occurs which only occurs if the user program is greater than 100ms the microprocessor will hang because it can never service the interrupt service routine that programs the second step of the process Constant Sweep Timer This timer controls the length of a program sweep when the Series 90 Micro PLC operates in Constant Sweep Time mode In this mode each sweep consumes the same amount of time For most application programs the Input Scan Application Program Logic Scan and Output Scan do not require exactly the same amount of execution time in each sweep The value of the Constant Sweep Timer is set by the programmer and can be any value from 5 to 200 milliseconds The default value is 100 ms If the Constant Sweep Timer expires before the completion of the sweep and the previous sweep was not complete the PLC places an over sweep alarm in the PLC Fault table At the beginning of the next sweep the PLC sets the ov_swp fault contact This contact is reset when the PLC is not in Constant Sweep Time mode or if the last sweep did not ex
290. r the configuration programming software is attached to the Micro PLC The firmware will auto detect the presence of the programmer when RTU is the active protocol so that you only need to begin using the configuration programming software for a 14 point Micro to be able to communicate with it Port 1 All Models A 15 pin D type female connector on the front of the Micro PLC provides the connection to an RS 422 compatible serial port which is used to communicate with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software the HHP or for general purpose communications This port supports SNP and SNPX protocols On 14 point Micro PLCs this port also supports RTU Slave protocols The RS 422 connector is protected by an access door This port can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 configuration program or the HHP except for RTU communications which must be configured by a COMM_REQ function in ladder logic 45451 RS 422 Compatible Serial Port 0 0000000 00000000 Potentiometers Figure 2 3 Micro PLC RS 422 Serial Port Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Port 2 23 and 28 Point Models A second RS 422 compatible serial port also protected by an access door is provided on 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs This port can be used for general purpose communications using SNP SNPX and RTU Slave protocol Serial Port 2 can also be configured as an SNP SNPX Master port The following programming configuration software feature
291. ransistor Outputs 24VDC IC693UDD104 sese 4 12 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Contents 24 VDC Output Power Supply IC693UDR001 002 005 010 IC693UDD104 1C693UALO006 IC693UEXOTL itte rt theo rtt eet ee bee ettet tbt 4 14 Analog Inputs 1 69317 006 2 nen Ea 4 15 Analog Output 6930 006 cessere nennen nennen 4 16 AC Inputs 1 69307 003 007 2 nennen 4 17 AC Outputs IC693UA A003 007 nennen 4 18 Field Wiring Installation i ie ee ee ete 4 20 Wire Connection 4 20 Power Supply and 4 20 General Wiring 4 21 Chapter 5 M UE NT NR 5 1 Micro Parameters 2 edet 5 1 Configuration and Programming Using the HHP eene 5 4 HHP Configuration Screens aee etienne ertt eben tae 5 4 Storing the User Program Using the HHP sse 5 7 Storing Configuration and Register Data Using the 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 5 8 Other HHP F nctiotis ee a e ES EUG ae OR S 5 8 Clearing User Memory Using the 5 8 Booting up in Stop Mode Without Clearing
292. re Failure A sequence store is the storage of program blocks and other data preceded by the special Start of Sequence command and ending with the End of Sequence command If communications with a programming device performing a sequence store 15 interrupted or if any other failure occurs that terminates the download the PLC Sequence Store Failure fault is logged As long as this fault is present in the system the PLC will not transition to RUN mode Accessing Additional Fault Information The Fault Tables contain basic information regarding the fault If more detailed information is needed a hexadecimal dump of the fault can be obtained by positioning the cursor on the fault entry and pressing the CTRL F keys simultaneously The hexadecimal information will be displayed on the line directly below the function key display Two faults Flash Memory Alarm and Watchdog Timer Application Fault are unique to the Series 90 Micro PLC Refer to the table below for descriptions and corrective actions for these faults All other faults applicable to the Series 90 Micro PLC are described in the Logicmaster Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 If you find it necessary to contact Field Service concerning a fault you should be prepared to tell them both the information that is readable directly from the Fault Table and the hexadecimal information you see when you press the CTRL F keys Field Service personnel will give
293. relationship for scaling e Readability of desired output frequency without doing conversion prior to entering into AQ2 register Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Sample Ladder Logic Diagram REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 650007 ALW_ON R0015 CONST 9 84 MHz 8 R0017 OUT_HZ PWM or PT desired output R0021 ROUND1 Round up by adding 0 5 R0023 ROUND2 Divide by 10 to finish round up R0019 SCALE1 9 84MHz 8 Frequency START OF LD PROGRAM CALEX1 VARIABLE DECLARATIONS BLOCK DECLARATIONS START OF PROGRAM LOGIC lt lt RUNG 4 STEP 0001 gt gt ALW_ON 650007 DIV 4 DINT CONST SCALE1 R0015 I1 Q R0019 0012300000 0000098400 OUT_HZ R0017 12 0000000125 lt lt RUNG 5 STEP 0003 gt gt ALW_ON 650007 F t ADD DINT SCALE1 ROUND1 ROUND1 80019 11 0021 80021 4 0000098400 0000098405 0000098405 CONST 12 CONST 4 000000000541 0000000010 lt lt RUNG 6 STEP 0006 gt gt ALW_ON 650007 F F de SUB s DINT ROUND2 SUB1 580023 1 Q4 R0025 0000009840 0000009839 CONST 12 0000000001 Appendix G Sample Application or PWM and Pulse Outputs GFK 1065F DIV_ DINT FI2 ROUND2 I1 0 80023 0000009840 G 5 lt lt RUNG 7 S
294. rief procedures for getting the Micro PLC up and running Includes Frequently Asked Questions and Programming Examples Chapter 2 Introduction An overview of the Micro PLC functional and physical characteristics Describes compatibility with other Series 90 PLCs and lists model specifications Chapter 3 Installation Procedures for installing the Micro PLC and preparing the system for use Included in this chapter are instructions for unpacking inspecting and installing the Micro PLC Instructions are also provided for connecting cables to programming devices Chapter 4 Field Wiring Power and I O specifications and wiring information for the Micro PLC Chapter 5 Configuration Configuration and programming using the Logicmaster 90 Micro software or the Hand Held Programmer Chapter 6 High Speed Counters Features operation and configuration of the High Speed Counter function Chapter 7 Analog I O Features operation and configuration of the Analog I O function a feature of the 23 point Micro PLC Chapter 8 System Operation System operation of the Micro PLC Includes a discussion of the PLC system sweep sequences the power up and power down sequences clocks and timers security through password assignment and the I O system vil Preface Chapter 9 Diagnostics guide to troubleshooting the Micro PLC system Section 1 describes how to use the self diagnostic LED blink codes Section 2 describes
295. ring GFK 1065F Wiring connections to and from user supplied input and output field devices are terminated at two terminal strips on the Micro PLC front panel I O connections are defined on the Micro PLC front panel Wiring diagrams are provided in the Field Wiring section of Chapter 4 Chapter 3 Installation 3 5 Powerup Self test Ensure that the protective cover is installed over terminals on the terminal board when power is applied to the unit The cover protects against accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the operator or maintenance personnel After the proper power connections have been made the Micro PLC can be powered up to verify that the unit is installed correctly Normal Powerup Sequence Apply the required power to the power inputs The Power indicator labeled PWR should light The CPU status indicator labeled OK blinks during the power up self diagnostics When self diagnostics have been successfully completed the OK indicator will remain lighted The Micro PLC can be configured to power up without running diagnostics Unless your application requires fast power up it is recommended that you leave powerup diagnostics enabled For configuration information refer to Chapter 5 The CPU status indicator labeled RUN should light if the unit is configured to run on power up If any of the input points have been wired to field devices that energize those circuits and the RUN
296. ring diagrams DC inputs I1 through I4 are connected as positive and the remaining inputs are connected as negative Note If you are controlling inductive loads you should provide suppression across each inductive load For illustrations of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads see Figure 4 5 GFK 1065F Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 21 Note All DC inputs can be connected as either positive or negative logic In the following figure through I4 are connected as positive and 15 through 18 are connected as negative a45435 24 VDC Output Power Supply or AC or DC AC or DC AC or DC 12 24 Power Source Power Source Power Source VACIVDC L J Whenlt 18 are used as high speed counter inputs the input switches should be solid state to prevent bouncing which could cause unintended high speed counter counts or strobe signals High Speed Counters are provided on the 14 point Micro PLC base units IC693UDR001 002 Figure 4 12 Field Wiring 14 Point DC In Relay Out Modules IC693UDR001 002 IC693UEX011 E 5 45444 AC Power Source AC Power Source D T To To T9 To Ten s T T oon oe os os Ts GND 5 AC 120 240 AC VAC Power Source Power Source Figure 4 13 Field Wiring 14 Point AC In AC Out Modules IC693UAA003 oror oror 4 22 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual
297. rminal strips 2 12 Time base value configuring for A counters 6 10 6 29 configuring for B counter 6 32 Time of Da clock 8 11 setting 5 Timers constant sweep 8 11 timed contacts timer function blocks 8 12 watchdog 8 11 Timing for type B counter 6 14 Micro PLC instructions Transferring 90 20 PLC program to a Micro PLC C 1 Micro PLC program to a 90 30 PLC 5 5 Transistor Outputs 4 13 Transistor outputs for IC693UDD104 4 12 Transition bits 8 7 Troubleshooting accessing the Fault Table display 9 8 fault handling 9 3 Flash Memory Alarm fault 9 8 Logic Not Equal message 9 9 PLC CPU software failure 9 8 PLC sequence store 9 8 GFK 1065F Index technical help 9 9 Watchdog Timer fault 9 8 Two s complement in reference tables 5 37 Type A counter configuration 6 25 described 2 6 operating parameters 6 9 operation 6 8 parameters summary 6 21 Type B counter configuration described 2 6 operating parameters 6 16 operation parameters summary 6 23 U UL hazardous location note Unpacking 3 1 User program examples storing to flash memory 8 18 User references 1 supported by Micro and Series 90 20 PLCs C 7 Watchdog Timer application fault 9 8 described What you will need 1 1 Wire connection information 4 20 Wiring field connections requirements for CE Mark installation Workmaster serial port D 5
298. rogrammer 2 PC AT to RS 485 RS 232 converter F 5 PC XT to RS 485 RS 232 converter Workmaster II to RS 485 RS 232 converter 7 Workmaster interface to SNP port F 6 Workmaster to RS 485 RS 232 converter Calibration Analog 10 7 9 Catalog numbers Micro PLC 1 1 Catalog numbers cables IC647CBL 704 3 10 1C690CBL701 3 IC690CBL702 E 3 F 5 IC690CBL705 E 3 F 7 IC693CBL303 Catalog numbers converters 1 655 590 IC690ACC900 E 2 IC690ACC901 3 10 E 9 Catalog numbers fuse kit 1C693ACC001 3 15 Catalog numbers HHP F 8 Index 1 Index Index 2 IC693PRG300 memory card IC693ACC303 2 15 5 4 Catalog numbers software IC641SWP301L 3047 306F 307F 2 3 Catalog numbers Software cable kit amp manuals IC640HWP 300 2 15 Catalog numbers terminal strips IC693ACCO02 ES SMS BE Catalog numbers WSI board 1C647WMI920 3 10 CE Mark installation requirements 3 22 Cfg From configuration parameter 5 2 Clearing memory 5 8 Clocks elapsed time time of da setting 5 9 Clocks and timers 8 11 function block command block for Port 2 configuration 5 15 custom protocol 5 5 17 6 38 data sending 5 format 6 38 High Speed Counters 6 34 RTUj5 17 5 5 16 Communications link broken 8 14 Compatibility and Series 90 20 PLCs C 1 ee al protocols 2 9 expansion unit 2 11 11 Logicmaster 90 software
299. rrent Accumulator value The Logicmaster 90 configuration software and the HHP will not allow you to set incompatible limits Chapter 6 High Speed Counters 6 17 If aCOMM_REQ sets new limits that are incompatible they will be rejected and the old limits retained In this case a counter limit error code will be returned To avoid this situation when the limits are changed one at a time a good rule to follow is always move the high limit first when shifting the limits up and always move the low limit first when shifting them down The limit range for both Type A and Type B counters is 32 768 to 32 767 Output Preset Points Each counter output has a preset ON and OFF point which must be located between the Hi and Lo limits The output state indicates when the Accumulator value is between the ON and OFF preset points For example 43003 COUNTS RGOUMU OFF PRESET VALUE ON PRESET VALUE CORRESPONDING ON OUTPUT If the output is enabled for the HSC channel being used the output will turn on in accordance with the following table Preset closest to low limit Output ON Output OFF ON gt ON Preset gt OFF Preset lt OFF Preset lt ON Preset lt OFF Preset lt ON Preset gt ON Preset gt OFF Preset As the following example shows the output can be either on or off when the Accumulator value lies between the Preset points The output takes the value of the On or Off preset after the Accumulator
300. rter is required to interface to systems that provide RS 232 compatible interfaces The Series 90 PLC RS 422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication This port is a 15 pin D type female connector located as follows e Series 90 70 Series 90 20 and Series 90 Micro PLCs CPU Module e Series 90 30 PLC Power Supply Figure D 1 shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Series 90 PLC types Table D 3 lists the pin numbering and signal assignments which are the same for both serial port layouts 444521 Series 90 70 Series 90 20 Series 90 30 and Series 90 Micro PLCs PLC NOTE Series 90 PLC connectors use metric hardware see connector specifications Figure D 1 Series 90 PLC RS 422 Serial Port Connector Configuration Note The cable connector for the Series 90 70 Series 90 30 and Series 90 Micro PLC serial port must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly Refer to Connector Cable Specifications Table D 2 GFK 1065F Appendix D Serial Port and Cables D 3 Table D 3 RS 422 15 Pin Connector Assignments Shield Shield No connection No connection 4 ATCH Port 1 Hand Held Programmer attach signal NC Port 2 No connection on Serial Port 2 of 28 point Micro PLCs 5 5VDC See Specifications in Chapter 2 for capacity on Micro PLCs IM RTS A Request To Send Signal Ground Signal Ground Le CTS B Clear
301. s Each Series 90 Micro PLC controls two garment storage rails which contain 400 500 garments each Each system contains 30 40 rails Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Construction Equipment Industry Pipe Measuring System The Need A control system that accurately measures pieces of 4foot to 28foot long pipe in feet and fractions of an inch was needed It is important to display the data in the same units instead of decimals to make the system easy to use for operators The information is received from an encoder and then displayed on the operator interface unit OIU Operators use the OIU to specify pipe length and the control system measures the pipe and cuts it to the specified length The Solution 14point Series 90 Micro PLC and a compatible OIU were installed because they effectively satisfied the cost criteria Also the four high speed counters allowed the Series 90 Micro PLC to interface with a quadrature encoder The Benefits The Series 90 Micro PLC produced more reliable machine operation and improved machine performance By interfacing with the OIU the operator is easily able to set parameters in the PLC which reduce order setup time and allows for faster processing of products The Series 90 Micro PLC This provided the best value for small applications Features include e Economical starter pack e PID functionality e Builtin potentiometers to set timer counter presets e Compatibi
302. s Customer support 9 9 D Data commands Type A counter Type B counter Data structure 8 6 DC inputs described 2 7 specifications DC output GFK 1065F configuring using HHP 5 6 using Logicmaster software 5 35 described 2 6 setting parameters specifications 4 12 DC output circuit described 2 8 DC output for IC693UDD104 specifications 4 12 Default conditions output modules 8 15 Defaults for 6 20 Delta 5 37 Derating curve for AC output 4 19 Diagnostic data fault references 9 7 general 8 18 Em Diagnostics disabled 3 7 normal powerup sequence 3 6 powerup 9 2 DIN rail mounting 3 4 Discrete inputs filtering 8 16 Discrete memory reference definitions 8 6 Duty cycle 5 36 configuring Elapsed Time Clock 8 11 E mail address 9 9 Enable output bits 5 6 6 Environmental requirements 2 20 Error blink codes defined 9 2 Error detection and correction powerup self test 3 7 Errors counter limit error code 6 11 6 18 Logic Not Equal message 9 9 ESD protection CE Mark requirements 3 22 Examples calculation for Pulse Output 5 38 calculation for PWM output command strings for Hayes compatible modems 5 21 HSC application PWM application simple programming 7 12 Index Index Examples applications High Speed Counter input capture 6 41 RPM indicator 6 40 Micro PLCs H 1 PW
303. s are supported through Port 2 when there is no programmer connected to Port 1 1 The status line correctly displays current information about the PLC If the proper folder is selected and verified the status line will show LOGIC EQUAL 2 You can view any of the reference memories on the TABLES page in Logicmaster 90 and can change individual values 3 When ONLINE and LOGIC EQUAL are displayed in the status line the references will be displayed correctly when you view the program logic You can set the privilege level to 1 or 2 Privilege levels 3 and 4 can not be accessed The PLC and IO fault tables are displayed The Time Of Day clock can be set and its current value displayed The RUN STOP state of the PLC can be changed either by pressing ALT R or using the PLCRUN screen Sal 20 DENS OE It is not possible to load and store programs and configuration through Port 2 because the privilege level is restricted to level 2 by the PLC firmware Autobaud is not supported on Port 2 Port 2 can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or by a COMM_REQ function block within a ladder logic program see Configuring Serial Ports in Chapter 5 On release 3 0 and later 28 point Micro PLCs a separate SNP ID for Port 2 can be configured using Logicmaster 90 software release 8 00 or later On earlier releases Port 2 shares the SNP ID with Port 1 and the SNP ID can only be changed through Port 1 For more information
304. s for User Options Table E 3 Jumper Configuration for RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter Jumper Jumper Position Label Position Description LW ea JP4 EN Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device communicating with the PLC does not supply the Carrier Detect signal JP2 forces the DCD signal active on the RS 485 port Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does supply the Carrier Detect signal This allows the programming device to control DCD Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached Modem does not require the Clear To Send CTS signal This allows the programming device to control the RTS signal Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the attached Modem does require the CTS signal most modems require this signal Forces RTS to be continually active Default position 1 and 2 is used for most applications communicating with the PLC via a serial programming device Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device communicating with the PLC is intended to emulate the HHP protocol Refer to the documentation provided with your serial device for signal requirements Appendix E Converters E 7 Specifications Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in Appendix D Specifications for the converter are listed in the following table Table 4 Specifications for 690 900 Converter Power Requirements Current 170 mA
305. s negative following figure I1 through I8 are The 250 ohm resistors on the analog All DC inputs can be connected as input circuits are internal 4 25 Figure 4 16 23 Point DC In Relay and DC Out IC693UAL006 Chapter 4 Field Wiring GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration The Series 90 Micro PLC can be configured and programmed using any of the following methods Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software on a Workmaster or CIMSTAR I industrial computer or an IBM PC AT PS 2 Personal System 2 or compatible Personal Computer Logicmaster 90 Micro software part of IC640HWP300 on any of the above computers Series 90 30 90 20 Hand Held Programmer IC693PRG300 Both configuration and programming can be done off line from the PLC using the Logicmaster 90 Micro software Configuration and programming using the Hand Held Programmer HHP must be done with the HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC For more information about the use of these programmers refer to the following Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual GFK 0467 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Manual GFK 0401 Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 Micro PLC Parameters GFK 1065F Table 5 1 lists general parameters for the Micro PLC Configuration parameters for features
306. screen will only appear for Counter 1 if the PWM option and the PULSE OUTx option for the same channel are disabled see screens 16 and 17 on page 6 30 This series of four screens is used to set the counter output enable 0 04 HSC lt s CTRx OUT ENABLE Screens 5 20 33 46 Count Direction These screens are used to set the count direction for each counter RO 04 HSC lt s CTRx DIR UP Screens 6 21 34 47 Count Mode These screens specify the Count Mode continuous or one shot RO 04 HSC lt 5 CTRx MODE CONT Screens 7 22 35 48 Counter Strobe Preload Selection This series of screens is used to select PRELOAD or STROBE operation for R0 04 HSC S Counters 1 4 CTRx PRELOAD Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Screens 8 23 36 49 Strobe Edge These screens configure the Preload Strobe edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal 20 04 HSC S STB EDGEx POS Screens 9 24 37 50 Count Edge These screens configure the counter input edge to trigger on a positive or negative going signal RO 04 HSC lt 5 CTRx EDGE POS Screens 10 25 38 51 Time Base Value These screens allow you to enter the time base to be used in the Counts Per Time Base RO 04 HSC lt S calculation The default is 1000 TIME BS x 1000 milliseconds 1 second To change the time base use the numeric keys on the HHP to select the value then press
307. screte Input Filtering Control Filter control reference Discrete input filtering I inputs is done via software that allows you to change the filtering time on the fly The filter time for the discrete inputs is adjustable from 0 5ms to 20ms in 0 5ms increments The memory location 11 is used to store the filter time value To adjust the filter time simply change the value in 11 Each value in AQ11 represents 0 5115 increment For example if you set to a value of 10 the filter time will be 5ms If you set to 5 the filter time will be 2 5ms The minimum value for 11 is 1 0 5ms and the maximum value is 40 20ms Due to PLC limits any value under 1 in represents a filter time of 0 5ms and any value over 40 represents a filter time of 20ms Note Because AQ11 is used to control the discrete input filtering time it is recommended that you not use 11 for any other purpose Default filter The default value for is 6 which represents a filter time of 3ms time Accuracy of The filter time set in 11 will be accurate within 0 5ms filter Limitations of Discrete Input Filtering What a discrete input will not This software filter only lets in signals that have a duration scan within 0 5ms of the set filter time For example if the filtering time is set to 5ms it could allow any signal that is greater than 4 5ms to be seen as an input What a discrete input will scan
308. serial port of a Workmaster computer or Personal Computer Electrical and General Voltage Supply 5VDC supplied by PLC power supply Typical Current Version A IC690ACC901A 150mA Version IC690ACC901B 100mA 0 to 70 C 32 to 158 F E 12 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Isolated Repeater Converter This section describes how to use the Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 with Series 90 PLCs The following topics are covered in this section e Description of the Isolated Repeater Converter e System Configurations e Cable Diagrams This unit can be purchased from GE Fanuc Automation Please contact any GE Fanuc Automation sales office or PLC distributor Note The catalog number for the Isolated Repeater Converter was previously IC630CCM390 Description of the Isolated Repeater Converter The Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 can be used for the following purposes e provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established between components boost RS 422 signals for greater distance and more drops e To convert signals from RS 232 to RS 422 or RS 422 to RS 232 The locations of key features on the unit are shown in Figure E 10 GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters E 13 E 14 a42418 GE Fanuc ISOLATED RS232 ADAPTOR UNIT SIDE VIEW Figure E 10 Isolated Repeater Converter The Isolated Repeater Converter has t
309. stem with enough power and analog capabilities was needed to replace a large modular PLC and relays The system will receive input from air flow and temperature sensors to determine when to sound the air raid sirens to alert the public of tornadoes and other severe weather The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was used with an analog adapter because of its compact yet robust features The Benefits The compact size of the Series 90 Micro PLC allows it to use existing or smaller enclosures lowering the overall cost for the PLC and associated equipment Also its reliability is essential to sound sirens for the public s safety Air Flow and Temperature Sensors Analog O The Series 90 Micro performs logic on input from the Sensors to alert the town of pending tornadoes and other forms of severe weather Appendix H Case Histories H 17 Sports Equipment Industry Boxing Partner The Need A compact control system with large application ability was needed for a boxing simulation machine designed for amusement and training The machine allows a person to train for boxing or to try their talents at the sport The simulator is designed for gyms and amusement areas Due to the simulator s movement patterns a high speed counter was necessary as well as low voltage DC inputs The Solution A 14point Series 90 Micro PLC and a GE Variable Frequency Drive were chosen The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because it
310. t 0 20mA 0 to 20 0004A 0 to 32000 40p Albit Current 4 20mA 4 to 20 0004 0 to 32000 40p Abit Mode Formula Voltage 0 10V Register Value 2 3 2 x mV Current 0 20mA Register Value 1 6 x uA Current 4 20mA Register Value 2 x uA 8000 Based on factory loaded offset and gain Example If the analog input function is configured for Current 4 20mA mode 7 5mA current on input INI will result in a value of 7 500uA x 2 8000 14 992 in 10018 GFK 1065F Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 3 7 4 Table 7 2 Analog I O Specifications Analog Input Channels 2 differential Input ranges 0 to 10V 10 24V max 0 to 20mA 20 5mA max 4 to 20 mA 20 5mA max Calibration Factory calibrated to 0 313mV per count on 0 to 10V range 0 625uA per count on 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20 mA ranges Resolution 0 to 10 V range 10 bits 1 LSB 10mV 0 to 20 mA range 9 bits 1 LSB 40u A 4 to 20 mA range 8 bits 1 LSB 40p A 1 of full scale over full operating temperature range Linearity 3 LSB maximum Common mode voltage 200 V maximum Current input impedance Voltage input impedance 800 Kohms Input filter time 20 2ms to reach 1 error for step input Analog Output Channel 1 single ended non isolated Output ranges 0 to 10V 10 24V maximum 0 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum 4 to 20mA 20 5mA maximum Resolution 12 bits over 0 to 10V range 12 bits over 0 to 20mA range 11 bits over 4 to 20mA range Accuracy 1 of full scale
311. t S R16 R0001 0016 6 Press to configure output data reference RO 09 32out S 7 Press Q ENT to select Q memory type RO 09 32out S Q256 8 Press 5 7 ENT to select Q57 312 for output reference RO 09 32out S 0256 00057 0312 1065 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 33 Reference Error Checking When configuring the references for generic and I O Link Interface expansion units the HHP will verify that the specified reference length doesn t go beyond the end of the corresponding reference table It will also verify that input data references do not overlap those of other input devices that have been configured in the system When Past End of Ref Memory error is detected the HHP will display an error message as RO 09 ref err lt S 0256 00289 0544 follows When an Overlapping Input reference error is detected the HHP will display an error message as follows RO 09 ref err lt S I256 10017 0272 5 34 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Configuring Q1 for PWM or Pulse Output IC693UDR005 010 and IC693UAL006 The high speed DC output Q1 can be configured for PWM pulse train or HSC output Counter channel can be configured for only one of these outputs at a time Because AQUADB counting uses channels 1 3 the PWM and pulse train outputs not available when a type counter is configured In the sample screen below PWM is enabled Note T
312. t be indoors with primary facility surge protection on the incoming AC power lines On Micro PLCs that have DC inputs IC693UDR001 002 005 010 UAL006 UEX011 The wires between the 24 VDC output and COMI on the 23 point Micros only must be as short as possible On 23 and 28 point DC In Relay Out Micro PLCs IC693UDR005 010 UALO06 The cable connection to Serial Port 2 should be configured as shown in Figure 3 12 to minimize noise The wire between the cable shield and the FRAME GND pin of the D SUB connector on the cable should be cut The cable shield should then be connected to the GND terminal screw on the Micro PLC unit On 28 point DC In Relay Out Micro PLCs IC693UDR005 010 Inputs used as high speed counter inputs must be powered separately An external power supply should be provided for the high speed counter inputs as shown in Figure 3 13 For wiring of discrete inputs and outputs refer to the field wiring diagrams in Chapter 4 On 28 point DC In Relay Out Micro PLCs IC693UDR005 010 Under the conditions of the Surge Withstand test EN61000 4 5 HSC miscounts could occur These additional counts can be minimized by using shielded cable and by keeping the cabling length less than 30 meters In the presence of noise serial communications could be interrupted 3 22 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F Externa 2 Serial Port 2 Series 90 Micro PLC SS
313. t points provide 120 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 5 A signals DC Output IC693UDR005 010 IC693UAL006 The DC output circuit provides a 24 VDC output voltage This output can be used as a normal DC output HSC controlled output pulse train output or pulse width modulation PWM output Analog I O IC693UAL006 The 23 point Micro PLC features two analog input channels that map to 10018 and 10019 in the PLC In voltage mode the analog to digital A D range of 0 32 000 counts corresponds to a 0 10 V input signal In 0 20mA current mode the A D range of 0 32 000 counts corresponds to a 0 20mA input signal In 4 20mA current mode the A D range of 0 32 000 counts corresponds to a 4 20mA input signal The analog output channel maps to 00012 In voltage mode the output channel digital to analog D A range of 0 to 32 000 counts corresponds to a 0 10V output In 0 20mA current mode a range of 0 to 32 000 counts corresponds to a 0 20mA output signal In 4 20mA current mode the A D range of 0 32 000 counts corresponds to a 4 20mA output signal Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Input Output Connectors Serial Ports Port 1 on the Micro PLC is intended to be used as the programmer serial port A second RS 422 compatible serial port to be used by monitoring devices is provided on 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs Serial Communications Protocols Table 2 4 Communication Protocols Supported
314. t significant byte of data is used with this command Example To offset counter 3 by 7 counts load Command word 0304 LS data word 00F9 This can be done at any time even while the counter is counting at maximum rate If the offset causes the counter to exceed its limits this parameter will be rejected If a count is received at the same time the CPU updates the Accumulator value the count will be lost Set Cntr Direction Command Code 05H Used to change the count direction up or down of a type A counter Only the LSB of the first data word is used for this command 00 up 01 down Example To set the direction of counter 4 to down load Command word 0405 LS data word 0001 Load Timebase Command Code 06H Used to change the time interval referenced by the counter when computing its counts timebase register data Example To change the timebase for counter 2 to 600 ms 258H load Command word 0206 LS data word 0258 Note The maximum range of the counts timebase register is 32767 and 32768 counts The length of the timebase and the maximum count frequency should be coordinated so that these limits are not exceeded The indication will roll over from to or to if exceeded Load ON Preset Command Code Load OFF Preset Command Code 15H Used to set up the output turn on off points within the counter range There is one output associated with each counter Example
315. t will run when power is restored Table 5 12 Sample Values for PWM Duty Cycle and Frequency Contents of Frequency Register Contents of Duty Cycle Register AQ 21 03 1 Typical On Duty Two s Two s Frequency Cycle 3 Decimal Complement Decimal Complement 24VDC 200mA 0 default 100 default 12299 35142 30394 Formulas 1 Values greater than 32767 cannot be entered as decimal numbers They can be entered as hex or as two s complement values 84 MH 2 Frequency calculation 02 SSIM 1 Frequency tolerance is 0 01 8 frequency d 1 84 3 On Duty Cycle calculation AQ3 delta_delay E 1 100 frequency 8 Where on duty cycle is a value from 0 to 100 and delta delay is the difference between the off and on response times of the output device See Table 5 13 for typical delta delay values 184 4 On Time calculation AQ3 delta_delay 4 1 1 5 Off Time calculation Off Time ontime frequency Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 5 13 Typical Values for Delta Delay Units Typical Delta Delay Revision Date Code for IC693UDR005 at 24VDC 16mA output 1 5 Kohm load IC693UDR005 0 22ms Revision B with date code less than 606 IC693UDR005 0 09ms Revision C or later or Revision B with date code equal to or greater than 606 Note In Logicmaster 90 when entering hexadecimal numbers in a reference table a lead
316. tage Drop 0 3 VDC maximum Response ON 0 1ms maximum 24 VDC 0 2A OFF 0 1ms maximum 24 VDC 0 2A OFF state leakage 0 1mA maximum Isolation 1500 VAC between field side and logic side 500 VAC between groups Note A pulldown resistor connected between Q1 and COMI is required for high frequency Pulse PWM up to 2 Khz refer to Chapter 5 for low value outputs and for duty cycles in the lower ranges 5 and lower A 1 5 Kohm 0 5 watt resistor is recommended for this purpose Transistor Outputs 24VDC IC693UDD104 The transistor output circuits allow to switch devices like valves lamps or contactors These transistor outputs are not protected The user should provide external fusing to protect the outputs The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High Speed Counters Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation PWM outputs refer to the PMW Output section of Chapter 5 All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage Outputs of IC693UDD 104 have one common incoming supply VC one common ground 4 12 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F GFK 1065F The outputs are able to drive high inrush currents 8 times the rated current and are protected against negative voltage pulses This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads The outputs are not short circuit proof and req
317. team identify possible problem areas in the sewer line The Series 90 Micro PLC provides valuable information about the capabilities of the existing sewer system to handle large amounts of water during heavy storms Manholes in the Road Float Switch Sewer System Series 90 Micro PLCs use float switches to monitor the level of water in the sewer system During storms it cycles relief pumps on and off to prevent the backup of water into houses and businesses Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Sewage Wastewater Lift Stations The Need A reliable control system was needed to replace a large cabinet containing 6 timers and 140 relays Lift stations located throughout a town were constantly failing and requiring emergency callouts of electricians at all hours The control system is used to control the water level in a wet well It operates two pumps alternately each for a specified amount of time to reduce the wear and tear on the pumps It also monitors the valve check arms to verify that the switches are complete and that water is flowing properly It must also monitor the operating temperature of the motors and shut down the motors if a thermal overload occurs The Solution The Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because it offers programming hardware and software compatibility with the Series 9030 PLC which was already being used In addition the Series 90 Micr
318. ter 90 30 30 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 GFK 1065F 1 1 Getting Started 1 2 The following procedure outlines the steps required to put your Micro PLC into operation Step 1 Unpack the Micro PLC First carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage Unpack the shipping container and verify the contents Record all serial numbers For details see Unpacking in Chapter 3 Step 2 Install the Micro PLC Mount the Micro PLC on a vertical surface a wall or panel using screws or on a 35mm DIN rail The Micro PLC requires a minimum clearance of 1 99 inches 50mm on each side for cooling For details see Installation Requirements and Installation in Chapter 3 Step 3 Connect Ground and Power Wiring e For safe operation of your Micro PLC the installation must meet the requirements of Grounding Procedures in Chapter 3 e For power connections refer to the wiring diagram for the Micro PLC model that you have See Field Wiring Installation in Chapter 4 Step 4 Power up Test Ensure that the protective cover is installed over terminals on the terminal board when power is applied to the unit The cover protects against accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to personnel Apply the required power to the system The Micro PLC should perform a self diagnostic test The OK indicator will blink during power up diagnostics When self diagnostics have been su
319. ter 90 programmer If you are using an HHP configuration and programming can be done on line with the HHP attached to and interfacing with the PLC Programming configuration communications must use Port 1 The Micro PLC provides flash memory for non volatile user program storage and for system firmware The user program is always executed from flash memory However the Micro PLC can be configured to read its configuration at powerup from either RAM or flash memory ROM Use of the programming and configuration software is described in the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 The Workmaster II computer is described in the Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Manual GFK 0401 Use of the HHP is described in the Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 Fault Reporting The Micro PLC monitors internal operations for system and user problems These faults are reported through the S references and through an internal fault table Access to S information is available through the Logicmaster 90 software or the HHP The fault table can only be accessed by Logicmaster 90 software For more details on faults and fault reporting see Chapter 9 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Specifications The following tables list ordering information physical and functional characteristics and input power requirements for th
320. ter and the corresponding quantities on the analog I O point As part of the analog output scan the firmware will calculate the D A value using the following formula D A count X Gain Offset where Gain and Offset are internally calibrated values Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 will be clamped at that maximum value Any calculated value less than 0 will be clamped at 0 Analog 1 0 function in Micro PLC firmware calculates a count value that corresponds Output count Analog Output Channel 00012 D A Converter to the desired current or voltage and writes the calculated value to the D A Figure 7 2 Analog Output Channel Table 7 1 shows the relationship between the analog register value and the actual value on the input or output for each mode Table 7 2 summarizes the performance characteristics of the analog I O function Refer to Specifications in Chapter 2 for general module specifications For details of the input and output interface circuitry refer to Analog Inputs and Analog Outputs in Chapter 4 For field wiring information and diagram refer to General Wiring Procedures in Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Table 7 1 Relationship of Register Values to Analog Values Analog Value on Input Register Value in Mode or Output Point or AI Resolution Bit User Counts Bit 32 Voltage 0 10 0 to 10 000mV 0 to 32000 10mV bit Curren
321. that Put String does not send the escape sequence for Hayes compatible modems The Maximum Transmit Timeout field specifies in seconds the maximum time interval the COMM_REQ will wait for the entire string to be sent If this time is set to 0 a default value of 4 seconds plus the time required to transmit the number of characters is used If the string is not transmitted during the specified interval or the default interval an error code is generated The Number of Bytes in Command String field specifies the length of the command string to be sent This length includes all characters A status code indicating successful transmission will be returned when the string has been completely sent out the serial port Table 5 8 Sample Command Block for Put String Command 1 0009H CUSTOM data block length includes command string 000 Number of bytes in command string GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 23 5 24 Figure 5 3 Sample Put String Command Block Sends the string hello world TOO04 CONST 0 80201 0009 CONST IN2 0000 CONST IN3 0008 CONST IN4 0000 CONST 5 0000 CONST IN6 0000 CONST IN7 1131 BLKMV WORD CONST IN1 Q R0108 001 CONST IN2 000 CONST IN3 6568 CONST IN4 6066 CONST IN5 206F CONST IN6 6 77 CONST IN7 6C72
322. the program to the PLC will now result in Logic Equal You can avoid this problem by disabling the WARN MULTIPLE feature from the Multiple Coil Use screen For details refer to Coil Checking in the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Software User s Manual GFK 0466 Technical Help PLC Hotline Phone numbers 800 433 2682 or 804 978 6036 Internet address PLCHOTLINE CHO GE COM Fax number 804 978 5099 GE Fanuc Bulletin Board Files on this bulletin board are provided by GE Fanuc as is and no warranties apply The phone number is 804 975 1300 up to 33 600 baud 8 data bits 1 parity bit no stop bits After accessing the BBS select the BBS File area PLC AGENCY STATUS and the file AGENSTDS XLS This information is also available on the Internet at our technical support World Wide Web site at the address http www gefanucsupport com PLC Fax Link 804 978 5824 GFK 1065F Chapter 9 Diagnostics 9 9 Appendix Instruction Timing A This appendix contains tables listing the memory size in bytes and the execution time in microseconds for each function supported by the Micro PLC Memory size is the number of bytes required by the function in a ladder diagram application program Two execution times are shown for each function Execution Time Description Enabled Time required to execute the function or function block when power flows into and out of the function Typically best case times are when the data used
323. time base that is used in the Counts Per Time Base R0 04 HSC lt 5 calculation The default is 1000 milliseconds 1 TIME BS x 1000 second To change the time base select the value using the numeric keys on the Hand Held Programmer and then press the ENT key to record the value Screens 11 26 High Limit R0 04 HSC S These screens are used to specify the highest HI LIM x 32767 most positive value of the Count Accumulator The default is 32767 which is the maximum value the counters can handle As with the timebase use the Hand Held Programmer numeric keys to change the value then press the ENT key to record it Pressing CLR instead of ENT cancels the entry Screens 12 27 Low Limit These screens specify the lowest most negative RO 04 HSC g value for the Count Accumulator LO LIM x 0 Screens 13 28 ON Preset Value When the counter Accumulator exceeds this value depending also on the value of the OFF preset the associated output is turned on depending on the state either enabled or disabled of the output control flags in the Q data word For details see Output Preset Points on page 6 18 RO 04 HSC lt S ON PST x 32767 Screens 14 29 OFF Preset Value When the Accumulator exceeds this value R0 04 HSC lt 5 dependent also on the state of ON Preset the OFF PST x 0 associated output is turned off Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Screens 15
324. tion The setup for the signal conditioning output is similar to that for the input except that values must be written to AQ2 and AQ3 registers to set up frequency and duty cycle respectively From the Logicmaster 90 configuration package e Select the I O configuration e Select TYPE A counter option e Disable High Speed Counter 1 e Enable PWM output From the Logicmaster 90 programmer package e Set the value of the AQ3 register to 200 decimal this value produces the proper duty cycle over the full frequency range e AQ register to the required value to produce the desired frequency according to the equation 9 84 MHz Frequency 8 402 1 The frequency output equation is rewritten in terms of 2 as follows 84 AQ 98 2 8 Frequency 1 which represents the value that needs to be written into the 2 register to produce the desired frequency The application code provided on pages G 5 through G 6 solves the above equation and writes the value into the 2 register Due to firmware constraints the lowest frequency that can be obtained is 19hz Values less than 19 exceed the maximum value allowed for the 2 register The application code will set the frequency to 100 duty cycle constantly on 1 for a value of less than 19 written into the 2 register e Analog available on a per channel basis e Cost effective solution e Fase of ramping output through application code with a one to one
325. to Send RD A Receive Data Send Data 14 RTS B Request To Send SU Cirio Send Signals available at the connector but are not included in the RS 422 specification Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs with catalog numbers IC697CPU731J and IC697CPU771G and earlier the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and 11 SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B denote outputs and A and B denote inputs Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F 2 Workmaster Serial Port GFK 1065F The Workmaster II industrial computer RS 232 serial port is a 25 pin D type male connector and the early model Workmaster is a 9 pin male connector Figure D 2 shows the serial port connector layout for both computers Table D 4 shows the pin numbering and signal assignment for both connector types 44522 WORKMASTER AND STANDARD WORKMASTER 25 PIN EARLY MODEL AND XT 5 13 2 9 5 gt 6 Figure D 2 Workmaster RS 23
326. two analog input channels and an output channel which can be configured in voltage or current mode The analog I O function can be configured by the Logicmaster 90 configuration software or by the HHP The following topics are discussed in this chapter e Overview e Configuration e Calibration 7 1 7 2 Overview The two input analog channels use a 10 bit successive approximation A D converter The Micro PLC firmware translates counts from two input channels of the A D converter into values that are stored in 10018 and AI0019 Figure 7 1 As a part of the analog input scan the firmware calculates the AI register value using the following formula A D count X Gain Offset where Gain and Offset are internally calibrated values refer to page 7 Calibration for information about calibration Any calculated value exceeding 32 767 is clamped at that maximum value Any calculated value less than 0 will be clamped at 0 Analog Input Channel 1 Channel 1 Count Analog I O function in Micro PLC firmware 10018 calculates and stores the results in the reference location for the channel 410019 A D Converter Analog Input Channel 2 Channel 2 Count Figure 7 1 Analog Input Channel To generate the analog output the value in 70AQ0012 is translated into a count value for the D A converter which drives the analog output Figure 7 2 Table 7 1 lists the ranges of values in the PLC analog regis
327. two tables Table E 5 lists the pinout for the RS 232 port The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection using a straight through or 1 to 1 cable as provided with kit to the IBM PC AT Most IBM compatible computers equipped with an RS 232 port will provide a pinout compatible with the one shown below Table E 5 Miniconverter RS 232 Port Pin Signal Name Direction 2 SD Send Data Output 3 RD Receive Data Input 5 GND Ground NA 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RTS Request To Send Output Table E 6 is the pinout for the Miniconverter s RS 422 serial port The direction of signal flow is also with respect to the Miniconverter Table E 6 Miniconverter RS 422 Port 1 SHLD Shield NA 5 5VDC Power Input 6 CTS A Clear To Send Input 7 GND Ground NA 8 RTS B Request To Send Output 9 RT Receive Termination Output 10 SD A Send Data Output 11 SD B Send Data Output 12 RD A Receive Data Input 13 RD B Receive Data Input 14 CTS B Clear To Send Input 15 RTS A Request To Send Output E 10 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F System Configurations The Miniconverter can be used in a point to point configuration as described above or in a multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs configured as slaves The multidrop configuration requires a straight thro
328. ual GFK 0467 Workmaster IT PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GFK 0401 Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation GEK 25373 Hand Held Programmer Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0356 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0262 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0582 Series 90 Micro Field Processor User s Manual GFK 0711 Important Product Information Micro PLC GFK 1094 Important Product Information Micro Expansion Unit GFK 1474 Data Sheet 14 Point Micro PLCs GFK 1087 Data Sheet 28 Point Micro PLCs GFK 1222 Data Sheet 23 Point Micro PLC GFK 1459 Data Sheet Micro Expansion Unit GFK 1460 At GE Fanuc Automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Dave Bruton Senior Technical Writer Preface ix Contents Chapter 1 OLTITA SCIL esee What You Wil Necedi nueve secede cs shes ee eere 1 1 Getting Started ss tees een idee e tete a Pe SHE 1 2 Frequently Asked QuestiOhis 23 IG es e EUH Lees 1 4 Programming Examples 1 6 Chapter 2
329. uc offers and the cost effectiveness of the product The Benefits The reliability and ease of programming of the Series 90 Micro PLC have greatly benefited the customer Production was doubled with less operator fatigue and the customer realized hundreds of dollars of savings per year Air e Guide and Clamp Foot Pedal GFK 1065F Appendix H Case Histories H 9 Lumber Industry Pallet Rebuilding The Need A smaller control system was needed to measure the length of each board and position a hydraulic press to flatten protruding nails The existing system consisted of a large PLC The Solution A 14point Series 90 Micro PLC was chosen because it offers compact size and high speed The Benefits The analog potentiometers on the Series 90 Micro PLC allow the operator to fine tune the system to compensate for conveyor speed changes The customer realized hundreds of dollars in savings per machine by replacing the larger PLC The Series 90 Micro PLC receives input from photo sensors on the conveyor to control the cylinders that position the boards H 10 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Material Handling Industry Automated Guided Vehicles The Need The Automated Guided Vehicles AGVs are powered by a 24VDC battery power supply which also operates the control system The manufacturer of these systems needed to replace the existing PLC that used an excessive amount o
330. ugh 1 to 1 cable from the Miniconverter s RS 422 port to the first slave PLC s SNP port Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection between slaves A maximum of eight devices can be connected in an RS 422 multidrop configuration All of the devices must have a common ground If ground isolation is required you can use the GE Fanuc Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 in place of the Miniconverter When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection it may be necessary to jumper RTS to CTS consult the user s manual for your modem Cable Diagrams Point To Point When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with hardware handshaking the following cable connections should be used a44982 PIN 2 3 7 8 5 1 6 4 MINICONVERTER IBM PC AT RS 232 PORT 9 PIN 9 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure E 7 Miniconverter to PC AT a44983 Miniconverter Workmaster Il RS 232 Port IBM PC XT PS 2 9 pin 25 pin Connector Connector Figure E 8 Miniconverter to Workmaster PC XT PS 2 GFK 1065F Appendix E Converters 11 a44984 Miniconverter W orkmaster RS 232 Port 9 pin 9 pin Connector Connector Figure E 9 Miniconverter to 9 Pin Workmaster or PC XT Computer Additional Adapter Required Table E 7 Miniconverter Specifications Mechanical RS 422 15 pin D shell male for direct mounting to Series 90 serial port RS 232 9 pin D shell male for connection to RS 232
331. uire external fuses for each output to be effectively protected For this purpose fast fuses are recommended Table 4 6 Specifications for Transistor Outputs 24 VDC Voltage Range 24VDC 20 15 at VC Maximum Load per point 01 02 at 100 ON duration 0 5A per point Q2 Q6 at 100 ON duration plus additional for UDD110 0 5A per point Q7 Q10 at 100 ON duration 1A per point Q11 Q12 at 100 ON duration Maximum Inrush Current 8A for 20ms 1 pulse 1A outputs 4A for 20ms 1 pulse 0 5A outputs Output Voltage Drop 0 5V maximum OFF state leakage 1004A maximum Response OFF ON typical ON 5 OFF 10015 typical Isolation Voltage 500V ac between field side and logic side To other circuits 5V 24VDC external gt gt To other circuits Board Terminal Strip CPU Board Figure 4 6 Typical Transistor Output Circuit 24 VDC Chapter 4 Field Wiring 4 13 4 14 24 VDC Output Power Supply IC693UDR001 002 005 010 693000104 IC693UAL006 IC693UEX011 An isolated 24 VDC output power supply is available for user devices and can be used to power the DC input circuits at about 7 5 mA per input The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not exceed 100 mA for 14 point units and 200 mA for 23 and 28 point units Table 4 7 Specifications for 24 VDC Power Supply Micro PLCs Current 14 point Micro 100 mA maximum 23 point Mi
332. value of 7 for 0 through 128 samples The analog value from the potentiometer is not reported until the number of sweeps determined by the value in AQI has occurred If you want to receive a value from the potentiometer on every sweep including the first sweep AQ1 must contain 0 Default Filter Time The default value in is 4 meaning that 16 samples will be averaged Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering As with any filter the longer the filter time 1 the more samples that are taken the longer the response time Although the maximum value of 7 could be used in 6AQI this value might cause long response time on larger programs For example if the sweep time of a program is 100ms and if the potentiometer value is changed the new value would not show up for 12 8 seconds Chapter 8 System Operation 8 17 Diagnostic Data Diagnostic bits are available in the S memory Diagnostic information is not available for individual I O points Refer to Chapter 9 for more information on fault handling Flash Memory 8 18 The Series 90 Micro PLC provides flash memory for non volatile user program storage and for system firmware In addition the Read Write Verify EE Flash PROM with PLC User Memory function initiated from either Logicmaster 90 or the HHP uses flash memory for storage of the configuration and reference data Because the user program is stored in non volatile flash memory only one copy is mainta
333. value to the register 2 At the output measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and record the value 3 Write a high value to the register 4 At the output measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and record the value 5 Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using a SVCREQ instruction See Storing Calibration Constants The Micro PLC firmware will automatically calculate the calibration gain and offset using the following formulas 40 xDefaultGain Meter Meter Gain Offset X DefaultGain Meter Gain GFK 1065F Chapter 7 Analog I O 7 11 Storing Calibration Constants The final step of calibrating an analog channel consists of storing the calibration values in flash memory This step requires the use of two SVCREQ functions SVCREQ 34 signals the Micro PLC to enter calibration mode When SVCREQ 34 is received the PLC uses default gain and offset so that you can start the calibration process No parameter block is needed SVCREQ 35 performs the calibration This function requires a parameter block containing the calibration data and control data Based on these inputs the PLC computes the gain and offset for each channel and mode specified When the calibration SVCREQ 15 successfully completed the new calibration values will take effect The parameter block for SVCREQ 35 contains the
334. y 1 OFF state on the corresponding output Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater Converter Table E 8 Isolated Repeater Converter Pin Assignments J1 RS 422 Port 25 pin female connector J2 RS 422 RS 232 Port 25 pin female connector Pin Signal 1 NC 2 NC 4 NC 5 6 NC 7 lov 8 CTS B 9 CTS A 10 CTS B 11 CTS A 12 RTS B 13 RTS A 14 RD B 15 RD A 16 SD A 17 SD B 18 NC 19 NC 20 NC 21 NC 22 RD B 23 RD A 24 SD A Description No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection No connection Ground Connection Clear to Send Optional Termination Clear to Send Optional Termination Clear to Send Clear to Send Request to Send Request to Send Receive Data Receive Data Send Data Send Data No connection No connection No connection No connection Receive Data Receive Data Send Data Pin Signal 1 NC 2 SD 3 RD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 INC 7 OV 8 CTS B 9 CTS A 10 RTS B 11 RTS A 12 CTS B 13 CTS A 14 SD B 15 SD A 16 RD A 17 RD B 18 RD A 19 RD B 20 NC 21 NC 22 SD B 23 SD A 24 NC Description No connection Send Data RS 232 Receive Data RS 232 Request to Send RS 232 Clear to Send RS 232 No connection Ground Connection Clear to Send Optional Termination Clear to Send Optional Termination Request to Send Requ
335. y another modem Modem is unable to complete the requested command Retry the modem command at a later time 11 0BH An unknown response was received from the modem Modem is unable to complete the requested command Check the modem command string and modem The modem response is expected to be either CONNECT or OK 50 32H COMM REQ timeout The COMM REQ did not complete within a 20 second time limit GFK 1065F Chapter 5 Configuration 5 25 Configuring Expansion Units 23 and 28 Point Micro PLCs Each 23 and 28 point Micro PLC can support up to four expansion units See Chapter 3 for installation instructions The expansion unit configuration screens follow immediately after the high speed counter screens or the Serial Port 2 screen Table 5 10 lists the parameters for each type of expansion module available The default selection is EMPTY UNIT as shown in the screen below To configure an expansion module press to select EMPTY UNIT press the 4 key to choose the model and press ENTER There are three types of expansion units e Series 90 14 point standard expansion units which have 8 discrete inputs and 6 discrete outputs e Generic expansion units which can have a mixture of I Q AI and or AQ references IAPTGENERIC and GENERICEXP e T O Link Interface expansion unit which has 32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output data that can be mapped to any valid reference memory except S IC693UEX013 Table 5 1
336. you further instructions Table 9 5 PLC CPU Software Faults Name Flash Memory Alarm Error Code BAD_FLASH_OP 32 Description The PLC operating system generates this fault when it detects an internal Flash device error during a Flash write or erase operation Correction Display the PLC Fault Table on the Programmer Contact GE Fanuc PLC Field Service giving them all the information in the Fault Table Name Watchdog Timer Application Fault Error Code SFTWR_WD_EXPIRED 2 Description The user s program execution time exceeds the watchdog setting of 200 ms PLC resets and goes to STOP FAULT mode Correction Modify user program so time is not exceeded If the user program is not causing the problem make sure any inductive loads being used are properly suppressed For more information see Output Circuit Protection in Chapter 4 Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual June 1998 GFK 1065F Special Operational Notes Inaccurate Logic Not Equal Message When coil use is set to WARN MULTIPLE Logicmaster 90 software allows multiple coil use with warning messages This feature can give misleading feedback for Micro PLCs If coil references are added or deleted in the RLD program the Logic Not Equal warning will be displayed To correct the inaccurate message enter the program edit package press F1 and then select Option press F7 From the Multiple Coil Use screen press F1 to run the coil check function Storing

GE Fanuc Series 90 Micro PLC Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents